Skip to main content

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats


CATALOG '8  5- '8  6 


LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 


Founded  1812 


Williamsport,  Pennsylvania 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 

Lyrasis  Members  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198586lyco 


CATALOG '8  5- '8  6 


LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 


Founded  1812 


Williamsport,  Pennsylvania 


Communicating  with  Lycoming  College 


Please  address  specific  inquiries  as  follows: 

Director  of  Admissions 

Admissions:  requests  for  publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment  of  bills;  expenses. 

Director  of  Financial  Aid: 

Scholarships  and  loan  fund;  financial  assistance. 

Dean  of  College: 

Academic  programs;  faculty;  faculty  activities. 

Dean  of  Student  Services: 

Some  activities;  residence  halls;  religious  life;  health  services; 
academic  support  services. 

Registrar: 

Student  records;  transcript  requests;  academic  policies. 
Career  Development  Center: 

Career  counseling;  employment  opportunities. 

Executive  Director  for  College  Advancement 

Institutional  relations;  annual  fund;  gift  programs. 

Director  of  Alumni  and  Parent  Relations 
Alumni  information;  parent  support 

Director  of  Public  Relations 

Public  information;  publications;  sports  information 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to: 
Lycoming  College 
Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701 

The  College  telephone  number  is  (717)  326-1951. 


Visitors 


Lycoming  welcomes  visitors  to  the  campus.  If  you  would  like  a  guided  tour,  call 
the  Office  of  Admissions  before  your  visit  to  arrange  a  mutually  convenient  time. 


Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  prospective  students  regardless  of  age.  sex.  race, 
religion,  handicap,  finances,  national  or  ethnic  origin,  or  color.  Lycoming  does  not  discriminate  on  the 
basis  of  age,  sex.  race,  religion,  handicap,  finances,  national  or  ethnic  origin,  or  color  in  the 
administration  of  any  of  its  policies  and  programs. 


Contents 

Welcome  to  Lycoming 3 

The  Academic  Program 5 

The  Curriculum 21 

Student  Services 60 

Admission 62 

Financial  Matters 64 

The  Campus 68 

Academic  Calendar,  1985-1986 70 

Directory 71 

The  Alumni  Association 79 

Index 81 


The  general  regulations  and  policies  Muted  in  this  catalog  are  in  affect  for  the  1985-86  academic  year.  Students 
beginning  their  first  term  at  Lycoming  College  in  the  fall  of  1985  or  the  spnngof  1 986  are  thereafter  governed  by  the 
policies  staled  in  this  catalog  Requircnicnls  governing  a  student's  major  are  those  in  effect  at  the  time  a  major  is 
formally  declared  and  officially  accepted  by  the  major  department. 

If  changes  are  made  in  subsequent  editions  of  the  catalog  to  either  general  requirements  or  major  requirements, 
students  may  be  permitted  the  option  of  following  their  original  program  or  a  subsequent  catalog  version,  but  the 
College  always  reserves  the  right  to  determine  which  requirements  apply. 

II  a  student  interrupts  his  or  her  education  without  a  leave  of  absence,  the  catalog  requirements  in  effect  at  the  time  of 
readmission  will  apply  Students  on  an  approved  leave  of  absence  retain  the  same  requirements  they  had  when  they 
entered,  if  their  leaves  do  not  extend  beyond  one  year. 

Lycoming  College  reserves  the  right  to  amend  or  change  the  policies  and  prcKcdures  stated  in  this  catalog  without 
prior  notice  to  those  who  may  be  affected  by  them.  The  provisions  of  this  publication  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  an 
irrevocable  contract  between  the  applicant  and/or  the  student  and  Lycoming  College. 


Welcome  to  Lycoming 


Lycoming  is  an  independent,  coeduca- 
tional college  dedicated  to  providing  the 
type  of  learning  that  can  be  used  for  a 
lifetime  —  the  liberal  arts  and  sciences. 

Lycoming's  academic  relevance 
derives  from  its  enduring  commitment  to 
the  value  of  this  type  of  education,  as 
offered  by  a  superior  teaching  faculty. 
The  College's  principal  aim  is  to  help 
students  develop  a  central  core  of  inte- 
grated values,  skill,  information,  and 
strategies  while  they  learn  to  communi- 
cate, reason,  make  decisions,  under- 
stand, and  use  their  imagination.  This 
type  of  education  can  lead  to  productive 
and  fulfilling  lives  in  many  fields  while 
allowing  lifelong  growth  and  develop- 
ment. 

Lycoming  awards  bachelor  of  arts 
degrees  in  30  major  fields,  a  bachelor  of 
fine  arts  degree  in  sculpture,  and  a 
bachelor  of  science  degree  in  nursing. 
The  curriculum  is  challenging.  Because 
it  is  built  upon  the  two  principles  of  the 


liberal  arts  known  as  distribution  and 
concentration,  it  allows  students  to  study 
in  breadth  and  depth. 

Students  who  have  special  interests 
not  met  entirely  by  a  major  field  can 
design  their  own  majors.  Or,  if  they  are 
interested  in  teaching,  medicine,  law, 
dentistry,  or  the  ministry,  they  can  take 
courses  needed  to  enter  their  advanced 
study. 

Students  also  can  study  engineering, 
forestry  or  environmental  studies, 
podiatric  medicine,  optometry,  medical 
technology,  and  sculpture  through 
cooperative  programs  operated  by 
Lycoming  with  other  colleges  and  uni- 
versities. Or,  they  can  study  abroad  or  in 
Harrisburg,  Pa.,  Washington,  D.C.,  or 
New  York  City  through  other  off- 
campus  study  programs. 

Most  students  complete  their  program 
of  study  in  four  years,  usually  by  taking 
four  courses  each  fall  and  spring  semes- 
ter. But  students  also  can  take  one  course 


during  Lycoming's  May  term,  or  two 
courses  during  the  summer  term. 

Recognizing  students"  concerns  about 
careers,  Lycoming  offers  extensive 
counseling  through  the  Career  Develop- 
ment Center  and  advisory  committees  for 
prelaw,  prehealth  professions,  and  pre- 
medical  students.  The  College  also  oper- 
ates a  wide-ranging  internship  program 
that  allows  students  to  earn  academic 
credit  while  working  at  area  businesses, 
government  offices,  and  nonprofit  orga- 
nizations. 

Lycoming's  ratio  of  faculty  to  students 
is  15  to  one,  which  means  that  most 
classes  are  small  and  there  is  abundant 
opportunity  for  individual  attention.  All 
faculty  members  teach.  More  than  70 
percent  of  Lycoming's  faculty  hold  the 
highest  degrees  in  their  fields  from  the 
nation's  outstanding  colleges  and  univer- 
sities. And.  faculty  members  take  their 
advising  seriously.  They  care  about  stu- 
dents, and  encourage  and  guide  them  so 
they  receive  the  education  they  want. 

Eighteen  buildings  sit  on  Lycoming's 
main  campus.  Most  of  them  have  been 
built  since  1950.  The  modem  buildings 
include  the  eight  residence  halls;  the 
library;  the  Academic  Center,  which 
houses  the  Arena  Theatre,  planetarium, 
computer  center,  and  art  gallery;  the  stu- 
dent union;  the  physical  education/ 
recreation  center,  including  a  six-lane, 
25-yard  pool;  a  completely  renovated 
fine  arts  center  with  excellent  facilities  to 
accommodate  sculpture,  painting, 
drawing,  printmaking,  ceramics  and 
photography;  and  a  music  building, 
which  houses  individual  music  practice 
rooms  and  an  electronic-music  studio. 

Lycoming  houses  approximately  900 
of  its  1,250  students  in  the  residence 
halls,  which  include  double  and  single 
rooms.  Most  students  find  the  campus 
friendly  and  comfortable,  with  all  of  the 
buildings  easy  to  reach  from  anywhere 
on  campus.  Students  come  from  a  variety 
of  economic  classes,  religious  beliefs, 
and  geographic  areas,  although  most  stu- 
dents call  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey,  or 
New  York  their  home.  They  work  and 
play  together  in  an  atmosphere  of  respect 
and  tolerance. 

The  College  offers  a  variety  of  extra- 


curricular  activities,  including  an  Artist 
Series.  Student  government  groups  help 
to  plan  campus  activities  and  social 
events.  Numerous  clubs,  honor 
societies,  social  fraternities  and  sorori- 
ties, the  student  newspaper,  yearbook 
and  literary  magazine,  and  the  band  and 
widely  acclaimed  choir  meet  other  stu- 
dent interests.  Students  who  like  to  per- 
form or  compete  can  act  on  the  Arena 
Theatre  stage  or  play  on  intercollegiate 
or  intramural  sports  teams.  Intercollegi- 
ate teams  for  men  include  football,  soc- 
cer, basketball,  wrestling,  tennis,  golf, 
swimming,  track  and  field,  and  cross 
country.  Intercollegiate  teams  for 
women  include  basketball,  tennis,  field 
hockey,  swimming,  track  and  field,  and 
cross  country. 

In  addition,  students  who  like  hiking, 
backpacking,  skiing,  camping,  fishing, 
hunting,  kayaking,  spelunking,  and 
other  outdoor  sports  will  find  Lycom- 
ing's location  ideal. 

Lycoming  is  situated  on  a  slight 


prominence  near  downtown  Williams- 
port,  a  small  city  nestled  along  the  West 
Branch  of  the  Susquehanna  River  in 
northcentral  Pennsylvania's  rolling  hills 
and  valleys.  Yet,  the  College  is  within  a 
four-hour  drive  of  metropolitan  centers 
such  as  New  York  City,  Philadelphia, 
Pittsburgh,  Washington.  D.C..  Balti- 
more. Syracuse,  Rochester,  and  the  New 
Jersey  shore  points.  The  Williamsport- 
metro  area  is  home  to  about  75.000  per- 
sons. 

Lycoming  enjoys  a  relationship  with 
The  United  Methodist  Church.  It  sup- 
ports the  Methodist  tradition  of  provid- 
ing an  education  for  persons  of  all  faiths. 

Fully  accredited.  Lycoming  is  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Middle  States  Association  of 
Colleges  and  Schools,  and  the  University 
Senate  of  The  United  Methodist  Church. 
It  is  a  member  of  the  Association  of 
American  Colleges,  the  Pennsylvania 
Association  of  Colleges  and  Universi- 
ties, the  Commission  for  Independent 
Colleges  and  Universities,  the  National 


Commission  on  Accrediting,  and  the 
National  Association  of  Schools  and 
Colleges  of  The  United  Methodist 
Church. 

HISTORY 

Lycoming  College  was  founded  in  1812 
as  the  Williamsport  Academy,  an 
elementary  and  secondary  school. 
Thirty-six  years  later,  the  academy 
became  the  Williamsport  Dickinson 
Seminary  under  the  patronage  of  The 
Methodist  Episcopal  Church.  The  semi- 
nary operated  as  a  private  boarding 
school  until  1929,  when  a  college  curri- 
culum was  added  and  it  became  the  Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson  Seminary  and 
Junior  College.  In  1947,  the  junior  col- 
lege became  a  four-year  degree-granting 
college  of  liberal  arts  and  sciences.  It 
adopted  the  name  Lycoming,  derived 
from  the  Indian  word  "lacomic," 
meaning  "Great  Stream."  The  word 
Lycoming  has  been  common  to  north- 
central  Pennsylvania  since  colonial  days. 


Academic  Program 


THE  BACHELOR  OF 
ARTS  DEGREE 

Lycoming  is  committed  to  the  principle 
that  a  liberal  arts  education  is  the  best 
hope  for  an  enlightened  citizenry.  Con- 
sequently, the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  is 
conferred  upon  the  student  who  has  com- 
pleted an  educational  program  incorpor- 
ating the  two  principles  of  the  liberal  arts 
known  as  distribution  and  concentration. 
The  objective  of  the  distribution  princi- 
ple is  to  insure  that  the  student  achieves 
breadth  in  learning  through  the  study  of 
the  major  dimensions  of  human  inquiry; 
the  humanities,  the  social  sciences,  and 
the  natural  sciences.  The  objective  of  the 
concentration  principle  is  to  provide 
depth  of  learning  through  completion  of 
a  program  of  study  in  a  given  discipline 
or  subject  area  known  as  the  major. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  DEGREE 

Every  degree  candidate  is  expected  to 
complete  the  following  requirements  in 
order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

—  complete  the  distribution 
program. 

—  complete  a  major  consisting  of  at 
least  eight  courses  while  achieving 
a  minimum  grade  point  average  of 
2.0  in  those  courses. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in  physical 
education.  All  students  must  dem 
onstrate  competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physician 
after  an  examination  and  review  of 
the  student's  medical  history  and 
family  physician's  report.) 

—  pass  a  minimum  of  128  semester 
hours  (32  unit  courses)  with  a  mini- 
mum cumulative  average  of  2.0. 
Additional  credits  beyond  128 
semester  hours  may  be  completed 
provided  the  minimum  2.0  cumu- 
lative average  is  maintained. 

—  complete  in  residence  the  final 
eight  courses  offered  for  the  degree 
at  Lycoming. 

—  satisfy  all  financial  obligations 
incurred  at  the  College. 

—  complete  the  above  requirements 


within  seven  years  of  continuous 
enrollment  following  the  date  of 
matriculation. 

All  exemptions  or  waivers  of  specific 
requirements  are  made  by  the  Committee 
on  Academic  Standing. 


THE  BACHELOR  OF 
FINE  ARTS  DEGREE 

The  bachelor  of  fine  arts  degree  is  speci- 
fically designed  to  train  professional 
artists.  The  BFA  in  sculpture  is  a  synthe- 
sis of  three  diverse  forms  of  education:  a 
studio  art  program  that  emphasizes  the 
skills  and  concepts  of  the  visual  lan- 
guage; an  apprenticeship  that  takes  tech- 
nical expertise  as  the  departure  point, 
and  the  scholastic  method  employed  in 
both  art  history  and  the  general- 
education  component. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR 
THE  BACHELOR  OF 
FINE  ARTS  DEGREE 

Every  BFA  degree  candidate  is  expected 
to  complete  the  following  requirements 
in  order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

—  complete  the  12-course  Art 
Department  course  of  study. 

—  complete  the  distribution  program. 

—  complete  a  total  of  32  course  units 
achieving  a  minimum  grade  point 
average  of  2.0  in  those  courses 
taken  within  the  College. 

—  complete  one  of  the  field  speciali- 
zation apprenticeships  at  the  John- 
son Atelier  Technical  Institute  of 
Sculpture. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in  physical 
education.  All  students  must  dem- 
onstrate competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physician 
after  an  examination  and  review  of 
the  student's  medical  history  and 
family  physician's  report.) 

—  complete  in  residence  the  final 
eight  courses  offered  for  the  degree 
at  Lycoming. 

—  satisfy  all  financial  obligations 
incurred  at  the  College. 


—  have  a  public  exhibition  of  original 
art  work  and  make  an  oral  defense. 

THE  BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 
IN  NURSING  DEGREE 

The  program  of  study  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  science  in  nursing  degree  is 
designed  to  prepare  men  and  women  as 
beginning  practitioners  of  professional 
nursing,  qualified  for  first-level  posi- 
tions in  a  variety  of  health  settings  or  for 
graduate  study  in  nursing.  Upon  satis- 
factory completion  of  the  program,  a 
graduate  is  eligible  to  write  the  State 
Board  of  Nursing  examination  for  licen- 
sure as  a  registered  nurse.  The  goal  of  the 
program  is  to  develop  a  liberally  edu- 
cated and  self-directed  individual  who  is 
prepared  to  contribute  to  the  welfare  of 
the  nation  through  the  practice  of  profes- 
sional nursing  which  supports  the  prom- 
otion and  restoration  of  health  of  indivi- 
duals and  families  in  a  variety  of  settings. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR 

THE  BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 

IN  NURSING  DEGREE 

Every  BSN  degree  candidate  is  expected 
to  complete  the  following  requirements 
in  order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

—  complete  the  13-course  major  with 
a  minimum  cumulative  average  of 
2.0,  including  the  required  May 
term  following  the  junior  year. 

—  complete  the  distribution  require- 
ment as  modified  for  the  BSN 
degree. 

—  complete  a  minimum  of  128 
semester  hours  (32  units)  with  a 
minimum  cumulative  average  of 
2.0. 

—  earn  one  year  of  credit  in  physical 
education.  All  students  must  dem- 
onstrate competence  in  swimming. 
(Medical  exemptions  may  be 
granted  by  the  College  physican 
after  an  examination  and  review  of 
the  student's  medical  history  and 
family  physician's  report.) 

—  complete  in  residence  the  final 
eight  courses  offered  for  the  degree 
at  Lycoming. 


—  satisfy  all  financial  obligations 
incurred  at  the  College. 

—  complete  the  degree  requirements 
within  a  five-year  period  after 
admission  to  the  nursing  major. 
Candidates  who  are  unable  to  meet 
this  requirement  must  petition  for 
an  extension. 


THE  DISTRIBUTION  PROGRAM 

A  course  can  be  used  to  satisfy  only  one 
distribution  requirement.  Courses  for 
which  a  grade  of  "S"  is  recorded  may 
not  be  used  toward  the  fulfillment  of  the 
distribution  requirements.  (Refer  to  page 
10  for  an  explanation  of  the  grading 
system. )  A  course  in  any  of  the  following 
distribution  requirements  refers  to  a 
full-unit  (four  semester  hours)  course 
taken  at  Lycoming,  any  appropriate 
combination  of  fractional  unit  courses 
taken  at  Lycoming  which  accumulate  to 
four  semester  hours,  or  any  single  course 
of  three  or  more  semester  hours  trans- 
ferred from  another  institution.  For  the 
BSN  degree,  see  special  modified  distri- 
bution requirements  as  listed  below. 

English  —  All  students  are  required  to 
pass  English  6  and  one  other  English 
course,  excluding  English  3  and  5. 
English  6  should  be  taken  during  the 
freshman  year  and  must  be  taken  no  later 
than  the  second  semester  (usually  the 
spring  semester)  of  the  sophomore  year. 
In  addition,  all  students  who  have  not 
been  exempted  from  English  5  must 
receive  a  mark  of  "Satisfactory"  in 
English  5  before  being  permitted  to 
enroll  in  English  6.  Students  are  placed 
in  English  5  or  6  on  the  basis  of  their 
performance  on  the  Achievement 
Examination  in  English  Composition. 
English  3  may  not  be  used  to  satisfy  the 
distribution  requirement  in  English. 

Foreign  Language  or  Mathematics 

—  Students  are  required  to  meet  a  mini- 
mum basic  requirement  in  either  a  fore- 
ign language  or  the  mathematical  sci- 
ences. 

Foreign  Language.  Students  may 
choose  from  among  French,  German, 


Greek,  Hebrew,  or  Spanish  and  are 
required  to  pass  two  courses  on  the  inter- 
mediate or  higher  course  level.  Place- 
ment at  the  appropriate  course  level  will 
be  determined  by  the  faculty  of  the 
Department  of  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures.  Students  who  have  com- 
pleted two  or  more  years  of  a  given 
language  in  high  school  are  not  admitted 
for  credit  to  the  elementary  course  in  the 
same  foreign  language  except  by  written 
permission  of  the  chairman  of  the  depart- 
ment. French  28  and  Spanish  32  will 
meet  part  of  this  requirement  only  if  the 
section  taught  in  the  language  is  com- 
pleted. 

Mathematics.  Students  are  required  to 
demonstrate  competence  in  basic  algebra 
and  to  pass  three  units  of  mathematical 
science  other  than  Mathematics  5.  Com- 
petence in  basic  algebra  may  be  demon- 
strated either  by  passing  the  basic  algebra 
section  of  the  Mathematics  Placement 
Examination  or  by  passing  Mathematics 
5.  By  demonstrating  higher  competence 
on  the  Mathematics  Placement  Exami- 
nation, students  may  reduce  the  require- 
ment to  two  units  of  mathematical  sci- 
ence. No  more  than  one  unit  may  be 
taken  in  computer  science. 

Religion  or  Philosophy  —  Students 
are  required  to  pass  two  courses  in  either 
religion  or  philosophy.  Any  two  religion 
courses  may  be  used  to  fulfill  the 
philosophy/religion  distribution  require- 
ment, with  this  exception:  only  one 
course  from  the  combination  Religion 
20-21  may  be  selected  for  distribution. 

Fine  Arts  —  Students  are  required  to 
pass  two  courses  as  indicated  in  art, 
literature,  music,  or  theatre. 

Art.  Any  two  courses. 

Literature.  Any  two  literature  courses 
selected  from  the  offerings  of  the  Depart- 
ments of  English  and  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  (French,  German,  or 
Spanish). 

Music.  Any  combination  of  music 
offerings  totaling  the  equivalent  of  eight 
semester  hours,  for  example: 

—  a   course    or   courses    from 
those  numbered  Music  10  through 


Music  46. 
—  applied  music  (private  lessons) 
and/or  ensemble  (orchestra,  choir, 
band)  earned  fractionally  as  fol- 
lows: 

(1)  for  private  lessons  (Music  60 
through  66)  a  one-half  hour  les- 
son per  week  earns  one-half 
hour  of  credit;  a  one-hour  lesson 
earns  one  hour  of  credit.  Note: 
There  are  extra  fees  for  these 
lessons.  (For  details  see  Depart- 
ment of  Music  course  offerings 
described  elsewhere  in  this 
catalog.) 

(2)  credit  may  be  earned  for  partici- 
pation in  the  Williamsport  Sym- 
phony Orchestra  (Music  67), 
the  College  choir  (Music  68) 
and/or  band  (Music  69);  howev- 
er, a  student  may  earn  no  more 
than  one  hour  each  semester 
even  though  participating  in 
orchestra,  choir,  and/or  band. 
(For  further  details,  please  see 
the  Department  of  Music  offer- 
ings elsewhere  in  this  catalog.) 

Theatre.  The  fine  arts  distribution 
requirement  may  be  satisfied  by  select- 
ing any  two  of  the  following  recom- 
mended courses:  Theatre  10,  11,  14,  18, 
32,  33,  or  other  courses  with  the  consent 
of  the  instructor. 

Natural  Science  —  Students  are 
required  to  pass  any  two  courses  in  one  of 
the  following  disciplines:  astronomy  and 
physics,  biology,  or  chemistry. 


History  and  Social  Science  —  Stu- 
dents are  required  to  pass  two  courses  as 
indicated  in  economics,  history,  political 
science,  psychology,  or  sociology/ 
anthropology. 

Economics.  Any  two  courses. 

History.  Any  two  courses,  except 
History  31. 

Political  Science.  Any  two  courses. 

Psychology.  Psychology  10  and  one 
other  course. 

Sociology /Anthropology.  Sociology/ 
Anthropololgy  10  plus  another  course. 


THE  DISTRIBUTION  PROGRAM 
FOR  THE  BSN  DEGREE 

English  —  standard  require- 
ment as  shown  above. 
Mathematical  Sciences  —  compe- 
tence in  basic  algebra  as  demon- 
strated by  completion  of,  or 
exemption  from  Math  5;  Mathe- 
matics 13;  and  Computer  Science 
15 
Religion  and  Philosophy  —  Religion 

20  and  Philosophy  19 
Fine  Arts/Foreign  Language  —  two 
courses  from  one  department  as 
follows: 

Art  —  any  two  (2)  courses 
Literature  —  any  two  literature 
courses  selected  from  the  depart- 
ments of  English  and  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literatures 
Music  —  any  combination  of  eight 
(8)  credits,  including  applied 
music,  ensemble,  and  music 
department  courses 
Theatre  —  any  two  (2)  courses  from 
among  Theatre  10,  11,  14,  18. 
32,  33,  or  other  courses  with  the 
consent  of  the  instructor. 
Language  —  any  two  (2)  courses  at 
the  intermediate  or  higher  level. 
No  student  who  has  had  two  or 
more  years  of  a  given  foreign 
language  in  high  school  shall  be 
admitted  to  the  elementary 
courses  in  that  same  language  for 
credit,  except  by  written  permis- 
sion of  the  chairman  of  the 
department. 
Natural  Science  —  Chemistry  8,  15 
Social  Science  —  Psychology  10  and 
17;  Sociology  and  Anthropology 
—  one  from  among  Soc  10,  14,20, 
28,  and  29. 
Physical  Education  —  standard 
requirement  as  shown  on  page  5. 


THE  MAJOR 

Students  are  required  to  complete  a  series 
of  courses  in  one  departmental  or  inter- 
disciplinary (established  or  individual) 
major.  Specific  course  requirements  for 
each  major  offered  by  the  College  are 


listed  in  the  curriculum  section  of  this 
catalog.  Students  must  earn  a  2.0  or 
higher  grade-point  average  in  those 
courses  stipulated  as  comprising  the 
major.  (This  requirement  is  not  met  by 
averaging  the  grades  for  all  courses  com- 
pleted in  the  major  department.)  Stu- 
dents must  declare  a  major  by  the  begin- 
ning of  their  junior  year.  Departmental 
and  established  interdisciplinary  majors 
are  declared  in  the  Office  of  the  Regi- 
strar, whereas  individual  interdisciplin- 
ary majors  must  be  approved  by  the 
Committee  on  Curriculum  Develop- 
ment. Students  may  complete  more  than 
one  major,  each  of  which  will  be 
recorded  on  the  transcript.  Students  may 
be  removed  from  major  status  if  they  are 
not  making  satisfactory  progress  in  the 
major.  This  action  is  taken  by  the  Dean 
of  the  College  upon  the  recommendation 
of  the  department,  coordinating  com- 
mittee (for  established  interdisciplinary 
majors),  or  Curriculum  Development 
Committee  (for  individual  interdisciplin- 
ary majors).  The  decision  of  the  Dean  of 
the  College  may  be  appealed  to  the 
Academic  Standing  Committee  by  the 
student  involved  or  the  recommending 
department  or  committee. 

Departmental  Majors  —  Departmental 
majors  are  available  in  the  following 
areas: 

Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business  Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer  Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

French,  German,  Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political  Science 
Psychology 
Religion 


Sociology/ Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established  Interdisciplinary  Majors 

—  The  following  established  interdis- 
ciplinary majors  include  course  work  in 
two  or  more  departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical  Sciences 

American  Studies 

Criminal  Justice 

International  Studies 

Literature 

Mass  Communication 

Near  East  Culture  and  Archaeology 

Individual  Interdisciplinary  Majors 

—  Students  may  design  a  major  that  is 
unique  to  their  needs  and  objectives  and 
which  combines  course  work  in  more 
than  one  department.  This  major  is 
developed  in  consultation  with  the  stu- 
dent's faculty  adviser  and  with  a  panel  of 
faculty  members  from  each  of  the  spon- 
soring departments.  The  application  is 
acted  upon  by  the  Curriculum  Develop- 
ment Committee.  The  major  normally 
consists  of  10  courses  beyond  those 
taken  to  satisfy  the  distribution  require- 
ments. Students  are  expected  to  com- 
plete at  least  six  courses  at  the  junior  or 
senior  level.  Examples  of  individual 
interdisciplinary  majors  are  Racial  and 
Cultural  Minorities,  Illustration  in  the 
Print  Medium,  Environmental  Law, 
Advertising,  Art/History,  Art/Business, 
Human  Behavior,  and  Images  of  Man. 

Major  in  Sculpture  Leading  to  Bache- 
lor of  Fine  Arts  Degree  —  Through  a 
cooperative  program  with  the  Johnson 
Atelier  Technical  Institute  of  Sculpture, 
Princeton,  New  Jersey,  students  may 
earn  a  BFA  degree  in  sculpture.  The 
major  consists  of  a  core  academic  pro- 
gram, a  course  of  study  in  art,  elective 
courses,  and  an  apprenticeship  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier. 


THE  MINOR 

The  College  awards  two  kinds  of  minors, 
departmental  and  interdisciplinary,  in 
recognition  of  concentrated  course  work 
in  an  area  other  than  the  student's  major. 
All  minors  are  subject  to  the  following 
limitations: 

—  a  minor  must  include  at  leasl 
two  courses  which  are  not  counted 
in  the  student's  major. 

—  a  student  may  receive  at  most  two 
minors. 

—  students  with  two  majors  may 
receive  only  one  minor;  students 
with  three  majors  may  not  receive  a 
minor. 

—  students  may  not  receive  a  minor  in 
their  major  discipline  unless  their 
major  discipline  is  Art  and  the 
minor  is  Art  History.  (A  discipline 
is  any  course  of  study  in  which  a 
student  can  major.  Tracks  within 
majors  are  not  separate  discip- 
lines.) 

—  a  student  may  not  receive  a  minor 
unless  his  average  in  the  courses 
which  count  for  his  minor  is  a  mini- 
mum of  2.00. 

—  courses  taken  S/U  may  not  be 
counted  toward  a  minor. 

Students  must  declare  their  intention  to 
minor  by  signing  a  form  available  in  the 
Registrar's  Office,  getting  required 
faculty  signatures,  and  returning  the 
completed  form  to  the  Records  Room. 
When  students  complete  a  minor,  the 
title  will  be  indicated  on  their  official 
transcript.  Students  must  meet  the 
requirements  for  the  minor  which  are  in 
effect  at  the  time  they  declare  a  minor  or 
which  are  in  effect  subsequent  to  that 
time  and  before  they  graduate. 


Departmental  Minors  —  Require- 
ments for  a  departmental  minor  vary 
from  department  to  department.  Students 
interested  in  pursuing  a  departmental 
minor  should  consult  that  department  for 
its  policy  regarding  minors. 

Departmental  minors  are  available  in 
the  following  areas: 


ACCOUNTING 

Financial  Accounting 

Managerial  Accounting 

Federal  Income  Tax 
ART 

Art  History 

Sculpture 

Painting 
BIOLOGY 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

English  Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American  History 

European  History 

History 
MASS  COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Computer  Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy  and  Law 

Philosophy  and  Science 

The  History  of  Philosophy 
POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Political  Science 

Foreign  Affairs 

Legal  Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 
SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 

Sociological  &  Anthropological 
Views  of  Religion 
THEATRE 

Theatre  History  &  Literature 

Performance 

Technical  Theatre 


Interdisciplinary  Minors  —  Interdis- 
ciplinary minors  include  coursework  in 
two  or  more  departments.  Students  inter- 
ested in  interdisciplinary  minors  should 
consult  the  faculty  coordinator  of  that 
minor.  An  interdisciplinary  minor  is 
available  in  the  following  area:  BIBLI- 
CAL LANGUAGES. 


ACADEMIC  ADVISEMENT 

One  advantage  of  a  small  college  is  the 
rich  experience  gained  by  the  close  asso- 
ciation of  students  and  faculty.  The 
advisement  program  at  Lycoming 
enables  students  to  discuss  academic  and 
other  problems  as  well  as  opportunities 
with  faculty  advisers,  instructors,  and 
the  staffs  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  and 
the  Dean  of  Student  Services. 

During  the  summer  orientation,  fresh- 
men are  assigned  a  faculty  adviser  who  is 
prepared  to  assist  new  students  with  the 
challenges  of  an  unfamiliar  social  and 
academic  environment.  All  students  are 
required  to  have  a  faculty  adviser.  When 
students  have  declared  a  major,  they  are 
then  assigned  an  adviser  from  within  the 
major  department  or  program. 

Although  the  advisement  program  is 
an  important  part  of  the  Lycoming 
academic  experience,  students  are 
expected  to  accept  full  responsibility  for 
their  academic  programs,  including 
satisfactory  completion  of  program  and 
College-wide  requirements. 

Special  advising  for  selected  profes- 
sions is  provided  by  the  health,  legal,  and 
theological  professions  advisory  com- 
mittees. Students  interested  in  these  pro- 
fessions should  register  with  the  appro- 
priate committee  during  their  first 
semester  of  enrollment  at  Lycoming  or 
immediately  after  they  decide  to  enter 
these  professions. 


Preparation  for  Health  Professions 

—  The  program  of  pre-professional  edu- 
cation for  the  health  professions  (allo- 
pathic, dental,  osteopathic,  podiatric  and 
veterinary  medicine,  optometry,  and 
pharmacy)  is  organized  around  a  sound 
foundation  in  biology,  chemistry, 
mathematics,  and  physics  and  a  wide 
range  of  subject  matter  from  the  humani- 
ties, social  sciences,  and  fine  arts.  At 
least  three  years  of  undergraduate  study 
is  recommended  before  entry  into  a  pro- 
fessional school;  the  normal  procedure  is 
to  complete  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree. 
Students  interested  in  one  of  the  health 
professions  or  in  an  allied  health  career 
should  make  their  intentions  known  to 


the  admissions  office  when  applying  and 
to  the  Health  Professions  Advisory  Com- 
mittee (HPAC)  during  their  first  semes- 
ter. The  committee  advises  students  con- 
cerning preparation  for  and  application 
to  health-professions  schools.  All  pre- 
health  professions  students  are  invited  to 
join  the  student  Pre-Health  Professions 
Association.  (See  also  descriptions  of  the 
nursing  program  and  of  the  cooperative 
programs  in  podiatric  medicine, 
optometry,  and  medical  technology.) 

Preparation  for  Legal  Professions 

—  Lycoming  offers  a  strong  academic 
preparation  for  students  interested  in  law 
as  a  profession.  Admission  to  law  school 
is  not  predicated  upon  a  particular  major 
or  area  of  study;  rather,  a  student  is 
encouraged  to  design  a  course  of  study 
(traditional  or  interdisciplinary  major) 
which  is  of  personal  interest  and  signifi- 
cance. While  no  specific  major  is  recom- 
mended, there  are  certain  skills  of  parti- 
cular relevance  to  the  pre-law  student: 
clear  writing,  analytical  thinking,  and 
language  comprehension.  These  skills 
should  be  developed  during  the  under- 
graduate years. 

Pre-law  students  should  register  with 
the  Legal  Professions  Advisory  Com 
mittee  (LPAC)  upon  entering  Lycoming 
and  should  join  the  Pre-Law  Society  on 
campus.  LPAC  assists  the  pre-law  stu- 
dent through  advisement,  compilation  of 
recommendations,  and  dissemination  of 
information  and  materials  about  law  and 
the  legal  profession.  It  sponsors  Pre- 
LSAT  workshops  to  help  prepare  stu- 
dents for  the  law  boards.  The  Pre-Law 
Society  has  sponsored  films,  speakers, 
and  field  trips,  including  visits  to  law 
school  campuses. 

Preparation  for  Theological  Profes- 
sions —  The  Theological  Professions 
Advisory  Commiteee  (TPAC)  acts  as  a 
"center"  for  students,  faculty,  and  cler- 
gy to  discuss  the  needs  of  students  who 
want  to  prepare  themselves  for  the  mini- 
stry, religious  education,  advanced 
training  in  religion,  or  related  vocations. 
Also,  it  may  help  coordinate  internships 
for  students  who  desire  practical  experi- 
ence in  the  parish  ministry  or  related 


areas.  Upon  entering  Lycoming,  stu- 
dents should  register  with  TPAC  if  they 
plan  to  investigate  the  religious  voca- 
tions. 

In  general,  students  preparing  to 
attend  a  theological  seminary  should 
examine  the  suggestions  set  down  by  the 
Association  of  Theological  Schools 
(available  from  TPAC).  Recommended 
is  a  broad  program  in  the  liberal  arts,  a 
major  in  one  of  the  humanities  (English, 
history,  languages,  literature,  philoso- 
phy, religion)  or  one  of  the  social  sci- 
ences (American  studies,  criminal  jus- 
tice, economics,  international  studies, 
political  science,  psychology, 
sociology-anthropology),  and  a  variety 
of  electives.  Students  preparing  for  a 
career  in  religious  education  should 
major  in  religion  and  elect  five  or  six 
courses  in  psychology,  education,  and 
sociology.  This  program  of  study  will 
qualify  students  to  work  as  an  education- 
al assistant  or  a  director  of  religious  edu- 
cation after  graduate  study  in  a  theologi- 
cal seminary. 


REGISTRATION 

During  the  registration  period,  students 
select  their  courses  for  the  next  semester 
and  register  their  course  selections  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Course  selection 
is  made  in  consultation  with  the  student's 
faculty  advisor  in  order  to  insure  that  the 
course  schedule  is  consistent  with  Col- 
lege requirements  and  student  goals. 
After  the  registration  period,  any  change 
in  the  student's  course  schedule  must  be 
approved  by  both  the  faculty  advisor  and 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Students  may  not 
receive  credit  for  courses  in  which  they 
are  not  formally  registered. 

During  the  first  five  days  of  classes, 
students  may  drop  any  course  without 
any  record  of  such  enrollment  appearing 
on  the  permanent  record,  and  they  may 
add  any  course  that  is  not  closed.  Stu- 
dents wishing  to  drop  a  course  between 
the  fifth  day  and  the  1 2th  week  of  classes 
must  secure  a  withdrawal  form  from  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar,  which  is  pre- 
sented to  the  instructor  of  the  course  in 
question,  who  assigns  a  withdrawal 


grade  based  on  the  level  of  the  student's 
performance  from  the  beginning  of  the 
course  to  the  date  of  withdrawal.  With- 
drawal grades  are  not  computed  in  the 
grade  point  average.  Students  may  not 
withdraw  from  courses  after  the  12th 
week  of  a  semester  and  the  comparable 
period  during  the  May  and  summer 
terms. 

In  two-credit  ( '/:  unit)  courses  meeting 
only  during  the  last  half  of  any  semester, 
students  may  drop/add  for  a  period  of 
five  days,  effective  with  the  mid-term 
date  shown  on  the  academic  calendar. 
Withdrawal  from  half-semester  courses 
with  a  withdrawal  grade  may  occur 
within  six  weeks  of  the  beginning  of  the 
course.  It  is  understood  that  the  period  of 
time  at  the  beginning  of  the  semester  and 
at  the  mid-point  of  the  semester  will  be 
identical;  for  example,  a  period  of  five 
days  as  indicated  above. 

THE  UNIT  COURSE  SYSTEM 

Instruction  at  Lycoming  College  is 
organized,  with  few  exceptions,  on  a 
departmental  basis.  Most  courses  are 
unit  courses,  meaning  that  each  course 
taken  is  considered  to  be  equivalent  to 
four  semester  hours  of  credit.  Exceptions 
occur  in  applied  music  courses,  which 
are  offered  for  either  one-half  of  one 
semester  hour  of  credit,  and  in  depart- 
ments that  have  elected  to  offer  certain 
courses  for  the  equivalent  of  two  semes- 
ter hours  of  credit.  Further,  independent 
studies  and  internships  carrying  two 
semester  hours  of  credit  may  be 
designed.  The  normal  student  course 
load  is  four  courses  during  the  fall  and 
spring  semesters.  Students  who  elect  to 
attend  the  special  sessions  may  enroll  in 
one  course  during  the  May  term  and  one 
or  two  courses  in  the  summer  term.  A 
student  is  considered  full  time  when 
enrolled  for  a  minimum  of  three  courses 
during  the  fall  or  spring  semesters,  one 
course  for  the  May  term,  and  two  courses 
for  the  summer  term.  Students  may 
enroll  in  five  courses  during  the  fall  and 
spring  semesters  if  they  are  Lycoming 
Scholars  or  were  admitted  to  the  Dean's 
List  at  the  end  of  the  previous  semester. 
Exceptions  may  be  granted  by  the  Dean 


of  the  College.  Overloads  are  not  per- 
mitted during  the  May  and  summer 
terms. 


THE  SYSTEM  OF  GRADING 
AND  REPORTING  OF  GRADES 

The  evaluation  of  student  performance  in 
credit  courses  is  indicated  by  the  use  of 
traditional  letter  symbols.  These  sym- 
bols and  their  definitions  are  as  follows: 

A  Excellent  —  Signifies  superior 
achievement  through  mastery  of  content 
or  skills  and  demonstration  of  creative 
and  independent  thinking. 
B  High  Pass  —  Signifies  better-than- 
average  achievement  wherein  the  student 
reveals  insight  and  understanding. 
C  Pass  —  Signifies  satisfactory 
achievement  wherein  the  student's  work 
has  been  of  average  quality  and  quantity. 
The  student  has  demonstrated  basic  com- 
petence in  the  subject  area  and  may 
enroll  in  additional  course  work. 
D  Low  Pass  —  Signifies  unsatisfactory 
achievement  wherein  the  student  met 
only  the  minimum  requirements  for 
passing  the  course  and  should  not  con- 
tinue in  the  subject  area  without  depart- 
mental advice. 

F  Failing  —  Signifies  that  the  student 
has  not  met  the  minimum  requirements 
for  passing  the  course. 
1  Incomplete  Work  —  Assigned  in 
accordance  with  the  restrictions  of 
established  academic  policy. 
R  A  Repeated  Course  —  Students  shall 
have  the  option  of  repeating  courses  for 
which  they  already  have  received  a  pass- 
ing grade  in  addition  to  those  which  they 
have  failed.  No  credit  is  received  for  the 
second  attempt.  Grades  will  be  aver- 
aged. 

S  Passing  Work,  no  grade  assigned  — 
Converted  from  traditional  grade  of  F. 
U  Failing  work,  no  grade  assigned  — 
converted  from  traditional  grade  of  F. 
X  Audit  —  Work  as  an  auditor  for  which 
no  credit  is  earned. 

W  Withdrawal  —  Signifies  withdrawal 
from  the  course  early  in  the  term  when  it 
cannot  be  determined  that  the  student  is 


passing  or  failing. 

WP  Withdrawal,  passing  —  The  stu- 
dent was  passing  at  the  time  of  withdraw- 
al; no  credit  is  earned. 
WF  Withdrawal,  failing  —  The  student 
was  failing  at  the  time  of  withdrawal;  no 
credit  is  earned. 

The  cumulative  grade  point  average 
(GPA)  is  calculated  by  multiplying  qual- 
ity points  by  credits  and  dividing  the  total 
quality  points  by  the  total  credits.  A 
quality  point  is  the  unit  of  measurement 
of  the  quality  of  work  done  by  the  stu- 
dent. 


Quality  Points 

Earned 

Grade 

for  each  semester 

hour 

A  Excellent 

4 

B  High  Pass 

3 

C  Pass 

2 

D  Low  Pass 

1 

F  Failing 

0 

The  grade  point  average  for  the  major 
is  calculated  in  the  same  manner  for  the 
courses  required  for  the  major. 

A  minimum  of  2.00  is  required  for  the 
cumulative  grade  point  average  and  for 
the  grade  point  average  in  the  major  to 
meet  the  requirements  for  graduation. 
You  cannot  compute  your  cumulative 
GPA  by  averaging  your  semester  GPA' s . 

Use  of  the  satisfactory/unsatisfactory 
grading  option  is  limited  as  follows  (this 
does  not  apply  to  Education  5  and  Engl- 
ish 5): 

—  students  may  enroll  on  an 
S/U  basis  in  no  more  than  one 
course  per  semester  and  no  more 
than  four  courses  during  the  under- 
graduate career. 

—  S/U  courses  completed  after  decla- 
ration of  the  major  may  not  be  used 
to  satisfy  a  requirement  of  that 
major,  including  courses  required 
by  the  major  department  which  are 
offered  by  other  departments. 
(Instructor-designated  courses  are 
excepted  from  this  limitation.) 

—  courses  for  which  a  grade  of  S  is 
recorded  may  not  be  used  toward 


fulfillment  of  any  distribution 
requirement. 

-  students  may  not  enroll  in  English 
6  on  an  S/U  basis. 

-  a  course  selected  on  an  S/U  basis 
which  is  subsequently  withdrawn 
will  not  count  toward  the  four- 
course  limit. 

-  instructor-designated  courses  may 
be  offered  during  the  May  term 
with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of 
the  College.  Such  courses  are  not 
counted  toward  the  four-course 
limit. 

-  S/U  grades  are  not  computed  in  the 
grade  point  average. 

-  students  electing  the  S/U  option 
may  designate  a  minimum  accep- 
tance letter  grade  of  A  or  B.  If  the 
letter  grade  actually  earned  by  the 
student  equals  or  exceeds  this  mini- 
mum, that  letter  grade  is  entered  on 
the  student's  permanent  record  and 
is  computed  in  the  grade  point 
average.  In  such  a  case,  the  course 
does  not  count  toward  the  four- 
course  limit.  If  the  student  does  not 
indicate  a  minimum  acceptable 
letter  grade  or  if  the  letter  grade 
actually  earned  is  lower  than  the 
minimum  designated  by  the  stu- 
dent, the  Registrar  substitutes  an  S 
for  any  passing  grade  (A,  B,  C,  or 
D)  and  a  U  for  an  F  grade. 

-  students  receiving  either  an  S  or  U 
grade  are  not  eligible  for  the 
Dean's  List  for  that  semester. 

-  students  must  declare  the  S/U 
option  before  the  end  of  the  period 
during  which  courses  may  be 
added  during  any  given  semester, 
half-semester,  or  term. 

-  instructors  are  not  notified  which 
of  their  students  are  enrolled  on  an 
S/U  basis. 

-  students  electing  the  S/U  option  are 
expected  to  perform  the  same  work 
as  tho.se  enrolled  on  a  regular  basis. 

Incomplete  grades  may  be  given 
if,  for  absolutely  unavoidable  rea- 
sons (usually  medical  in  nature), 
the  student  has  not  been  able  to 
complete  the  work  requisite  to  the 
course.  An  incomplete  grade  must 


10 


be  removed  within  six  weeks  of  the 
next  regular  semester. 

Students  shall  have  the  option  of 
repeating  courses  for  which  they 
already  have  received  a  passing 
grade  in  addition  to  those  which 
they  have  failed.  Recording  of 
grades  for  all  repeated  courses  shall 
be  governed  by  the  following  con- 
ditions: 

—  a  course  may  be  repeated 
only  one  time. 

—  both  attempts  will  be  recorded  on 
the  student's  transcript. 

—  credit  for  the  course  will  be  given 
only  once. 

—  for  the  purpose  of  determining  the 
student's  GPA,  the  average  grade 
received  for  the  two  attempts  will 
be  used  as  if  it  were  the  grade  for  a 
single  course. 

—  a  repeated  course  will  be  counted 
toward  the  total  number  of  unsuc- 
cessful attempts. 


ATTENDANCE 

The  academic  program  at  Lycoming  is 
based  upon  the  assumption  that  there  is 
value  in  class  attendance  for  all  students. 
Individual  instructors  have  the  preroga- 
tive of  establishing  reasonable  absence 
regulations  in  any  course.  The  student  is 
responsible  for  learning  and  observing 
these  regulations. 


STUDENT  RECORDS 

The  policy  regarding  student  educational 
records  is  designed  to  protect  the  privacy 
of  students  against  unwarranted  intru- 
sions and  is  consistent  with  Section  438 
of  the  General  Education  Provision  Act 
(commonly  known  as  the  Family  Educa- 
tional Rights  and  Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as 
amended).  The  details  of  the  College 
policy  on  student  records  and  the  proce- 
dures for  gaining  access  to  student 
records  are  contained  in  the  current  issue 
of  The  Pathfinder,  which  is  available  in 
the  library  and  the  Office  of  the  Dean  of 
the  College. 


ACADEMIC  STANDING  AND 
ACADEMIC  HONESTY 

Students  will  be  placed  on  academic 
probation  if  either  the  number  of  hours 
completed  or  cumulative  grade  point 
average  falls  below  the  following  stan- 
dards: 

Semester  Hours       Cumulative 

(Full-time)  Completed  GPA 

1  12  1.66 

2  24  1.85 

3  40  1 .90 

4  56  2.00 

5  72  2.00 

6  88  2.00 

7  104  2.00 

8  120  2.00 

In  order  to  meet  graduation  require- 
ments, students  must  complete  128  cre- 
dit hours.  Students  who  are  enrolled  part 
time  or  for  fewer  than  the  normal  four 
courses  per  term  will  be  expected  to 
complete  an  equivalent  proportion  of 
their  program  each  semester. 

Students  will  be  subject  to  suspension 
from  the  College  if  they: 

—  are  on  probation  for  two  con- 
secutive semesters; 

—  achieve  a  grade  point  average  of 
1.00  or  below  during  any  one 
semester. 

Students  will  be  subject  to  dismissal 
from  the  College  if  they: 

—  can  not  resonably  complete  all 
requirements  for  a  degree; 

—  exceed  24  semester  hours  of  unsuc- 
cessful course  attempts  (grades  of 
F,  U,  W,  -WP,  WF,  and  R)  except 
in  the  case  of  withdrawal  for  medi- 
cal or  psychological  reasons. 

The  integrity  of  the  academic  process  of 
the  College  requires  honesty  in  all  phases 
of  the  instructional  program.  The  Col- 
lege assumes  that  students  are  committed 
to  the  principle  of  academic  honesty. 
Students  who  fail  to  honor  this  commit- 
ment are  subject  to  dismissal.  Procedural 
guidelines  and  rules  for  the  adjudication 


of  cases  of  academic  dishonesty  are 
printed  in  The  Faculty  Handbook  and 
The  Pathfinder  (the  student  academic 
handbook ) .  copies  of  which  are  available 
in  the  library. 


CREDIT  BY  EXAMINATION 

Advanced  Placement  —  Entering  fresh- 
men who  have  completed  an  advanced 
course  while  in  secondary  school  and 
who  have  taken  the  appropriate 
advanced-placement  examination  of  the 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board 
(CEEB)  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  cre- 
dit and  advanced  placement  at  the  time  of 
admission.  A  grade  of  three  or  above  is 
considered  satisfactory.  Students  should 
inform  the  Registrar's  Office  and  their 
academic  advisor  immediately  when 
advanced  placement  examinations  have 
been  taken. 

College  Level  Examination  Pro- 
gram (CLEP)  —  Students  may  earn 
college  credit  for  superior  achievement 
through  CLEP.  By  achieving  at  the  75th 
percentile  or  above  on  the  General 
Examinations  and  the  65th  percentile  or 
above  on  approved  Subject  Examina- 
tions, students  may  earn  up  to  50  percent 
of  the  course  requirements  for  a  bachelor 
of  arts  degree.  Although  these  examina- 
tions may  be  taken  after  enrollment,  new 
students  who  are  competent  in  a  given 
area  are  encouraged  to  take  the  examina- 
tion of  their  choice  during  the  second 
semester  of  their  senior  year  so  that 
Lycoming  will  have  the  test  scores  avail- 
able for  registration  advisement  for  the 
first  semester  of  enrollment.  Further 
information  about  CLEP  may  be 
obtained  through  the  secondary-school 
guidance  office  or  the  Office  of  Admis- 
sions at  Lycoming  College.  Students 
should  inform  the  Registrar's  Office  and 
their  academic  advisor  immediately 
when  CLEP  examinations  have  been 
taken. 

ACADEMIC  HONORS 

Dean's  List  —  Students  are  admitted  to 
the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of  the  fall  and 


11 


spring  semesters  if  they  have  completed 
at  least  15  credits  with  other  than  S/U  or 
R  grades,  and  have  a  minimum  grade 
point  average  of  3.50  for  the  semester. 

Graduation  Honors  —  Students  are 
awarded  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree,  the 
bachelor  of  fine  arts  degree,  or  the 
bachelor  of  science  in  nursing  degree 
with  honors  when  they  have  earned  the 
following  grade  point  averages  based  on 
all  courses  attempted  at  Lycoming,  with 
a  minimum  of  64  credits  (16  units) 
required  for  a  student  to  be  eligible  for 
honors: 

summa  cum  laude 3.90-4.00 

magna  cum  laude 3.50-3.89 

cum  laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic  Honor  Awards,  Prizes, 
and  Societies  —  Superior  academic 
achievement  is  recognized  through  the 
conferring  of  awards  and  prizes  at  the 
annual  Honors  Day  convocation  and 
Commencement  and  through  election  to 
membership  in  honor  societies. 

Societies 

Blue  Key Freshmen  Men 

Gold  Key Freshmen  Women 

Beta  Beta  Beta Biology 

Omicron  Delta  Epsilon..  Economics 

Phi  Alpha  Theta History 

Phi  Sigma  Tau Philosophy 

Sigma  Pi  Sigma Physics 

Pi  Sigma  Alpha....    Political  Science 

Psi  Chi Psychology 

Pi  Gamma  Mu Social  Science 

Phi  Kappa  Phi  ...  General  Academic 

Prizes  and  Awards 

American  Chemical  Society  Award  — 
The  award,  sponsored  by  the  Susquehan- 
na Valley  Chapter  of  the  society,  is  given 
to  the  outstanding  senior  in  chemistry 
who  plans  to  enter  the  profession. 

Accounting  Society  Service  Award  — 
The  award  is  given  for  outstanding  ser- 
vice to  the  Lycoming  College  Account- 
ing Society. 

American  Institute  of  Chemists  Prize  — 
The  prize,  given  by  the  Philadelphia  sec- 


tion of  the  institute,  goes  to  the  senior 
major  for  excellence  in  chemistry. 

Byron  C.  Brunstetter  Science  Award  — 
The  award  is  given  for  outstanding 
achievement  in  chemical  and  biological 
sciences. 

CRC  Press  Chemistry  Achievement 
Award  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 
freshman  who  has  exhibited  outstanding 
academic  achievement  in  chemistry. 

Chieftain  Award  —  The  College's  most 
prestigious  award  is  given  to  the  senior 
who  has  contributed  most  to  Lycoming 
through  support  of  school  activities;  who 
has  exhibited  outstanding  leadership 
qualities;  who  has  worked  effectively 
with  other  members  of  the  College  com- 
munity; who  has  evidenced  a  good  moral 
code;  and  whose  academic  rank  is  above 
the  median  for  the  preceding  senior 
class. 

Civic  Choir  Award — The  award  is  given 
to  the  College  choir  member  who  has 
outstanding  musical  ability  and  who  has 
made  significant  leadership  contribu- 
tions to  the  choir. 

Class  of  1907  Prize  —  The  prize  is  given 
to  the  senior  who  has  been  oustanding  in 
the  promotion  of  College  spirit  through 
participation  in  athletics  and  other  activ- 
ities. 

Benjamin  C.  Conner  Prize  —  The  prize 
is  given  to  the  graduating  student  who 
has  done  outstanding  work  in  mathema- 
tics. 

Durkheim  Award  —  The  award  is  given 
to  the  senior  sociology/anthropology 
major  who  has  done  outstanding  work  in 
the  field. 

Bishop  William  Perry  Eveland  Prize  — 
The  prize  is  given  to  the  senior  who  has 
shown  progress  in  scholarship,  loyalty, 
.school  spirit,  and  participation  in  school 
activities. 

Excellence  in  Two-Dimensional  Art 
Award  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 


outstanding  senior  art  major  in  this  field. 

Excellence  in  Three-Dimensional  Art 
Award  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 
outstanding  senior  art  major  in  this  field. 

Excellence  in  Theatre  Performance 
Award  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 
student  who  has  been  outstanding  as  a 
performer  in  the  Arena  Theatre. 

Excellence  in  Technical  Theatre  Award 
—  The  award  is  given  to  the  student  who 
has  been  outstanding  as  a  technician  for 
the  Arena  Theatre. 

Excellence  in  Political  Science  Award  — 
The  award  goes  to  the  senior  political 
science  major  who  has  performed  with 
excellence. 

J.  W.  Ferree  Award  —  Given  in  memory 
of  the  first  mathematics  professor  at 
Lycoming's  forerunner,  the  Dickinson 
Seminary,  the  award  goes  to  the  student 
most  active  in  mathematical  sciences. 

Faculty  Prize  —  The  prize  is  given  to  the 
commuting  student  with  satisfactory 
scholarship  and  who  has  been  outstand- 
ing in  promotion  of  school  spirit  through 
participation  in  school  activities. 

Durani  L.  Furey  HI  Memorial  Prize  — 
The  prize  is  given  to  the  senior  account- 
ing major  who  has  shown  outstanding 
achievement  in  accounting. 

Gillette  Foreign  Language  Prizes  —  The 
prizes  are  given  to  the  French,  German, 
and  Spanish  majors  who  have  achieved 
excellence  in  foreign  languages. 

John  P.  Graham  Award  —  Named  in 
honor  of  a  professor  emeritus,  the  award 
is  given  to  the  senior  English  major  who 
achieves  the  highest  average  in  English. 

Edward  J.  Gray  Prizes  —  The  prizes  are 
given  to  the  graduating  students  with  the 
highest  and  second  highest  averages. 

Dan  Gustafson  Award —  In  memory  of  a 
former  member  of  the  English  Depart- 
ment, the  award  is  given  to  the  senior 


12 


English  major  whose  analytical  writing 
demonstrates  the  highest  standards  of 
literary  and  critical  excellence. 

IRUSKA  Awards  —  The  awards  denote 
membership  in  the  society  for  juniors 
who  are  very  active  on  campus. 

Junior  Book  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  to  the  outstanding  junior  political 
science  major. 

Elisha  Benson  Kline  Prize  —  The  prize  is 
given  to  the  senior  mathematics  major 
with  outstanding  achievement  in  the 
field. 

Charles  J.  Kocian  Awards  —  The 
awards  are  given  to  the  accounting,  busi- 
ness administration,  and  economics 
majors  who  show  the  greatest  proficien- 
cy in  statistics;  the  mathematics  major 
who  shows  the  greatest  proficiency  in 
applied  mathematics;  the  graduating 
senior  who  shows  the  greatest  proficien- 
cy in  computer  science  and  operations 
research;  the  graduating  senior,  business 
administration  major,  with  highest  grade 
point  average  and  the  graduating  senior 
with  highest  average  in  the  class. 

Don  Lincoln  Larrabee  Law  Prize  —  The 
prize  is  given  to  the  graduating  student 
who  has  shown  outstanding  scholarship 
in  legal  principles. 

C  Daniel  and  Jeanne  Little  Award  — 
Presented  in  memory  of  two  Lycoming 
alumni,  the  award  is  given  to  the  out- 
standing student  in  public  administra- 
tion. 

The  Makisu  Award —  The  award  is  given 
for  outstanding  service  to  the  college 
community,  for  dedication  above  and 
beyond  the  realm  of  one's  obligations  to 
the  College. 

John  C.  McCune  Memorial  Prizes  — 
The  prizes  are  given  to  the  senior  majors 
in  mathematics,  biology,  chemistry, 
physics,  philosophy,  and  psychology 
who  have  attained  the  highest  averages. 

Ethel  McDonald  Pax  Christi  Award  — 


The  award  is  given  for  outstanding  but 
quiet  consistency  in  the  life  of  faith  and 
the  practice  of  Christianity,  noteworthy 
personal  integrity  and  humble  loving 
compassion  expressed  in  daily  life. 

WalterG.  Mclver  Award — Named  after 
Lycoming's  former  choir  director,  the 
award  is  given  to  the  choir  member  who 
has  made  outstanding  campus  contribu- 
tions outside  of  choir. 

Pennsylvania  Institute  of  Certified  Pub- 
lic Accountants  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  to  the  senior  accounting  major  who 
has  demonstrated  high  scholastic  stand- 
ing and  qualities  of  leadership. 

Pocahontas  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  to  Lycoming's  outstanding  female 
athlete. 

Psi  Chi  Sen'ice  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  for  contributions  to  the  Psychology 
Department. 

Research  and  Writing  Prize  in  History  — 
The  prize  is  given  to  the  student  who 
does  the  best  work  in  History  45. 

Mar)-  L.  Russell  Award  —  Named  in 
honor  of  a  professor  emeritus  of  music, 
the  award  is  given  for  outstanding  musi- 
cal achievement. 

Sadler  Prize  —  The  prize  is  given  to  the 
student  with  the  highest  achievement  in 
calculus,  foundations  of  mathematics, 
algebra,  and  analysis. 

Senior  Management  Award  —  The 
award  is  given  to  the  senior  business 
major  with  the  best  senior  project  in 
Business  Administration  41. 

Senior  Scholarship  Prize  in  History  — 
The  prize  is  given  to  the  senior  major 
with  the  highest  average. 

Service  to  Lycoming  Award  —  Spon- 
sored by  the  Office  of  Student  Services, 
the  award  is  given  to  students  who  have 
made  outstanding  contributions  to 
Lycoming. 


Frances  K.  Skeath  Award  —  The  award 
is  given  to  the  senior  with  outstanding 
achievement  in  mathematics. 

J.  Milton  Skeath  Award  —  The  award  is 
given  for  superior  undergraduate 
achievement  and  potential  for  further 
work  in  psychology. 

John  A.  Streeter  Memorial  Award  in 
Economics  —  The  award  is  given  to  the 
graduating  student  with  outstanding 
achievement  in  economics. 

Tomahawk  Award  —  The  award  is  given 
to  Lycoming's  outstanding  male  athlete. 

Trask  Chemistry  Prize  —  The  prize  is 
given  to  the  senior  chemistry  major  who 
has  done  outstanding  work  in  the  field. 

Wall  Street  Journal  Awards  —  Two 
awards  are  given.  One  is  given  to  the 
senior  business  major  for  excellence  in 
the  field  and  service  to  the  College  com- 
munity. A  second  award  is  given  for 
excellence  in  economics. 

Sol  "Woody"  Wolf  Award  —  The  award 
is  given  to  the  junior  athlete  who  has 
shown  the  most  improvement. 

Women  of  Lycoming  Scholarship  —  The 
scholarship  is  given  to  the  junior  woman 
student  who  has  shown  satisfactory 
scholarship,  outstanding  school  spirit, 
and  who  is  active  in  campus  activities. 

Departmental  Honors  —  Honors  pro- 
jects are  normally  undertaken  only  in  a 
student's  major,  and  are  available  only  to 
exceptionally  well-qualified  students 
who  have  a  solid  background  in  the  area 
of  the  project  and  are  capable  of  consid- 
erable self-direction.  The  prerequisites 
for  registration  in  an  honors  program  are 
as  follows: 

—  a  faculty  member  from  the 
department(s)  in  which  the  honors 
project  is  to  be  undertaken  must 
agree  to  be  the  director  and  must 
secure  departmental  approval  of 
the  project. 

—  the  director,  in  consultation  with 


13 


the  student,  must  convene  a  com- 
mittee consisting  of  two  faculty 
members  from  the  department  in 
which  the  project  is  to  be  underta- 
ken, one  of  whom  is  the  director  of 
the  project,  and  one  faculty  mem- 
ber from  each  of  two  other  depart- 
ments related  to  the  subject  matter 
of  the  study. 

—  the  honors  committee  must  then 
certify  by  their  signatures  on  the 
application  that  the  project  in 
question  is  academically  legitimate 
and  worthy  of  pursuit  as  an  honors 
project,  and  that  the  student  in 
question  is  qualified  to  pursue  the 
project. 

—  the  project  must  be  approved  by  the 
Committee  on  Individual  Studies. 

Students  successfully  complete  hon- 
ors projects  by  satisfying  the  following 
conditions  in  accordance  with  guide- 
lines established  by  the  Committee  on 
Individual  Studies: 

—  the  student  must  produce  a  sub- 
stantial research  paper,  critical 
study,  or  creative  project.  If  the 
end  product  is  a  creative  project,  a 
critical  paper  analyzing  the  tech- 
niques and  principles  employed 
and  the  nature  of  the  achievement 
represented  in  the  project  shall  be 
submitted. 

—  the  student  must  successfully 
explain  and  defend  the  work  in  a 
final  oral  examination  given  by  the 
honors  committee. 

—  the  honors  committee  must  certify 
that  the  student  has  successfully 
defended  the  project,  and  that  the 
student's  achievement  is  clearly 
superior  to  that  which  would  ordi- 
narily by  required  to  earn  a  grade  of 
"A"  in  a  regular  independent- 
studies  course. 

—  the  Committee  on  Individual  Stu- 
dies must  certify  that  the  student 
has  satisfied  all  of  the  conditions 
mentioned  above. 

Except  in  unusual  circumstances,  honors 
projects  are  expected  to  involve  indepen- 
dent studv  in  two  consecutive  unit 


courses.  Successful  completion  of  the 
honors  project  will  cause  the  designation 
of  honors  in  that  department  to  be  placed 
upon  the  permanent  record.  Acceptable 
theses  are  deposited  in  the  College 
library.  In  the  event  that  the  study  is  not 
completed  successfully  or  is  not  deemed 
worthy  of  honors,  the  student  shall  be 
re-registered  in  independent  studies  and 
given  a  final  grade  for  the  course. 


SPECIAL  FEATURES 

Independent  Studies  —  Independent 
studies  are  available  to  any  qualified 
student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  and 
receive  academic  credit  for  any  academi- 
cally legitimate  course  of  study  for  which 
he  or  she  could  not  otherwise  receive 
credit.  It  may  be  pursued  at  any  level 
(introductory,  intermediate,  or 
advanced)  and  in  any  department, 
whether  or  not  the  student  is  a  major  in 
that  department.  Studies  projects  which 
duplicate  catalog  courses  are  sometimes 
possible,  and  are  subject  to  the  same 
provisions  which  apply  to  all  studies 
projects.  In  order  for  a  student  to  be 
registered  in  an  independent-study 
course,  the  following  conditions  must  be 
satisfied; 

—  an  appropriate  member  of  the 
faculty  must  agree  to  supervise  the 
project  and  must  certify  by  signing 
the  application  form  that  the  pro- 
ject is  academically  legitimate  and 
involves  an  amount  of  work  appro- 
priate for  the  amount  of  academic 
credit  requested,  and  that  the  stu- 
dent in  question  is  qualified  to 
pursue  the  project. 

—  the  studies  project  must  be 
approved  by  the  chairman  of  the 
department  in  which  the  studies 
project  is  to  be  undertaken. 

—  after  the  project  is  approved  by  the 
instructor  and  by  the  chairman  of 
the  appropriate  department,  the 
studies  project  must  be  approved 
by  the  Committee  on  Individual 
Studies. 

In   addition,    participation    in 


independent-studies  projects,  with  the 
exception  of  those  which  duplicate  cata- 
log courses,  is  subject  to  the  following: 

—  students  may  not  engage  in  more 
than  one  independent-studies  pro- 
ject during  any  given  semester. 

—  students  may  not  engage  in  more 
than  two  independent-studies  pro- 
jects during  their  academic  careers 
at  Lycoming  College. 

As  with  other  academic  policies,  any 
exceptions  to  these  two  rules  must  be 
approved  by  the  Academic  Standing 
Committee. 

Internship  Program  —  An  internship  is 
a  course  jointly  sponsored  by  the  College 
and  a  public  or  private  agency  or  subdivi- 
sion of  the  College  in  which  a  student  is 
enabled  to  earn  college  credit  by  partici- 
pating in  some  active  capacity  as  an 
assistant,  aide,  or  apprentice.  At  least 
one-half  of  the  effort  expended  by  the 
intern  should  consist  of  academic  work 
related  to  agency  situations.  The  objec- 
tives of  the  internship  program  are  ( 1 )  to 
further  the  development  of  a  central  core 
of  values,  awarenesses,  strategies, 
skills,  and  information  through  experi- 
ences outside  the  classroom  or  other 
campus  situations,  and  (2)  to  facilitate 
the  integration  of  theory  and  practice  by 
encouraging  students  to  relate  their  on- 
campus  academic  experiences  more 
directly  to  society  in  general  and  to  possi- 
ble career  and  other  post-baccalaureate 
objectives  in  particular. 

Any  junior  or  senior  student  in  good 
academic  standing  may  petition  the 
Committee  on  Individual  Studies  for 
approval  to  serve  as  an  intern.  A  maxi- 
mum of  16  credits  can  be  earned  through 
the  internship  program.  Guidelines  for 
program  development,  assignment  of 
tasks  and  academic  requirements,  such 
as  exams,  papers,  reports,  grades,  etc., 
are  established  in  consultation  with  a 
faculty  director  at  Lycoming  and  an 
agency  supervisor  at  the  place  of  intern- 
ship. 

Students  with  diverse  majors  have 
participated  in  a  wide  variety  of  intern- 
ships, including  those  with  the  Allen- 


14 


wood  Federal  Prison  Camp,  Lycoming 
County  Commissioners  Office,  Depart- 
ment of  Environmental  Resources,  Head 
Start,  Lycoming  County  Historical  Soci- 
ety, business  and  accounting  firms,  law 
offices,  hospitals,  social  service  agen- 
cies, banks,  and  Congressional  offices. 

May  Term  —  The  May  term  is  a  four- 
week  voluntary  session  designed  to  pro- 
vide students  with  courses  listed  in  the 
catalog  and  experimental  and  special 
courses  that  are  not  normally  available 
during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  and 
summer  term.  Some  courses  are  offered 
on  campus;  others  involve  travel.  A 
number  offer  interdisciplinary  credit. 
Illustrations  of  the  types  of  courses 
offered  during  the  May  term  are: 

(a)  Study-Travel:  Cultural  tours  of 
Germany,  Spain,  and  France;  Archae- 
logical  expeditions  to  the  Middle  East; 
Anthropological  expeditions  to  study 
tri-cultural  communities  in  New  Mexico; 
Utopian  Communities;  Revolutionary 
and  Civil  War  Sites;  Colonial  America 
on  Tour;  Art  on  the  East  Coast;  The  New 
Kingdom  in  Ancient  Egypt. 

(b)  On-Campus:  Field  Geology,  Field 
Ornithology,  Energy  Economics,  Wri- 
ter's Seminar,  Psychology  of  Group  Pro- 
cesses, Collective  Bargaining,  Aquatic 
Biology,  Medical  Genetics,  Energy 
Alternatives,  White  Collar  Crime,  Las- 
ers and  their  Applications,  Selected 
Short  Story  Writers  and  their  Works. 
Popular  Forms  of  Contemporary  Fiction, 
Administrative  and  Organizational 
Behavior  of  Police,  Plant  and  Green- 
house Management,  and  Street  Law. 

Although  participation  in  the  May 
term  is  voluntary,  student  response  has 
been  outstanding  with  approximately  20 
percent  of  the  student  body  enrolling.  In 
addition  to  the  courses  themselves, 
attractions  include  small  and  informal 
classes  and  reduced  tuition  rates. 

Study  Abroad  —  Students  have  the 
opportunity  to  study  abroad  under  aus- 
pices of  approved  universities  and  agen- 
cies. While  study  abroad  is  particularly 
attractive  to  students  majoring  in  foreign 
languages  and  literatures,  this  opportun- 
ity is  open  to  all  students  in  good 


academic  standing.  Mastery  of  a  foreign 
language  is  desirable  but  not  required  in 
all  programs.  Dr.  Richard  Barker,  assis- 
tant professor  of  foreign  languages  and 
literatures,  serves  as  coordinator  for  the 
Study  Abroad  Program.  Interested  stu- 
dents may  contact  him  about  opportuni- 
ties available  and  procedural  questions. 

NOTE:  Lycoming  College  cannot  assume 
responsibility  for  the  health,  safety,  or  welfare 
of  any  student  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from 
any  off-campus  study  or  activity  not  under  the 
exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institution. 

Auditors  —  Any  person  may  audit 
courses  at  Lycoming  at  one-fourth  tui- 
tion per  course.  Laboratory  and  other 
special  fees  must  be  paid  in  full.  Exami- 
nations, papers,  and  other  evaluation 
devices  are  not  required  of  auditors,  but 
individual  arrangements  may  be  made  to 
complete  such  exercises  with  the  consent 
of  the  instructor.  The  option  to  audit  a 
course  must  be  declared  during  the  same 
period  (currently  five  days)  at  the  begin- 
ning of  each  semester,  half-semester,  or 
term  as  drop/add  and  pass/fail  and  must 
be  completed  in  the  Registrar's  Office. 

Part  Time  Students  —  Students  who 
do  not  wish  to  pursue  a  degree  at 
Lycoming  College  may,  if  space  per- 
mits, register  for  credit  or  audit  courses 
on  either  a  part-time  or  full-time  basis. 
Students  who  register  for  one  or  two 
courses  are  considered  to  be  enrolled  part 
time;  students  who  register  for  three  or 
four  courses  are  considered  to  be 
enrolled  full  time. 

Anyone  wishing  to  register  as  a 
non — degree  student  must  fill  out  an 
application  form  in  the  Admissions 
Office,  pay  a  one-time  application  fee  of 
$20,  and  pay  the  tuition  rate  in  effect  at 
the  time  of  each  enrollment.  After  a 
non-degree  student  has  attempted  four 
courses,  the  Dean  of  the  College  reserves 
the  right  to  grant  or  deny  permission  to 
continue  to  register  in  this  category. 

All  non-degree  students  are  subject  to 
the  general  laws  and  regulations  of  the 
College  as  stated  in  the  College  Catalog 
and  the  Student  Handbook.  The  College 
reserves  the  right  to  deny  permission  to 
register  to  individuals  who  do  not  meet 


the  standards  of  the  College. 

Students  who  wish  to  change  from  a 
non-degree  to  a  degree  status  must  re- 
apply (with  no  application  fee)  and  satis- 
fy all  conditions  for  admission  and 
registration  in  effect  at  the  time  of  appli- 
cation for  degree  status. 

COOPERATIVE  PROGRAMS 

Lycoming  has  developed  several 
cooperative  programs  to  provide  stu- 
dents with  opportunities  to  extend  their 
knowledge,  abilities,  and  talents  in 
selected  areas  through  access  to  the  spe- 
cialized academic  programs  and  facili- 
ties of  other  colleges,  universities, 
academies,  and  hospitals.  Although 
thorough  advisement  and  curricular 
planning  are  provided  for  each  of  the 
cooperative  programs,  admission  to 
Lycoming  and  registration  in  the  pro- 
gram of  choice  do  not  guarantee  admis- 
sion to  the  cooperating  institution.  The 
prerogative  of  admitting  students  to  the 
cooperative  aspect  of  the  program  rests 
with  the  cooperating  institution.  Stu- 
dents who  are  interested  in  a  cooperative 
program  should  contact  the  coordinator 
during  the  first  week  of  the  first  semester 
of  their  enrollment  at  Lycoming.  This  is 
necessary  to  plan  their  course  programs 
in  a  manner  that  will  insure  completion 
of  required  courses  according  to  the 
schedule  stipulated  for  the  program.  All 
cooperative  programs  require  special 
coordination  of  course  scheduling  at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering  —  Combining  the 
advantages  of  a  liberal-arts  education 
and  the  technical  training  of  an  engi- 
neering curriculum,  this  program  is 
offered  in  conjunction  with  Bucknell 
University  and  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University.  Students  complete  three 
years  of  study  at  Lycoming  and  two  years 
at  the  cooperating  university.  Upon  satis- 
factory completion  of  the  first  year  of 
engineering  studies,  Lycoming  awards 
the  bachelor  of  arts  degree.  When  stu- 
dents successfully  complete  the  second 
year  of  engineering  studies,  the  cooper- 
ating university  awards  the  bachelor  of 
science  degree  in  engineering. 


15 


At  Lycoming,  students  complete  the 
distribution  program  and  courses  in 
physics,  mathematics,  and  chemistry. 
Engineering  specialties  offered  at  Buck- 
nell  University  include  chemical,  civil, 
electrical,  and  mechanical.  The  Pennsyl- 
vania State  University  offers  aerospace, 
agricultural,  chemical,  civil,  electrical, 
engineering  science,  environmental, 
industrial,  mechanical,  and  nuclear  engi- 
neering. 

Forestry  or  Environmental  Studies 

—  Lycoming  College  offers  a  coopera- 
tive program  with  Duke  University  in 
environmental  management  and  fore- 
stry. Qualified  students  can  earn  the 
bachelor's  and  master's  degrees  in  five 
years,  spending  three  years  at  Lycoming 
and  two  years  at  Duke.  All  Lycoming 
distribution  and  major  requirements 
must  be  completed  by  the  end  of  the 
junior  year.  At  the  end  of  the  first  year  at 
Duke,  the  B.A.  degree  will  be  awarded 
by  Lycoming.  Duke  will  award  the  pro- 
fessional degree  of  Master  of  Forestry  or 
Master  of  Environmental  Management 
to  qualified  candidates  at  the  end  of  the 
second  year. 

The  major  program  emphases  at  Duke 
are  Natural  Resources  Science/Ecology, 
Natural  Resources  Systems  Science,  and 
Natural  Resources  Economics/Policy. 
The  program  is  flexible  enough,  howev- 
er, to  accommodate  a  variety  of  individu- 
al designs.  An  undergraduate  major  in 
one  of  the  natural  sciences,  social  sci- 
ences, or  business  may  provide  good 
preparation  for  the  programs  at  Duke, 
but  a  student  with  any  undergraduate 
concentration  will  be  considered  for 
admission.  All  students  need  at  least  two 
courses  each  in  biology,  mathematics, 
and  economics. 

Students  begin  the  program  at  Duke  in 
July  after  their  junior  year  at  Lycoming 
with  a  one-month  session  of  field  work  in 
natural  resource  measurements.  They 
must  complete  a  total  of  60  units  which 
generally  takes  four  semesters. 

Some  students  prefer  to  complete  the 
bachelor's  degree  before  undertaking 
graduate  study  at  Duke.  The  master's 
degree  requirements  for  these  students 
are  the  same  as  for  those  students  enter- 


ing after  the  junior  year,  but  the  60-unit 
requirement  may  be  reduced  for  com- 
pleted relevant  undergraduate  work  of 
satisfactory  quality.  All  credit  reductions 
are  determined  individually  and  consider 
the  student's  educational  background 
and  objectives. 

Medical  Technology  —  Students 
desiring  a  career  in  medical  technology 
may  either  complete  a  bachelor  of  arts 
program  followed  by  a  clinical  internship 
at  any  American  Medical  Association- 
accredited  hospital,  or  they  may  com- 
plete the  cooperative  program.  Students 
electing  the  cooperative  program  nor- 
mally study  for  three  years  at  Lycoming, 
during  which  time  they  complete  24  unit 
courses,  including  the  College  distribu- 
tion requirements,  a  major,  and  require- 
ments of  the  National  Accrediting  Agen- 
cy for  Clinical  Laboratory  Sciences 
( N A  ACLS ) .  The  current  requirements  of 
the  NAACLS  are:  four  courses  in  chem- 
istry (one  of  which  must  be  either  organic 
or  bio-chemistry):  four  courses  in  biolo- 
gy (including  courses  in  microbiology 
and  immunology),  and  one  course  in 
mathematics. 

Students  in  the  cooperative  program 
usually  major  in  biology,  following  a 
modified  major  of  six  unit  courses  that 
exempts  them  from  Ecology  (Biology 
24)  and  Plant  Sciences  (Biology  25). 
Students  must  take  either  Microbiology 
(Biology  21)  or  Microbiology  for  the 
Health  Sciences  (Biology  26),  and  either 
Animal  Physiology  (Biology  23)  or  Cell 
Physiology  (Biology  35).  The  coopera- 
tive program  requires  successful  com- 
pletion of  a  one-year  internship  at  an 
American  Medical  Association- 
accredited  hospital.  Lycoming  is  affil- 
iated with  the  following  accredited  hos- 
pitals: Divine  Providence,  Robert  Pack- 
er, Lancaster,  and  Abington.  Students  in 
the  cooperative  program  receive  credit  at 
Lycoming  for  each  of  eight  unit  courses 
in  biology  and  chemistry  successfully 
completed  during  the  clinical  internship. 
Successful  completion  of  the  Registry 
Examination  is  not  considered  a  gradu- 
tion  requirement  at  Lycoming  College. 

Students  entering  a  clinical  internship 
for  one  year  after  graduation   from 


Lycoming  must  complete  all  of  the 
requirements  of  the  cooperative  pro- 
gram, but  are  not  eligible  for  the  biology 
major  exemptions  indicated  above. 
Upon  graduation,  such  students  may 
apply  for  admission  to  a  clinical  program 
at  any  hospital. 

Optometry  —  Through  the  Acceler- 
ated Optometry  Education  Curriculum 
Program,  students  interested  in  a  career 
in  optometry  may  qualify  for  admission 
to  the  Pennsylvania  College  of  Optomet- 
ry after  only  three  years  at  Lycoming 
College.  After  four  years  at  the  Pennsyl- 
vania College  of  Optometry,  a  student 
will  earn  a  Doctor  of  Optometry  degree. 
Selection  of  candidates  for  the  profes- 
sional segment  of  the  program  is  com- 
pleted by  the  admissions  committee  of 
the  Pennsylvania  College  of  Optometry 
during  the  student's  third  year  at 
Lycoming.  (This  is  one  of  two  routes  that 
students  may  choose.  Any  student,  of 
course,  may  follow  the  regular  applica- 
tion procedures  for  admission  to  the 
Pennsylvania  College  of  Optometry  or 
another  college  of  optometry  to  matricu- 
late following  completion  of  his  or  her 
baccalaureate  program.)  During  the 
three  years  at  Lycoming  College,  the 
student  will  complete  24  unit  courses, 
including  all  distribution  requirements, 
and  will  prepare  for  his  or  her  profession- 
al training  by  obtaining  a  solid  founda- 
tion in  biology,  chemistry,  physics,  and 
mathematics.  During  the  first  year  of 
study  at  the  Pennsylvania  College  of 
Optometry,  the  student  will  take  39 
semester  hours  of  basic  science  courses 
in  addition  to  introductions  to  optometry 
and  health  care.  Successful  completion 
of  the  first  year  of  professional  training 
will  complete  the  course  requirements 
for  the  B.A.  degree  at  Lycoming  Col- 
lege. 

Most  students  will  find  it  convenient 
to  major  in  biology  in  order  to  satisfy  the 
requirements  of  Lycoming  College  and 
the  Pennsylvania  College  of  Optometry. 
Such  students  are  allowed  to  complete  a 
modified  biology  major  which  will 
exempt  them  from  two  biology  courses: 
Ecology  (Biology  24)  and  Plant  Sciences 
(Biology  25).   (This  modified  major 


16 


requires  the  successful  completion  of  the 
initial  year  at  the  Pennsylvania  College 
of  Optometry.)  Students  desiring  other 
majors  must  coordinate  their  plans  with 
the  Health  Professions  Advisory  Com- 
mittee in  order  to  insure  that  they  have 
satisfied  all  requirements. 

Podiatry  —  Students  interested  in 
podiatry  may  either  seek  admission  to  a 
college  of  pediatric  medicine  upon  com- 
pletion of  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  or 
through  the  Accelerated  Podiatric  Medi- 
cal Education-Curriculum  Program 
(APMEC).  The  latter  program  provides 
an  opportunity  for  students  to  qualify  for 
admission  to  the  Pennsylvania  College  of 
Podiatric  Medicine  (PCPM)  or  the  Ohio 
College  of  Podiatric  Medicine  (OCPM) 
after  three  years  of  study  at  Lycoming. 
At  Lycoming,  students  in  the  APMEC 
program  must  successfully  complete  24 
unit  courses,  including  the  distribution 
program  and  a  basic  foundation  in  biolo- 
gy, chemistry,  physics,  and  mathema- 
tics. During  the  first  year  of  study  at 
PCPM  or  OCPM.  students  must  success- 
fully complete  a  program  of  basic  sci- 
ence courses  and  an  introduction  to 
podiatry.  Successful  completion  of  the 
first  year  of  professional  training  will 
contribute  toward  the  fulfillment  of  the 
course  requirements  for  the  bachelor  of 
arts  degree  at  Lycoming. 

Most  students  in  the  cooperative  pro- 
gram will  major  in  biology:  if  so.  they 
will  be  allowed  to  complete  a  modified 
major  which  will  exempt  them  from  two 
biology  courses:  Ecology  (Biology  24) 
and  Plant  Sciences  (Biology  25).  (This 
modified  major  requires  the  successful 
completion  of  the  initial  year  at  PCPM  or 
OCPM). 

Students  interested  in  a  career  in 
podiatric  medicine  should  indicate  their 
intentions  to  the  Health  Professions 
Advisory  Committee. 

Sculpture  —  The  Art  Department 
with  the  Johnson  Atelier  Technical 
Institute  of  Sculpture  in  Princeton,  New 
Jersey,  offers  a  BFA  degree  in  sculpture. 
It  uses  a  classical  apprenticeship 
approach  as  its  teaching  method.  This 
ancient  method  of  teaching  is  combined 


at  Johnson  with  the  most  modem  and 
technically  advanced  foundry  and  fabri- 
cating techniques. 

The  Art  Department  offers  a  synthesis 
program  that  interrelates  the  student 
experience  at  both  institutions.  This  is 
achieved  by  having  the  student  rotate 
between  Lycoming  and  the  atelier  so  that 
each  form  of  education  is  preparation  for 
the  other.  Lycoming  offers  a  core 
academic  program,  a  course  of  study  in 
the  Art  Department,  and  elective  course 
opportunities.  Lycoming  gives  eight 
course  units  of  college  credit  to  the  stu- 
dent for  having  successfully  completed 
one  of  the  apprenticeship  programs  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier. 

All  work  completed  by  the  student  at 
Lycoming  by  the  end  of  the  sophomore 
year  will  be  applicable  to  a  bachelor  of 
arts  degree  with  a  major  in  art  should  the 
student  decide  to  withdraw  from  the  BFA 
program.  If  the  student  should  withdraw 
from  the  cooperative  program  prior  to 
completing  the  apprenticeship  at  the 
Johnson  Atelier.  Lycoming  will  give  up 
to  four  units  of  credit  or  one  semester's 
work  for  the  internship.  If,  however,  the 
student  completes  more  work  at  the  ate- 
lier than  the  four  units,  that  extra  work 
will  not  be  credited  to  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree:  it  will  only  be  used  as  part  of  the 
bachelor  of  fine  arts  degree,  and  then 
only  if  the  course  at  the  atelier  is  com- 
pleted. 

This  course  of  study  is  very  rigorous. 
It  will  require  that  the  student  be 
involved  almost  continuously,  either  at 
Lycoming  or  at  the  Johnson  Atelier, 
during  the  four  years  it  will  take  to  com- 
plete the  degree.  (See  Art  Department 
listing  for  specific  program.) 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
Program  (R.O.T.C.)  —  The  program 
provides  an  opportunity  for  Lycoming 
students  to  enroll  in  R.O.T.C.  Lycoming 
notes  enrollment  in  and  successful  com- 
pletion of  the  program  on  student  tran- 
scripts. Military  Science  is  a  four-year 
program  divided  into  a  basic  course 
given  during  the  freshman  and  sopho- 
more years  and  an  advanced  course  given 
during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Stu- 
dents who  have  not  completed  the  basic 


course  may  qualify  for  the  advanced 
course  by  completing  summer  camp 
between  the  sophomore  and  junior  years. 
Students  enrolled  in  the  advanced  course 
receive  an  annual  stipend  of  51,000. 
Students  successfully  completing  the 
advanced  course  and  advanced  summer 
camp  between  the  junior  and  senior  years 
will  qualify  for  a  commission  as  a  Sec- 
ond Lieutenant  in  the  United  States 
Army  upon  graduation,  and  will  incur  a 
service  obligation  in  the  active  Army  or 
Army  Reserves.  The  only  expense  to  the 
student  for  this  program  is  the  $60 
advanced  course  uniform  deposit. 

Student  Enrichment  Semester  — 

This  voluntary  program  is  designed  to 
expand  academic  and  life  opportunities 
for  students  and  to  provide  for  participa- 
tion in  specialized  programs  and  courses 
not  available  at  Lycoming.  Other  mem- 
bers of  the  program  are  Bucknell  and 
Susquehanna  Universities,  the  Williams- 
port  Area  Community  College,  and 
Bloomsburg,  Lock  Haven,  and  Mans- 
field Universities.  Student  other  than 
freshmen  enroll  full  or  part  time  for  cre- 
dit, normally  for  one  semester  or  term,  at 
any  participating  institution  in  selected 
courses.  Students  in  the  program  remain 
fully  enrolled  as  degree  candidates  at 
their  home  institutions.  A  special  oppor- 
tunity within  the  program  is  the  cross- 
registration  arrangement  with  the  Wil- 
liamsport  Area  Community  College, 
whereby  students  may  enroll  for  less  than 
a  full-time  course  load  while  remaining 
enrolled  in  courses  at  Lycoming. 

Washington,  United  Nations  and 
London  Semester  and  Capitol  Semes- 
ter Internship  Program  —  With  the 
consent  of  the  Department  of  Political 
Science,  selected  students  are  permitted 
to  study  in  Washington.  D.C..  at  The 
American  University  for  one  semester. 
They  may  choose  from  seven  different 
programs:  Washington  Semester.  Urban 
Semester,  Foreign  Policy  Semester, 
International  Development  Semester, 
Economic  Policy  Semester,  Science  and 
Technology  Semester,  American  Studies 
Semester. 

With  the  consent  of  either  the  Depart- 


17 


merit  of  History  or  Political  Science, 
selected  students  may  enroll  at  Drew 
University  in  Madison,  New  Jersey,  in 
the  United  Nations  Semester,  which  is 
designed  to  provide  a  first-hand 
acquaintance  with  the  world  organiza- 
tion. Students  with  special  interests  in 
world  history,  international  relations, 
law,  and  politics  are  eligible  to  partici- 
pate. 

The  London  Semester  programs  of 
Drew  and  The  American  Universities 
emphasize  European  history,  politics. 
and  culture.  Interested  students  partici- 
pate with  the  consent  of  either  the 
Departments  of  History  or  Political  Sci- 
ence. 

The  Capitol  Semester  Internship  Pro- 
gram is  available  to  eligible  students  on  a 
competitive  basis.  The  program  is  co- 
sponsored  by  Pennsylvania's  Office  of 
Administration  and  Department  of  Edu- 
cation. Paid  Internships  are  available  to 
students  in  most  majors.  Interested  stu- 
dents should  contact  the  Career  Develop- 
ment Center  or  the  Assistant  Dean  of  the 
College  for  additional  information. 

The  Philadelphia  Urban  Semester  — 

A  full  semester  liberal  arts  program  for 
professional  development  and  field  study 
is  now  available  to  Lycoming  students. 
The  program  components  are:  field 
placement;  City  Seminar:  evening  semi- 
nars; and  living  and  learning  in  the  city. 
The  program  is  open  to  students  major- 
ing in  any  discipline  or  program.  The 
Philadelphia  Urban  Semester  is  spon- 
sored and  administered  by  the  Great 
Lakes  Colleges  Association  (Albion. 
Antioch,  Denison,  De  Pauw,  Earlham. 
Hope,  Kalamazoo.  Kenyon,  Oberlin. 
Ohio  Wesleyan,  Wabash,  Wooster). 
Additional  information  is  available  from 
Dean  Grogan. 

Normally  the  above  special-semester 
programs  are  open  only  to  juniors. 

NOTE:  Lycoming  College  cannot  assume 
responsibility  for  the  health,  .safety,  or  welfare 
of  students  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any 
off-campus  studies  or  activities  which  are  not 
under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institu- 
tion. 


THE  SCHOLAR  PROGRAM 

The  Lycoming  College  Scholar  Pro- 
gram is  a  special  program  designed  to 
meet  the  needs  and  aspirations  of  highly 
motivated  students  of  superior  intellectu- 
al ability.  The  Lycommg  Scholar  satis- 
fies the  general  distribution  require- 
ments, but  on  a  more  exacting  level  and 
with  more  challenging  courses  than  the 
average  student.  Lycoming  Scholars  also 
participate  in  special  courses  and  .semi- 
nars and  in  serious  independent  study 
culminating  in  a  senior  project  super- 
vised by  their  major  department. 

Students  are  admitted  to  the  program 
by  invitation  of  the  Scholar  Council,  the 
group  which  oversees  the  program.  The 
council  consists  of  four  students  elected 
by  current  scholars  and  four  faculty 
selected  by  the  Dean  of  the  College.  The 
guidelines  governing  selection  of  new 
scholars  are  flexible:  academic  excel- 
lence, intellectual  curiosity,  and  creativ- 
ity are  all  taken  into  account.  Students 
who  desire  to  participate  in  the  Scholar 
Program  but  are  not  invited  may  petition 
the  Scholar  Council  for  consideration. 

To  remain  in  the  program,  students 
must  maintain  a  GPA  of  3.0  or  better. 
Students  dropping  below  this  average 
will  be  placed  on  Scholar  probation  until 
their  average  improves,  or  they  are  asked 
to  leave  the  program.  To  graduate  as  a 
Scholar,  a  student  must  have  at  least  a 
3.0  cumulative  average.  Scholars  must 
take  the  First  Year  Scholar  Seminar  dur- 
ing their  first  semester  in  the  program.  In 
addition,  the  following  distribution 
requirements  must  be  met.  (Slightly 
modified  requirements  exist  for  students 
in  the  cooperative  programs;  a  list  of 
these  requirements  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Scholar  Council.) 

Scholar  Distribution  Requirements 
for  Students  in  AB 
and  BFA  Programs. 

A.  English.  Scholars  must  display 
above-average  writing  skills  by  the  end 
of  the  sophomore  year,  as  certified  by  the 
Department  of  English  and  the  Scholar 
Council.  This  requirement  may  be  met 
by  obtaining  a  sufficiently  high  score  on 
an  appropriate  CLEP  examination  or  by  a 


grade  of  "B"  in  English  6.  Students  not 
meeting  the  requirement  in  either  of 
these  ways  by  the  end  of  the  freshman 
year  will  be  asked  to  do  extra  work  until 
the  competency  is  reached.  Beyond 
English  6,  the  requirement  is  one  litera- 
ture course  numbered  20  or  higher. 

B.  Language/Mathematical  Sciences. 
Scholars  must  satisfy  the  requirement  in 
either  language  or  mathematical  sci- 
ences. Language:  Scholars  must  com- 
plete two  courses  numbered  10  or  higher 
(excluding  courses  taught  in  English). 
Mathematical  Sciences:  The  mathema- 
tics placement  test  determines  whether  a 
Scholar  must  take  two  or  three  courses 
for  distribution.  These  courses  must  be 
numbered  12  or  higher.  If  only  two 
courses  are  required.  Mathematics  17 
may  not  be  included.  Only  one  computer 
science  course  may  be  used  to  fulfill  the 
mathematical  sciences  requirement. 

C.  Philosophy/Religion.  Scholars 
must  satisfy  this  requirement  in  either  of 
the  two  areas.  Philosophy:  Two  courses 
numbered  20  or  higher.  Religion:  Two 
courses  numbered  22  or  higher. 

D.  Fine  Arts.  Scholars  must  satisfy  the 
requirement  in  one  of  four  areas.  Art: 
Two  options  are  available  in  art.  Either 
two  courses  from  Art  22,  23,  24,  31,  32, 
33.  and  34  (Art  History),  or  two  courses 
from  Art  11,  15,  20,  and  25  (Studio  Art). 
Music:  Two  courses  from  Music  17,  30. 
or  higher.  Theatre:  Two  courses  from 
Theatre  14  or  higher,  exluding  Theatre 
18.  Literature:  Two  literature  courses 
from  English  20  or  higher.  Foreign  Lan- 
guages and  Literature  25.  or  other  for- 
eign^  languages  and  literatures  courses 
taught  in  English. 

E.  Natural  Sciences.  Scholars  must 
satisfy  the  requirements  in  one  of  three 
areas.  Astronomy/ Physics:  Two  courses 
numbered  1 1  or  higher.  Biology:  Two 
courses  numbered  10  or  higher.  Chem- 
istrx:  Two  courses  numbered  10  or  high- 
er. 

F.  History/Social  Sciences.  Scholars 
must  satisfy  the  requirements  in  one  of 
five  areas.  Economics:  Two  courses 
numbered  10  or  higher.  History:  Two 
courses,  one  of  which  must  be  numbered 
20  or  higher.  Political  Science:  Two 
courses  numbered  15  or  higher.  Psxchol- 


18 


ogy:  Two  courses  including  Psychology 
10  and  one  course  numbered  24  or  higher 
(excluding  Psychology  38).  Sociology/ 
Anthropology:  Two  courses  including 
Sociology  10  and  one  course  numbered 
30  or  higher. 

Scholar  Distribution  Requirements 
for  students  in  BSN  Program. 

A.  English.  Same  as  for  AB  and  BFA 
degrees. 

B.  Mathematical  Science.  Same  as  for 
AB  and  BFA  degrees.  (Note  that  the 
Nursing  major  requires  Mathematics  13 
and  Computer  Science  15.) 

C.  Philosophy/Religion.  Met  by  tak- 
ing Philosophy  19  and  Religion  20  pro- 
vided that  in  each  course  the  student 
write  an  additional  paper  which  must 
receive  a  grade  of  B  or  better. 

D.  Fine  Arts/Language.  Same  as  for 
AB  and  BFA  scholars. 

E.  Natural  Sciences.  Met  by  Biology 
13,  Biology  14.  Biology  26  (required  for 
the  major). 

F.  History/Social  Science.  Met  by 


Psychology  10.  Psychology  17, 
(required  for  the  major)  and  one  course  in 
Sociology  30  or  higher.  (This  sociology 
course  may  be  taken  in  lieu  of  the  intro- 
ductory guided  elective  in  Sociology  for 
the  BSN.) 

All  Scholar  Students  must  complete 
the  following: 

G.  Physical  Education.  Scholars  must 
satisfy  the  same  physical  education 
requirements  stipulated  by  the  College 
for  all  students. 

H.  Designated  Courses.  In  addition  to 
completing  the  distribution  require- 
ments. Scholars  will  be  required  to  com- 
plete four  upper-level  courses  (numbered 
30  and  above)  chosen  from  a  list  of 
"designated"  courses  selected  and 
maintained  by  the  Scholar  Council.  Each 
full-time  Lycoming  instructor  is  invited 
to  nominate  one  of  his/her  courses  hav- 
ing special  depth  and  merit  for  inclusion 
on  this  list.  The  Scholar  Council  may 
alter  the  list  from  time  to  time.  A  scholar 
may  use  no  more  than  two  such  desig- 


nated courses  from  any  one  department 
to  satisfy  this  requirement.  Normally. 
Scholars  will  not  begin  taking  designated 
courses  until  their  sophomore  year. 

I.  Senior  Project.  In  the  senior  year, 
scholars  must  successfully  complete  an 
independent  studies  or  departmental 
honors  project  which  has  been  approved 
in  advance  by  the  Independent  Studies 
Committee  and  the  Scholar  Council. 
This  project  must  be  presented  orally  and 
be  accepted  by  the  Scholar  Council. 

J.  Scholars  must  complete  a  major  and 
32  units,  exclusive  of  the  First  Year 
Scholar  Seminar. 

K.  In  the  case  of  transfer  students  and 
those  who  seek  to  enter  the  program  after 
their  freshman  year  and  in  other  cases 
deemed  by  the  Scholar  Council  to 
involve  special  or  extraordinary  circum- 
stances, the  Council  shall  make  adjust- 
ments to  the  Scholar  distribution 
requirements  provided  that  in  all  cases 
such  exceptions  and  adjustments  would 
still  satisfy  the  regular  College  distribu- 
tion requirements. 


19 


Curriculum 


Numbers  1-9  Elementary  courses  in 
departments  where  such  courses  are 
not  counted  as  part  of  the  student's 
major. 
Number  10-19  Freshman  level  courses 
Numbers  20-29  Sophomore  level 

courses 
Numbers  30-39  Junior  level  courses 
Numbers  40-49  Senior  level  courses 
Numbers  50-59  Non-catalog  courses 

(offered  on  a  limited  basis) 
Numbers  60-69  Applied  Music 
Numbers  70-79  Internships 
Numbers  80-89  Independent  Study 
Numbers  90-99  Independent  Study  for 
Department  Honors 

Courses  not  in  sequence  are  listed  sepa- 
rately, as: 

Drawing  Art  1 1 

Color  Theory  Art  12 

Courses  which  imply  a  sequence  are 
indicated  with  a  dash  between,  meaning 
that  the  first  semester  must  be  taken  prior 
to  the  second,  as: 

Intermediate  French 

French  10-11 

All  students  have  the  right  of  access  to  all 
courses. 


ACCOUNTING 


Professor:  Richmond  (Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professors:  Kuhns,  Wienecke 

The  purpose  of  the  accounting  major  is 
to  help  prepare  the  student  for  a  career 
within  the  accounting  profession.  The 
major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  is  designed 
for  students  whose  primary  interests  lie 
in  the  financial  area  or  public  accounting 
and  provides  preparation  for  the  Certi- 
fied Public  Accountant  Examination; 
Track  II  is  designed  for  students  with  an 
interest  in  management  accounting  and 
provides  preparation  for  the  Certified 
Management  Accountant  Examination. 

Track  I  —  Financial  Accounting 
requires:  Accounting  10,  20-21,  30,  40, 
41,  43,  45,  Mathematics  13,  Computer 
Science  15,  and  one  unit  to  be  selected 


from  Accounting  25,  26.  3 1 ,  42,  46,  47, 
and  48  or  Internship.  Business  10  may  be 
substituted  for  Accounting  10  if  a  student 
changes  majors.  Duplicate  credit  will  not 
be  granted. 

Students  seeking  entry  into  the  public 
accounting  field  are  advised  to  investi- 
gate the  professional  requirements  for 
certification  in  the  state  in  which  they 
intend  to  practice  so  that  they  may  meet 
all  educational  requirements  prior  to  gra- 
duation. All  Track  1  majors  are  advised 
to  enroll  in  Economics  10  and  1 1,  Busi- 
ness 35,  36,  and  38,  and  one  of  the 
following:  Business  33,  Economics  20, 
or  37. 

Track  II  —  Management  Accounting 
requires:  Accounting  10,  20-21,  30-31. 
44,  Mathematics  13,  Computer  Science 
15,  Business  38-39,  and  40.  All  Track  II 
majors  are  advised  to  enroll  in  Econom- 
ics 10-11  and  Business  35-36.  Students 
planning  to  sit  for  the  Certified  Manage- 
ment Accountant  Examination  are 
advised  to  enroll  in  Accounting  40, 
41-42,  43,  and  a  one-half  unit  (2  credits) 
internship  during  the  fall  semester  of  the 
senior  year  together  with  Accounting  43 
or  a  one-half  unit  (2  credits)  independent 
study.  Business  10  may  be  substituted 
for  Accounting  10  if  a  student  changes 
majors.  Duplicate  credit  will  not  be 
granted. 

Three  minors  are  offered  by  the 
Department  of  Accounting.  The  follow- 
ing courses  are  required  to  complete  a 
minor  in  Financial  Accounting: 
Accounting  10,  20,  21,  43,  47  and  any 
other  accounting  course  or  independent 
study.  A  minor  in  Managerial  Account- 
ing requires  the  completion  of  Account- 
ing 10,  20,  30,  31,  and  44.  To  obtain  a 
minor  in  Federal  Income  Tax,  a  student 
must  complete  Accounting  10,  20,  21, 
41,  and  42. 


10     ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
An  introductory  course  in  recording,  classify- 
ing, summarizing,  and  interpreting  the  basic 
business  transaction.  Problems  of  classifica- 
tion and  interpretation  of  accounts  and  prepa- 
ration of  financial  statements  are  studied.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  received  credit 
for  Business  10.  Prerequisite:  Second- 
semester  freshman  or  consent  of  instructor. 


20-21     INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
An  intensive  study  of  accounting  statements 
and  analytical  procedures  with  an  emphasis 
upon  corporate  accounts,  various  decision 
models,  price-level  models,  earnings  per 
share,  pension  accounting,  accounting  for 
leases,  and  financial  statement  analysis.  Pre- 
requisite: Accounting  10. 

25  FINANCIAL  STATEMENT  ANALYSIS 
Deals  with  the  analysis  of  financial  statements 
as  an  aid  to  decision  making .  The  theme  of  the 
course  is  understanding  the  financial  data 
which  are  analyzed  as  well  as  the  methods  by 
which  they  are  analyzed  and  interpreted.  This 
course  should  prove  of  value  to  all  who  need  a 
thorough  understanding  of  the  uses  to  which 
financial  statements  are  put  as  well  as  to  those 
who  must  know  how  to  use  them  intelligently 
and  effectively.  This  includes  accountants, 
secunty  analysts,  lending  officers,  credit  anal- 
ysts, managers,  and  all  others  who  make  deci- 
sions on  the  basis  of  financial  data.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  10  or  Business  10.  May 
term. 

26  GOVERNMENT  AND 
FUND  ACCOUNTING 
This  course  is  designed  to  introduce  account- 
ing for  not-for-profit  organizations.  Munici- 
pal accounting  and  reporting  are  studied.  Pre- 
requisite: Accounting  10  or  Business  10. 
One-half  unit  of  credit. 

30-31  COST  AND  BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING  THEORY 
Methods  of  accounting  for  material,  labor, 
and  factory  overhead  expenses  consumed  in 
manufacturing  using  job  order,  process,  and 
standard  costing.  Application  of  cost 
accounting  and  budgetary  theory  to  decision 
making  in  the  area  of  make  or  buy,  expansion 
of  production  and  sales,  and  accounting  for 
control  are  dealt  with.  Prerequisites: 
Accounting  20  and  Mathematics  1 3  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

40     AUDITING  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  science  or  art  of  verifying, 
analyzing,  and  interpreting  accounts  and 
reports.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  emphasize 
concepts  which  will  enable  students  to  under- 
stand the  philosophy  and  environment  of 
auditing.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the 
public  accounting  profession,  studying  audit- 
ing standards,  professional  ethics,  the  legal 
liability  inherent  in  the  attest  function,  the 
study  and  evaluation  of  internal  control,  the 
nature  of  evidence,  the  growing  use  of  statisti- 
cal sampling,  the  impact  of  electronic  data 
processing,  and  the  basic  approach  to  plan- 
ning an  audit.  Finally,  various  audit  reports 
expressing  independent  expert  opinions  on  the 
fairness  of  financial  statements  are  studied. 


21 


Prerequisites:  Accounting  21.  Mathematics 
13.  and  Computer  Science  15. 

41  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX 
ACCOUNTING  AND  PLANNING 

Analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Interna! 
Revenue  Code  relating  to  income,  deductions, 
inventories,  and  accounting  methods.  Practi- 
cal problems  involving  determination  of 
income  and  deductions,  capital  gains  and  los- 
ses, computation  and  payment  of  taxes 
through  withholding  at  the  source  and  through 
declaration  are  considered.  Planning  transac- 
tions so  that  a  minimum  amount  of  tax  will 
result  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Account- 
ing 10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

42  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX 
ADMINISTRATION  AND  PLANNING 
An  analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal 
Revenue  Code  relating  to  partnerships, 
estates,  trusts,  and  corporations.  An  extensive 
series  of  problems  is  considered,  and  effective 
tax  planning  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite: 
Accounting  41. 

43  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING  I 

An  intensive  study  of  partnerships,  install- 
ment and  consignment  sales,  branch  account- 
ing, bankruptcy  and  reorganization,  estates 
and  trusts,  government  entities,  non-profit 
organizations,  and  accounting  and  reporting 
for  the  SEC.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  21. 
One-half  unit  of  credit. 

44  CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control  process  in  the  organization.  General 
systems  theory,  financial  control  systems, 
centralization-decentralization,  performance 
measurement  and  evaluation,  forecasts  and 
budgets,  and  marketing,  production  and 
finance  models  for  control  purposes.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  31  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Alternate  years. 

45  AUDITING  PRACTICE 

An  audit  project  is  presented,  solved  and  the 
auditor's  report  written.  THIS  COURSE  IS 
LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  WHO  HAVE 
EITHER  COMPLETED  OR  ARE 
ENROLLED  IN  ACCOUNTING  40.  One- 
half  unit  of  credit.  Grade  will  be  recorded  as 
S"  or  "U". 

46  SEMINAR  ON  APB  OPINIONS 
AND  FASB  STANDARDS 

A  seminar  course  for  accounting  majors  with 
library  assignments  to  gain  a  workable  under- 
standing of  the  highly  technical  opinions  of 
the  Accounting  Principles  Board  and  stan- 
dards of  the  Financial  Accounting  Standards 
Board.  One  term  paper.  Possible  trip  to  New 
York  City  to  attend  a  public  hearing  of  the 
Financial  Accounting  Standards  Board.  Pre- 
requisite: Accounting  10.  May  term. 


47  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING  II 

Certain  areas  of  advanced  accounting  theory, 
including  business  combinations,  consoli- 
dated financial  statements,  and  accounting 
and  reporting  for  the  Securities  and  Exchange 
Commission  are  covered.  Prerequisite: 
Accounting  21.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS 
FOR  CPA  CANDIDATES 

Problems  from  the  Accounting  Practice  sec- 
tions of  Past  C.P.A.  examinations,  which 
require  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  core 
courses  in  their  solution,  are  assigned.  The 
course  is  intended  to  meet  the  needs  of  those 
interested  in  public  accounting  and  prepara- 
tion for  the  Certified  Public  Accountant's 
examination.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  30  or 
consent  of  instructor.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 
Grade  will  be  recorded  as  "S"  or  "U" . 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  in  accounting  typically  work  off  cam- 
pus under  the  supervision  of  a  public  or  private 
accountant. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  index! 
Typical  examples  of  recent  studies  in 
accounting  are;  computer  program  to  generate 
financial  statements,  educational  core  for 
public  accountants,  inventory  control,  and 
church  taxation. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENT  HONORS 

(See  index) 


ACCOUNTING  — 
MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Assistant  Professor:  Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The  accounting-mathematical  sciences 
interdisciplinary  major  is  designed  to 
offer,  within  a  liberal-arts  framework, 
courses  which  will  aid  in  constructing 
mathematical  models  for  business  deci- 
sion making.  Students  obtain  the  neces- 
sary substantial  background  in  both 
mathematical  sciences  and  accounting. 
Required  accounting  courses  are: 
Accounting  10,  20.  2 1 ,  30,  3 1 , 4 1 ,  42.  In 
mathematical  sciences  required  courses 
are:  Computer  Science  15  and  37  and 
Mathematics  12,  18,  19.  38  and  13  or  32. 
Recommended  courses  include:  Mathe- 
matics 20,  33;  Business  23,  24,  35,  36, 
38,  39;  Computer  Science  26;  Econom- 


ics  10,    11;  Psychology   15,  24;  and 
Sociology  10. 


AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Professor:  Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The  American  studies  major  offers  a 
comprehensive  program  in  American 
civilization  which  introduces  students  to 
the  complexities  underlying  the  develop- 
ment of  America  and  its  contemporary 
life.  The  13  major  courses  include: 

FOUR  CORE  COURSES  —  The 

primary  integrating  units  of  the  major, 
these  team-taught  courses  will  teach  you 
how  to  think  of  ideas  from  different 
points  of  view  and  how  to  correlate  infor- 
mation and  methods  from  various  dis- 
ciplines: 

America  As  a  Civilization 

(First  semester  of  major  study) 
American  Studies  —  Research  and 

Methodology  (Second  semester) 
American  Tradition  in  the  Arts  and 

Literature  (Third  semester) 
Internship  or  Independent  Study 

(Junior  and/or  senior  year) 

CONCENTRATION  AREAS  —  Six 

courses  in  one  option  and  three  in  the 
other  are  needed.  Six  primary 
concentration-option  courses  in  Ameri- 
can Arts  or  American  Society  build 
around  the  insights  gained  in  the  core 
courses.  They  focus  particular  attention 
on  areas  most  germane  to  academic  and 
vocational  interests.  The  three  additional 
courses  from  the  other  option  give  fur- 
ther breadth  to  understanding  of  Ameri- 
ca. Students  also  will  be  encouraged  to 
take  elective  courses  relating  to  other 
cultures. 

American  Arts  Concentration  Option 

American  Art  —  Art  24 
American  Art  of  the  20th  Century  —  Art  23 
19th  Century  American  Literature  —  English  22 
20th  Century  American  Literature  —  Engish  23 
American  Music  —  Music  18  or  19 
American  Theatre 


22 


American  Society 
Concentration  Option 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  to  1877  — 

History  42 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  since  1877  — 

History  43 

American  Economic  Development 

Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities  —  Sociology  34 

American  Political  Tradition 

Students  should  design  their  American 
Studies  major  in  consultation  with  the 
program  coordinator  or  a  member  of  the 
American  Studies  Committee. 

10  AMERICA  AS  A  CIVILIZATION 

An  analysis  of  the  historical,  sociocultural. 
economic,  and  political  perspectives  of 
American  civlization  with  special  attention  to 
the  inter-relationships  between  these  various 
orientations. 

1 1  AMERICAN  STUDIES  —  RESEARCH 
AND  METHODOLOGY 

The  study  and  application  of  various  research 
methods,  including  new  trends  in  historical 
study,  quantitative  analysis,  cross-cultural 
studies,  and  on-site  inspection. 

12  AMERICAN  TRADITION  IN 
THE  ARTS  AND  LITERATURE 

The  relationship  of  the  arts  and  literature  to  the 
various  historical  periods  of  American  life. 

70-79  or  80-89     INTERNSHIP  OR 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
An  opportunity  to  relate  the  learning  in  the 
core  courses  and  the  concentration  areas  to  an 
actual  supervised  off-campus  learning  situa- 
tion or  independent  study  project. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
HONORS  (See  index) 


ART 

Associate  Professors:  Bogle 

(Chairperson),  Shipley 
Part-time  Instructor:  Hanks 
Adjunct  Faculty  at  Johnson  Atelier: 

Van  Tongeren,  Barre,  Lash,  Pitynski 

The  Art  Department  offers  two  degree 
programs:  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree  and  a 
bachelor  of  fine  arts  in  sculpture. 


The  B.A.  degree: 

To  complete  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree 
with  a  major  in  art.  a  student  must  com- 
plete one  of  the  following  three  tracks: 

Track  I  —  Two-Dimensional 

The  two-dimensional  track  consists  of 
Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  11  and  21).  Figure 
Modeling  I  (Art  16),  Two-Dimensional 
Design  (Art  15),  and  Painting  I  and  11 
(Art  20  and  30).  Printmaking  I  and  II  (Art 
28  and  38)  may  be  substituted  for  Paint- 
ing I  and  II  (Art  20  and  30).  Students 
must  also  take  Art  22  and  23  (Survey  of 
Art)  and  two  additional  courses  in  art 
history  (Art  24,  31,  32,  33,  34.  39). 
Studio  Research  (Art  46)  is  required 
along  with  participation  in  a  senior 
exhibition. 

Track  II  —  Three-Dimensional 

The  three-dimensional  track  consists 
of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  11  and  21), 
Figure  Modeling  (Art  16),  Sculpture  I 
and  II  (Art  25  and  35),  and  either  Figure 
Modeling  II  (Art  26)  or  Sculpture  III  (Art 
45).  Students  must  also  take  Art  22  and 
Art  23  (Survey  of  Art)  and  two  additional 
courses  in  art  history  (Art  24,  3 1 ,  32,  33, 
34,  39).  Studio  Research  (Art  46)  is 
required  along  with  participation  in  a 
senior  exhibition. 

Track  III  —  Commercial  Design 

The  commercial  design  track  consists 
of  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  II  and  21), 
Color  Theory  (Art  12),  Two- 
Dimensional  Design  (Art  15),  Figure 
Modeling  I  (Art  16),  Survey  of  Art  (Art 
22  and  23),  Photography  I  (Art  27), 
Special  Projects  in  Commercial  Design 
(Art  42),  Layout  and  Design  (GCO  511), 
Typographic  Composition  (GCO  512), 
and  Process  Camera  (GCO  521 ).  Course 
descriptions  for  the  last  three  required 
courses  are  shown  under  Mass  Commu- 
nication offerings  available  at  Williams- 
port  Area  Community  College. 

The  following  courses  are  recom- 
mended: Photography  II  (Art  37),  Intern- 
ship (Art  70-79),  Advertising  (Business 
32),  Writing  for  Special  Audiences 
(English  16),  Introduction  to  Mass  Com- 
munication (Mass  Comm  10),  Social 
Psychology  (Psy  24). 


The  BFA  degree  in  sculpture: 

The  student  completes  a  specified 
course  of  study  in  the  Art  Department, 
the  Lycoming  College  distribution 
requirements,  and  one  of  the  field  spe- 
cialization apprenticeship  programs  at 
the  Johnson  Atelier  in  Princeton,  New 
Jersey. 

The  Art  Department  course  of  study 
consists  of  12  courses  in  studio  and  art 
history:  Figure  Modeling  I  and  II  (Art  16 
and  26),  Sculpture  I  and  II  (Art  25  and 
35),  Drawing  I  and  II  (Art  11  and  21), 
Introduction  to  Photography  (Art  27), 
2-D  Design  (Art  15),  Survey  of  Art  (Art 
22  and  23),  and  two  additional  courses  in 
Art  History  (Art  24,  31.  32,  33,  34,  39). 

Twelve  additional  course  units  are 
required  of  the  student.  The  student  must 
meet  the  requirements  of  the  distribution 
program  within  these  courses. 

The  student  must  also  complete  one  of 
the  field  specialization  apprenticeships  at 
the  Johnson  Atelier  Technical  Institute  of 
Sculpture  in  Princeton,  New  Jersey.  This 
requires  the  student  to  be  at  the  Johnson 
Atelier  for  a  period  of  between  16  and 
23 '/2  months.  The  student  receives  eight 
course  units  of  credit  at  Lycoming  Col- 
lege for  successfully  completing  the  field 
specialization  apprenticeship  at  Johnson 
Atelier.  It  is  expected  that  the  work  for 
the  apprenticeship  component  will  be 
completed  during  the  summers  and  the 
junior  year. 

Admission  to  the  BFA  degree  program 
is  on  the  basis  of  meeting  the  admission 
standards  of  Lycoming  College,  and 
passing  a  portfolio  review  and  interview 
by  members  of  the  Lycoming  College 
Art  Department. 

Three  minors  are  being  offered  by  the 
Art  Department.  Requirements  for  each 
follow:  Art  History:  Art  22,  23,  and  two 
advanced  history  courses;  Sculpture:  Art 
16,  26,  25,  and  35  plus  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing: 21 ,  29,  or  45;  Painting:  Art  1 1 . 
15,  20,  30,  and  either  21  or  23. 


1 1     DRAWING  I 

Study  of  the  human  figure  with  gesture  and 
proportion  stressed.  Student  is  made  familiar 
with  different  drawing  techniques  and  media. 
Some  drawings  from  nature.  Offered  in  alter- 
nate semesters  with  Drawing  II  and  III. 


23 


i:     COLOR  THEORY 

A  study  of  ihe  physical  and  emotional  aspects 
of  color.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  study 
ofcolorasan  aesthetic  agent  for  the  artist.  The 
color  theories  of  Johannes  Itten  will  form  the 
base  for  this  course  with  some  study  of  the 
theories  of  Albert  Munsell.  Faber  Berren.  and 
Wilhelm  Ostwald. 

I?     TWO-DIMENSIONAL  DESIGN 

The  basic  fundamentals  found  in  the  two- 
dimensional  arts:  line,  shape,  form,  space, 
color,  and  composition  are  taught  in  relation- 
ship to  the  other  two-dimensional  arts.  Per- 
ceptual theories  and  their  relationships  to  what 
and  why  we  see  what  we  see  in  art  are  dis- 
cussed with  each  problem. 

16     FIGURE  MODELING  I 

Understanding  the  figure  will  be  approached 
through  learning  the  basic  structures  and  prop- 
ortions of  the  figure.  The  course  is  conceived 
as  a  three-dimensional  drawing  class.  At  least 
one  figure  per  student  will  be  cast. 

19  CERAMICS  I 

Emphasis  placed  on  pottery  design  as  it  relates 
to  function  of  vessels  and  the  design  parame- 
ters imposed  by  the  characteristics  of  clay. 
The  techniques  of  ceramics  are  taught  to 
encourage  expression  rather  than  to  dispense 
merely  a  technical  body  of  information. 

20  PAINTING  I 

An  introduction  of  painting  techniques  and 
materials  Coordination  of  color,  value,  and 
design  within  the  painting  is  taught  Some 
painting  from  the  figure.  No  limitations  as  to 
painting  media,  subject  matter,  or  style.  Pre- 
requisite: An  15  or  consent  of  inslruclor. 

21  DRAWING  II 

Continued  study  of  the  human  figure.  Empha- 
sis is  placed  on  realism  and  figure-ground 
coordination  with  the  use  of  value  and  design . 
Prerequisite:  Art  II 

11  SURVEY  OF  ART:  PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH  THE  MIDDLE  AGES 
A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture, 
and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on  the  interrelation 
of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of 
Ihe  visual  arts  to  their  cultural  environment: 
Paleolithic  Art.  Near  East,  Egypt,  Greece, 
Rome,  and  Medieval  Europe. 

23     SURVEY  OF  ART:  FROM  THE 
RENAISSANCE  THROUGH  THE 
MODERN  AGE 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture, 
and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on  the  Interrelation 
of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of 
the  visual  arts  to  their  cultural  environment: 
I4th-20th  centuries. 


24  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  I8TH 
AND  19TH  CENTURIES 

The  development  of  the  arts  in  America  from 
Colonial  times  through  the  19th  Century;  from 
the  unknown  folk  artist  to  popular  artists  such 
as  Winslow  Homer  and  Thomas  Eakins. 

25  SCULPTURE  I 

An  introduction  to  the  techniques,  materials, 
and  ideas  of  sculpture.  Clay,  plaster,  wax, 
wood,  and  other  materials  will  be  used.  The 
course  will  be  concerned  with  ideas  about 
sculpture  as  expression,  and  with  giving 
material  form  to  ideas. 

26  FIGURE  MODELING  II 

Will  exploit  the  structures  and  understandings 
learned  in  Figure  Modeling  1  to  produce  lar- 
ger, more  complex  figurative  works.  There 
will  be  a  requirement  to  cast  one  of  the  works 
in  plaster.  Prerequisites:  Art  16  and  consent  of 
instructor. 

11  INTRODUCTION  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives  of  the  course  are  to  develop  techni- 
cal skills  in  the  use  of  photographic  equipment 
(cameras,  films,  darkroom,  printmakerl  and 
to  develop  sensitivity  in  the  areas  of  composi- 
tion, form,  light,  picture  quality,  etc.  Each 
student  must  own  or  have  access  to  a  35mm 
camera. 

28  PRINTMAKING  I 

Introduction  to  the  techniques  of  silkscreen. 
intaglio,  monotype,  and  lithography  pnnting. 
One  edition  of  at  least  six  pnnts  must  be 
completed  in  each  area.  Prerequisite:  Art  II 
or  15  or  consent  of  instructor. 

29  CERAMICS  II 

Continuation  of  Ceramics  I.  Emphasis  on  use 
of  the  wheel  and  technical  aspects  such  as 
glaze  making  and  kiln  firing.  Prerequisite:  Art 
19. 

30  PAINTING  II 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  individual  style  and 
technique.  Artists  and  movements  in  art  are 
studied.  No  limitations  as  to  painting  media, 
subject  matter,  or  style.  Prerequisite:  Art  20. 

31  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 
Stylistic  developments  in  Europe  from  1 880  to 
the  present,  including  Cubism.  Fauvism, 
Expressionism,  Dada,  and  Surrealism.  Picas- 
so. Matisse.  Kandinsky.  and  Mondrian  are 
among  the  major  artists  studied. 

32  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE 
20TH  CENTURY 

Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in  the 
United  States  from  1900  to  the  present  with 
emphasis  on  developments  of  the  1950's  and 
1960's:  an  inquiry  Into  the  meaning  and  his- 
torical roots  of  contemporary  art. 


33  I9TH  CENTURY  EUROPEAN  ART 

Emphasis  on  painting,  sculpture,  and 
architecture  of  Western  Europe  from  1760  to 
1900,  including  the  work  of  late  18th-century 
artists  David  and  Goya  and  19th-century 
developments  from  Romanticism  through 
Post-Impressionism. 

34  ART  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE 
Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in  Italy 
and  the  Northern  countries  from  the  late  13th 
century  through  the  early  1 6th  century.  Artists 
Include  Giotto,  Donatello,  Alberti,  Leonardo 
da  Vinci,  Michelangelo,  Van  Eyck,  Durer, 
and  Bruegel. 

35  SCULPTURE  II 

A  continuation  of  Sculpture  I  (Art  25). 
Emphasis  is  on  advanced  technical  process. 
Casting  of  bronze  and  aluminum  sculpture 
will  be  done  in  the  school  foundry.  Prerequis- 
ite: Art  25. 

37  PHOTOGRAPHY  II 

To  extend  the  skills  developed  in  Photography 
I  by  continued  growth  in  technical  expertise 
including  instruction  in  the  use  and  capabili- 
ties of  large  format  view  cameras.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  conceptual  and  aesthetic  aspects  of 
photography.  Prerequisite:  An  27. 

38  PRINTMAKING  II 

Further  study  of  the  techniques  of  silk.screen, 
intaglio,  monotype,  and  lithography  printing 
with  emphasis  on  multi  plate  and  viscosity 
pnnting  Two  editions  of  at  least  six  prints 
must  be  completed  in  each  of  two  areas.  Pre- 
requisite: An  28. 

39  WOMEN  IN  ART 

A  survey  of  women  artists  from  a  variety  of 
viewpoints  —  aesthetic,  historical,  social, 
political  and  economic  —  which  seeks  to 
understand  and  integrate  the  contributions  of 
women  artists  into  the  mainstream  of  the  his- 
tory of  art .  No  prerequisite. 

40  PAINTING  III 

Professional  quality  is  stressed.  There  is  some 
experimentation  w  ith  new  painting  techniques 
and  styles. 

41  DRAWING  III 

Continued  study  of  human  figure,  individual 
style,  and  professional  control  of  drawing 
techniques  and  media  are  now  emphasized. 

42  SPECIAL  PROJECT  IN 
COMMERCIAL  DESIGN 
Concentrated  research,  preparation,  and 
execution  of  one  major  project  in  commercial 
design  chosen  by  the  student  in  consultation 
with  the  instructor.  Preliminary  concepts,  pre- 
paratory layout  and  design  and  finished  work 
will  culminate  in  a  portfolio  and  presentation. 


24 


Prerequisite:  permission  of  the  An  Depari- 
menl. 

45  SCULPTURE  III 

In  Sculpture  III  the  student  is  expected  to 
produce  a  series  of  sculptures  that  follow  a 
conceptual  and  technical  line  of  development. 
Prerequisites:  Art  16,  25.  and  35. 

46  STUDIO  RESEARCH 

Independent  research  in  an  elective  studio 
area,  conducted  under  the  supervision  of  the 
appropriate  faculty  member,  includes  creation 
of  vs'ork  which  ma\  be  incorporated  in  the 
senior  group  exhibition.  Student  works  in 
private  studio  assigned  by  the  department. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Commercial  design,  interior  design,  and 
photography  programs  in  local  businesses, 
and  museum  work  at  the  Lycoming  County 
Historical  Museum. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Recent  studies  in  anatomy.  Aspects  of  the  art 
nouveau.  lithography,  photography,  pottery, 
problems  in  illustration,  and  watercolor. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

(See  index) 


ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS 

Professor:  Fineman  (on  leave) 
Associate  Professor:  Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professor:  Fisher,  Keig 

The  department  offers  two  majors. 
The  major  in  astronomy  is  specifically 
(designed  to  train  students  in  the  field  of 
planetarium  education:  it  also  may  serve 
as  a  basis  for  earning  state  certification  as 
a  secondary  school  teacher  of  general 
science.  The  major  in  physics  can  pre- 
pare students  for  graduate  work  in  phys- 
ics, astronomy,  and  related  physical  sci- 
ences, for  the  cooperative  program  in 
engineering,  for  state  certification  as  sec- 
ondary school  teachers  of  physics,  or  for 
technical  positions  in  industry. 

Astronomy 

The  major  in  astronomy  requires 
Astronomy  11,  either  12  or  13,  30.  44, 
45  and  46;  Physics  25  and  26:  Mathema- 


tics 18  and  19:  and  Chemistry  10  and  1 1 
or  30  and  3 1 .  Juniors  and  seniors  major- 
ing in  astronomy  are  also  required  to 
register  for  four  semesters  of  Astronomy 
49  (non-credit  colloquia).  In  addition, 
the  following  cognate  courses  are  recom- 
mended: Physics  27  and  33:  Philosophy 
21.  22.  and  33:  Music  22:  and  Art  27. 

3  OBSERVATIONAL  ASTRONOMY 

A  methods  course  providing  the  opportunity 
to  make  a  vanety  of  astronomical  observa- 
tions, both  visually  and  photographically, 
with  and  without  telescopes.  The  planetarium 
is  used  to  familianze  the  student  with  the  sky 
at  vanous  times  dunng  the  year  and  from 
different  locations  on  eanh.  May  or  summer 
term  only. 

4  FIELD  GEOLOGY 

A  methods  course  introducing  the  field  tech- 
niques needed  to  study  the  geology  of  an  area. 
Max  or  summer  term  only. 

5  HISTORY  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  comprehensive  view  of  the  evolution  of 
astronomical  thought  from  ancient  Greece  to 
the  present,  emphasizing  the  impact  that  astro- 
nomical discovenes  and  the  conquest  of  space 
have  had  on  Western  culture.  May  or  summer 
term  only. 

1  PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY  (B) 

1 1  PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY  (A) 

A  summary  of  current  concepts  of  the  universe 
from  the  solar  system  to  distant  galaxies. 
Describes  the  techniques  and  instruments  used 
in  astronomical  research.  Presents  not  only 
what  is  reasonably  well  known  about  the  uni- 
verse, but  also  considers  some  of  the  major 
unsolved  problems.  Astronomy  I  and  1 1  share 
the  same  three  hours  of  lecture  and  mo  hours 
of  laboratory  each  week.  II  has  one  addition- 
al hour  each  week  for  more  advanced  mathe- 
matical treatment  of  the  material.  Credit  may 
not  he  earned  for  both  I  and  II.  Corequisite 
for  II:  Mathematics  17  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

2  EARTH  SCIENCE (B) 

12  EARTH  SCIENCE  (A) 

A  study  of  the  physical  processes  that  continu- 
ally affect  the  planet  Earth,  shaping  our  envi- 
ronment. Descnbes  how  past  events  and  life- 
forms  can  be  reconstructed  from  preserved 
evidence  to  reveal  the  history  of  our  planet 
from  its  ongin  to  the  present.  Emphasizes  the 
ways  in  which  geology,  meteorology,  and 
oceanography  interrelate  with  man  and  the 
environment.  Astronomy  2  and  12  share  the 
same  three  hours  of  lecure  and  two  hours  of 
laboratory  each  week.  12  has  one  additional 
hour  each  week  for  more  advanced  mathe- 
matical treatment  of  the  material.  Credit  may 


not  be  earned  for  both  2  and  12.  Corequisite 
for  12:  Mathematics  17  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

13     METEOROLOGY 

The  general  propenies  of  the  atmosphere  and 
their  measurements  will  be  discussed  in  terms 
of  basic  physical  and  chemical  laws.  Two 
basic  themes  will  guide  the  approach,  i.e. .  the 
atmosphere  behaves  like  a  giant  heat  engine, 
and  weather  patterns  exist  from  a  micro-to- 
macro  scale.  May  or  summer  term  only.  Alter- 
nate years. 

30     PLANETARIUM  TECHNIQUES 

A  methods  course  covering  major  aspects  of 
planetarium  programming,  operation  and 
maintenance.  Students  are  required  to  prepare 
and  present  a  planetarium  show.  Upon  suc- 
cessfully completing  the  course,  students  are 
eligible  to  become  planetarium  assistants. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  demonstration  and 
three  hours  of  practical  training  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Astronomy  I  or  II  (Principles 
of  Astronomy)  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

44  RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY 

A  detailed  presentation  of  the  special  theory  of 
relativity,  and  a  short  view  of  the  general 
theory  and  its  classical  proofs.  Man's  con- 
cepts of  the  universe,  with  particular  attention 
to  alternative  modem  cosmological  models. 
Discussion  of  the  Cosmological  Principle,  its 
rationale,  and  its  implications.  Four  hours  of 
lecture  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy 
1 1 1  Principles  of  Astronomy  A)  and  Physics  25 
(Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  I).  Alter- 
nate years.  Cross-listed  as  Physics  44. 

45  STELLAR  EVOLUTION 

The  physical  pnnciples  governing  the  internal 
structure  and  external  appearance  of  stars. 
Mechanisms  of  energy  generation  and  trans- 
port within  stars.  The  evolution  of  stars  from 
initial  formation  to  final  stages.  The  creation 
of  chemical  elements  by  nucleosynthesis. 
Four  hours  of  lecture  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Astronomy  1 1  (Principles  of  Astronomy  A ) 
and  Physics  26  (Introductory  Physics  with 
Calculus  II).  Alternate  years. 

46  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND 
GALACTIC  STRUCTURE 

The  motion  of  objects  in  gravitational  fields. 
Introduction  to  the  n-body  problem.  The  rela- 
tion between  stellar  motions  and  the  galactic 
potential.  The  large  scale  structure  of  galaxies 
in  general  and  of  the  Milky  Way  Galaxy  in 
particular.  Four  hours  of  lecture  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Astronomy  II  (Principles  of 
Astronomy  A)  and  Physics  25  (Introductory 
Phvsics  with  Calculus  I).  Alternate  years. 


25 


49     ASTRONOMY  AND 
PHYSICS  COLLOQUIA 

This  non-credil  but  required  course  forjuniors 
and  seniors  majoring  in  astronomy  and  phys- 
ics offers  students  a  chance  to  meet  and  hear 
active  scientists  in  astronomy,  physics,  and 
related  scientit~ic  areas  talk  about  their  own 
research  or  professional  activities.  In  addi- 
tion, majors  in  astronomy  and  physics  must 
present  two  lectures,  one  given  dunng  the 
Junior  year  and  one  given  during  the  senior 
year,  on  the  results  of  a  literature  survey  or  on 
individual  research.  Students  majoring  in  this 
department  are  required  to  attend  four  semes- 
ters during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  A  letter 
grade  will  be  given  when  the  student  gives  a 
lecture.  Otherwise  the  grade  will  be  S/U. 
Students  in  the  Cooperative  Program  in  Liber- 
al Arts  and  Engineenng  are  required  to  attend 
two  semesters  and  present  one  lecture  during 
their  junior  year.  One  hour  per  week.  Cross- 
lisled  as  Physics  49. 

1Q)-19     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Independent  studies  may  be  undertaken  in 
most  areas  of  astronomy. 

90-99  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


Physics 

The  major  in  physics  requires  Physics 
25.  26.  31,  32.  and  four  additional  phys- 
ics courses  numbered  27  and  above.  Up 
to  two  courses  chosen  from  Astronomy 
II.  12.  1 3 .  45 ,  and  46  may  substitute  for 
two  of  the  four  physics  electives.  Also 
required  are  Mathematics  18  and  19,  and 
Chemistry  10  and  11  or  30  and  31. 
Juniors  and  seniors  majoring  in  physics 
are  required  to  register  for  four  semesters 
of  Physics  49  (non-credit  colloquia).  In 
addition,  the  following  cognate  courses 
are  recommended:  Mathematics  20  and 
21  (these  are  required  for  the  cooperative 
engineering  program  and  by  most  gradu- 
ate schools):  Computer  Science  15 
(required  for  the  cooperative  engineering 
program);  and  Philosophy  21,  22,  and 
33,  A  foreign  language  is  recommended 
for  students  planning  on  graduate  study. 

6       ENERGY  ALTERNATIVES 

A  physicist's  definition  of  work,  energy,  and 
power.  The  various  energy  sources  available 
for  use,  such  as  fossil  fuels,  nuclear  fission 


and  fusion,  hydro,  solar,  wind,  and  geother- 
mal.  The  advantages  and  disadvantages  of 
each  energy  conversion  method,  including 
availability,  efficiency,  and  environmental 
effects.  Present  areas  of  energy  research  and 
possible  future  developments.  Projections  of 
possible  future  energy  demands.  Exercises 
and  expenments  in  energy  collection,  conver- 
sion, and  utilization.  May  or  summer  term 
only. 

1.5-16     PHYSICS  WITH  LIFE 

SCIENCE  APPLICATIONS 
The  basic  concepts,  principles,  and  laws  of 
physics  are  presented  in  this  noncalculus 
introductory  physics  course.  Topics  include 
mechanics,  elastic  properties  of  matter, 
fluids,  thermodynamics,  electricity  and  mag- 
netism, waves,  optics,  and  radioactivity. 
Many  of  the  examples  and  problems  used  to 
illustrate  the  physics  are  selected  from  the  life 
sciences.  Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of 
recitation,  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  17  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  (Credit  may  not  be  earned 
for  both  15  and  25  or  for  both  16  and  26.1. 


25-26 


INTRODUCTORY  PHYSICS 
WITH  CALCULUS 


A  mathematically  rigorous  introduction  to 
physics  designed  for  majors  in  physics,  astro- 
nomy, chemistry,  and  mathematics.  Topics 
include  mechanics,  thermodynamics,  electr- 
icity and  magnetism,  waves,  optics,  and  mod- 
em physics.  Five  hours  of  lecture  and  recita- 
tion and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Corequisite:  Mathematics  18-19  (Calculus  I 
and  11).  (Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  15 
and  25  or  for  both  16  and  26). 

27    ELECTRONICS 

D.C.  and  A.C.  circuit  and  network  theory, 
active  devices  such  as  transistors,  operational 
amplifiers,  integrated  circuits,  and  introduc- 
tion to  digital  electronics  will  be  covered. 
Three  lectures  and  two  mo-hour  laboratory 
sessions  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Physics  16 
or  26.  and  Mathematics  9  or  18  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

31  MECHANICS 

Kinematics  and  dynamics  of  single  particles 
and  systems  of  particles.  Rigid  bodies.  Intro- 
duction to  the  mechanics  of  continuous  media. 
Moving  reference  frames.  Lagrangian 
mechanics.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  three 
hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Physics  25  (Introductory  Physics  with  Calcu- 
lus I)  and  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II). 

32  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM 

The  electromagnetic  field,  electrical  poten- 
tial, magnetic  field,  and  electric  and  magnetic 
properties  of  matter.  Electric  circuits  Max- 
well's equations.  Laboratory  includes  elec- 
tronics as  well  as  classical  electricity  and 


magnetism.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  three 
hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite : 
Physics  26  (Introductory  Physics  with  Calcu- 
lus 111 

33     OPTICS 

Geometrical  optics,  optical  systems,  physical 
optics,  interference,  Fraunhofer  and  Fresnel 
diffraction,  and  coherence  and  lasers  will  be 
covered.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  three 
hours  of  labratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Physics  16  or  26.  and  Mathematics  9  or  18  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

37  THERMODYNAMICS  AND 
STATISTICAL  MECHANICS 

Classical  thermodynamics  will  be  presented, 
showing  that  the  macroscopic  properties  of  a 
system  can  be  specified  without  a  knowledge 
of  the  microscopic  properties  of  the  consti- 
tuents of  the  system.  Then  statistical  mechan- 
ics will  be  developed .  showing  that  these  same 
macroscopic  properties  are  determined  by  the 
microscopic  properties.  Four  hours  of  lecture 
and  recitation  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Phys- 
ics 26  (Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  II) 
and  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II).  Alternate 
years. 

38  ATOMIC  AND 
MOLECULAR  PHYSICS 

The  development  of  the  principles  and 
methods  of  quantum  mechanics  from  the  ear- 
liest evidence  of  quantization.  Structure  and 
spectra  of  atoms  and  molecules.  Extension  of 
quantum  theory  to  the  solid  state.  Four  hours 
of  lecture  and  recitation  and  one  three-hour 
laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Physics  26 
(Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  III  and 
Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II).  Alternate 
years. 

44     RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY 

A  detailed  presentation  of  the  special  theory  of 
relativity,  and  a  short  view  of  the  general 
theory  and  its  classical  proofs.  Man's  con- 
cepts of  the  universe,  with  particular  attention 
to  alternative  modem  cosmological  models. 
Discussion  of  the  Cosmological  Principle,  its 
rationale,  and  its  implications.  Four  hours  of 
lecture  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy  II 
(Principles  of  Astronomy  A)  and  Physics  25 
(Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  1).  Alter- 
nate years.  Cross-listed  as  Astronomy  44. 

47     NUCLEAR  AND 

PARTICLE  PHYSICS 
The  course  will  consider  properties  of  nuclei, 
nuclear  models,  radioactivity,  nuclear  reac- 
tions (including  fission  and  fusion),  and  prop- 
enies  of  elementary  panicles.  The  interactions 
of  nuclear  particles  with  matter  and  the  detec- 
tion of  nuclear  particles  will  be  covered.  It  will 
be  shown  how  observed  phenomena  lead  to 
theories  on  the  nature  of  fundamental  interac- 
tions, how  these  forces  act  at  the  smallest 


26 


measurable  distances,  and  what  is  expected  to 
occur  at  even  smaller  distances.  Four  hours  of 
lecture  and  recitation  and  mo  hours  of  hiho- 
raloryper  week^  Prerequisites:  either  Physics 
26  (Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  II)  or 
Phxsics  16  (Physics  with  Life  Science  Appli- 
cations II).  Mathematics  19.  and  either  Phys- 
ics iS  (Atomic  and  Molecular  Physics)  or 
Chemistrx  10.  .Alternate  \ears. 

48  INTRODUCTION  TO 
QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

Basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  quantum 
theory.  The  free  particle,  the  simple  harmonic 
oscillator,  the  hydrogen  atom,  and  central 
force  problems  will  be  discussed.  Both  time- 
mdependent  and  time-dependent  perturbation 
theory  will  be  covered.  Four  hours  of  lecture 
and  recitation.  Prerequisite:  either  Physics  26 
(Introductory  Physics  with  Calculus  II)  or 
Chemistry  3J  (Physical  Chemistry  II).  and 
Mathematics  21  (Differential  Equations). 
Cross-listed  as  Chemistry  39. 

49  ASTRONOMY  AND 
PHYSICS  COLLOQUIA 

This  non-credit  but  required  course  for  juniors 
and  seniors  majoring  in  astronomy  and  phys- 
ics offers  students  a  chance  to  meet  and  hear 
active  scientists  in  astronomy,  physics,  and 
related  scientific  areas  talk  about  their  own 
research  or  professional  activities.  In  addi- 
tion, majors  in  astronomy  and  physics  must 
present  two  lectures,  one  given  during  the 
junior  year  and  one  given  during  the  senior 
year,  on  the  results  of  a  literature  survey  or  on 
individual  research.  Students  majoring  in  this 
department  are  required  to  attend  four  semes- 
ters during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  A  letter 
grade  will  be  given  when  the  student  gives  a 
lecture.  Otherwise  the  grade  will  be  S/U. 
Students  in  the  Cooperative  Program  in  Liber- 
al Arts  and  Engineenng  are  required  to  attend 
two  semesters  and  present  one  lecture  during 
their  junior  year.  One  hour  per  week.  Cross- 
listed  as  Astronomy  49. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  in  physics  work  off  campus  under  the 
supervision  of  professional  physicists 
employed  by  local  industries  or  hospitals. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 

Independent  studies  may  be  undertaken  in 
most  areas  of  physics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

(See  index) 


BIOLOGY 


Associate  Professors:  Angstadt 
(Chairperson),  Diehl,  Zaccaria 

Assistant  Professors:  Gabriel, 
Pottmeyer.  Zimmerman 

A  major  consists  of  eight  biology 
courses,  including  10-11.  21,  22,23,24, 
and  25.  With  departmental  consent. 
Biology  26  may  be  substituted  for  Biolo- 
gy 21.  Only  two  courses  numbered 
below  20  may  count  toward  the  major. 
Departmental  internships  cannot  be  used 
to  fulfill  the  eighth  required  course.  In 
addition,  three  units  of  chemistry  and 
two  units  of  mathematical  science  are 
required.  The  chemistry  requirement 
must  include  at  least  one  unit  of  organic 
chemistry  chosen  from  Chemistry  15, 
20.  or  21.  The  mathematical  science 
courses  must  be  chosen  from  Computer 
Science  15  and  Mathematics  9.  13,  17  or 
above,  or  their  equivalent.  Certain  spe- 
cific exceptions  to  the  core  program  will 
be  made  for  three-year  students  enrolled 
in  cooperative  programs.  Such  excep- 
tions are  noted  under  the  particular 
cooperative  program  described  in  the 
Academic  Program  chapter  of  the  cata- 
log. Students  interested  in  these  prog- 
rams should  contact  the  program  director 
before  finalizing  their  individual  prog- 
rams. Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both 
Biology  1  and  10  or  for  both  Biology  2 
and  1 1 .  Consent  of  instructor  may 
replace  Biology  10-11  as  a  prerequisite 
for  all  biology  courses. 

A  minor  in  Biology  requires  the  com- 
pletion of  four  upper-level  (20's  or  high- 
er) courses,  with  their  appropriate  prere- 
quisites. At  least  two  of  these  must  be 
from  the  20"s  series  of  courses.  A  minor 
with  a  special  name  (e.g..  Environmen- 
tal Science)  may  be  designed  by  an  indi- 
vidual. 

1-2     PRINCIPLES  OF  BIOLOGY 

An  investigation  of  biological  principles, 
including  ecological  systems,  form  and  func- 
tion in  selected  representative  organisms 
(especially  man),  cell  theory,  molecular  biol- 
ogy, reproduction,  inhentance,  adaptation, 
and  evolution.  The  course  is  designed  primar- 
ily for  students  not  planning  to  major  in  the 


biological  sciences.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  two-hour  laboratory  per  week. 

3   FIELD  BIOLOGY  FOR  TEACHERS 

A  methods  course  for  students  preparing  to 
teach  biology.  Sources  and  methods  of  col- 
lecting and  preserving  various  plant  and  ani- 
mal materials.  Summer  term  only. 

5-6     HUMAN  BIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physics  and  chemistry 
relative  to  biological  systems.  Human  ana- 
tomy, physiology,  and  developmental  biology 
will  be  surveyed.  An  introduction  to  micro- 
biology with  emphasis  given  to  host-pathogen 
relationships  and  the  immune  response.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laborato- 
ry per  week.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
received  credit  for  Biology  13-14. 

lO-1 1     INTRODUCTION  TO  BIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  biology 
designed  for  students  planning  to  major  in  the 
biological  sciences.  Major  topics  considered 
include  the  origin  of  life,  cellular  respiration 
and  photosynthesis,  genetics,  development, 
anatomy  and  physiology,  ecology,  behavior, 
and  evolution.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  labortory  per  week. 

13-14     HUMAN  ANATOMY 
AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

Using  the  organ-systems  approach,  the  course 
is  an  introduction  to  the  human  body  —  its 
anatomy,  physiology,  and  normal  develop- 
ment —  with  particular  attention  to  structure 
and  function  at  all  levels  of  its  biological 
organization  (molecular  through  organismal). 
Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  discus- 
sion, and  one  three-hour  lab  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry  15  or  Chemistry  20  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

21  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  study  of  microogranisms.  Emphasis  is 
given  to  the  identification  and  physiology  of 
microorganisms  as  well  as  to  their  role  in 
disease,  their  economic  importance,  and 
industrial  applications.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  two  two-hour  laboratory  periods  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  received  credit  for  Biolo- 
gy 26. 

22  GENETICS 

A  general  consideration  of  the  principles  gov- 
erning inheritance,  including  treatment  of 
classical,  molecular,  cytological.  physiologi- 
cal, microbial,  human,  and  population  gene- 
tics. Three  hours  of  lecture  and  nvo  two-hour 
laboralorv  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  10-11. 

23  ANIMAL  PHYSIOLOGY 

The  mechanisms  and  functions  of  animal  svs- 


27 


lenis.  including  the  autonomic,  endocnne. 
digestive,  cardio-vascular,  respiratory,  renal, 
nervous,  and  reproductive  systems.  Mamma- 
lian physiology  is  stressed.  Three  hours  of 
lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  lO-l I . 

24  ECOLOGY 

The  study  of  the  principles  of  ecology  with 
emphasis  on  the  role  of  chemical,  physical, 
and  biological  factors  affecting  the  distribu- 
tion and  succession  of  plant  and  animal  popu- 
lations and  communities.  Included  will  be 
field  studies  of  local  habitats  as  well  as  labo- 
ratory experimentation.  Two  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Pre- 
requisite: Biology  10-1 1. 

25  PLANT  SCIENCES 

A  survey  of  the  structure,  development,  func- 
tion, classification,  and  use  of  plants  and 
related  organisms.  The  study  will  comprise 
four  general  topic  areas:  form,  including  mor- 
phology and  anatomy  of  plants  in  growth  and 
reproduction;  function,  concentrating  on 
nutrition  and  metabolism  peculiar  to  photo- 
synthetic  organisms;  classification  systems 
and  plant  identification,  and  human  uses  of 
plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three- 
hour  laboralon  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biol- 
ogy 10-11. 

26  MICROBIOLOGY  FOR  THE 
HEALTH  SCIENCES 

A  study  of  microorganisms  with  emphasis 
given  to  their  taxonomy  and  their  role  in 
various  aspects  of  human  infectious  disease. 
Mechanisms  for  treating  and  preventing 
infectious  diseases  will  be  presented.  Labora- 
tory to  include  diagnostic  culture  procedures, 
antibiotic  sensitivity  testing,  serology,  anaer- 
obic techniques  and  a  study  of  hemolytic 
reactions.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  four 
hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
one  year  of  introductory  level  biology,  one 
year  of  chemistry  or  consent  of  instructor.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  received  credit  for 
Biology  21. 

28     AQUATIC  BIOLOGY 

A  field-oriented  course  dealing  with  freshwa- 
ter ecosystems.  Studies  will  include  a  survey 
of  the  plankton .  benthos,  and  fish  —  as  well  as 
the  physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of 
water  that  influence  their  distribution.  Several 
local  field  trips  and  a  one-week  trip  to  a  field 
station  will  familiarize  students  with  thediver- 
sity  of  habitats  and  the  techniques  of  limnolo- 
gists.  May  term  onl\.  Prerequisites:  Biology 
10-11. 

.10    COMPARATIVE  ANATOMY 
OF  VERTEBRATES 

Detailed  examination  of  the  origins,  structure, 
and  functions  of  the  principal  organs  of  the 
vertebrates   Special  attention  is  given  to  the 


progressive  modification  of  organs  from  low- 
er to  higher  vertebrates  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Pre- 
requisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

31  HISTOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  body  tissues  and  the 
microscopic  anatomy  of  the  organs  and  struc- 
tures of  the  body  which  are  formed  from  them. 
Focus  is  on  norma!  human  histology.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory 
per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11 .  Alter- 
nate years. 

32  PLANT  AND 
GREENHOUSE  MANAGEMENT 

A  course  concerned  with  the  care  of  house- 
plants  and  the  management  of  small  green- 
houses. Class  time  will  include  lectures,  dis- 
cussions, demonstrations,  greenhouse 
exercises,  and  field  trips  to  local  greenhouses. 
Topics  will  include  the  theoretical  and  practi- 
cal aspects  of  the  care  and  feeding,  propaga- 
tion, light  and  water  requirements,  and  dis- 
ease control  for  many  of  the  common  house 
and  greenhouse  plants.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
1-2  or  10-11.  May  term  only. 

33  ECONOMIC  AND 
SYSTEMATIC  BOTANY 

Structure  and  classification  of  plants  with 
emphasis  on  those  species,  particularly  food 
and  drug  plants,  having  significance  for 
human  affairs.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequis- 
ites: Biology  10-11.  Biology  25.  Alternate 
years. 

-34     INVERTEBRATE  ZOOLOGY 

Comparative  study  of  the  invertebrate  phyla 
with  emphasis  on  phylogeny,  physiology, 
morphology,  and  ecology.  Two  three-hour 
lecture! laboratory  periods  per  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

35     CELLULAR  PHYSIOLOGY 

Physicochemical  background  of  cellular 
function:  functions  of  membrane  systems  and 
organelles;  metabolic  pathways;  bio-chemical 
and  cellular  bases  of  growth,  development  and 
responses  of  organisms  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  10-1 1  and  a  year  of 
chemistry.  Alternate  years. 

39     MEDICAL  GENETICS 

This  course  is  concerned  with  the  relation- 
ships of  heredity  to  disease.  Discussions  will 
focus  on  topics  such  as  chromosomal  abnor- 
malities, metabolic  variation  and  disease, 
somatic  cell  genetics,  genetic  screening,  and 
immunogenetics.  Laboratory  exercises  will 
offer  practical  experiences  in  genetic  diag- 
nostic techniques.  Prerequisite:  Biology  1-2 
or  10-11.  May  term  only. 


40  PARASITOLOGY  AND 
MEDICAL  ENTOMOLOGY 

The  biology  of  parasites  and  parasitism. 
Studies  on  the  major  groups  of  animal  para- 
sites and  anthropod  vectors  of  disease  will 
involve  taxonomy  and  life  cycles.  Emphasis 
will  be  made  on  parasites  of  medical  and 
veterinary  importance.  Three  hours  of  lecture 
and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Pre- 
requisite: Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

41  VERTEBRATE  EMBRYOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  development  of  vertebrates 
from  fertilization  to  the  fully  formed  fetus. 
Particular  attention  is  given  to  the  chick  and 
human  as  representative  organisms.  Two 
three-hour  lectureHaboratory  periods  per 
week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-1 1 .  Alternate 


42     ANIMAL  BEHAVIOR 

A  study  of  the  causation,  function,  evolution, 
and  biological  significance  of  animal  beha- 
viors in  their  normal  environment  and  social 
contexts.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
four-hour  laboratory  each  week.  Prerequis- 
ite: Biology  lO-l I.  Alternate  years. 

44  BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of  car- 
bohydrates, lipids,  amino  acids,  proteins,  and 
nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and 
biochemical  control  mechanisms,  including 
allosteric  control,  induction,  repression,  as 
well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibilive  control 
mechanisms.  Three  hours  of  lecture,  one 
three-hour  laboratory  and  one  hour  of 
arranged  work  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  20-21  or  Chemistry  15.  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as  Chemistry  44. 
Alternate  years. 

45  RADIATION  BIOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  effects  of  ionizing  and  non- 
ionizing irradiations  on  cells,  tissues  and 
organisms.  Consideration  will  be  given  to 
repair  mechanisms  and  how  repair  deficien- 
cies elucidate  the  nature  of  irradiation  dam- 
age. Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three- 
hour  lab  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Biology 
10-11.  one  year  of  chemistry.  Alternate  years. 

46  PLANT  ANATOMY 
AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

A  study  of  plant  physiology  as  a  function  of 
plant  anatomy.  Metabolic  relationships  and 
environmental  factors  will  be  examined  from 
a  background  of  the  structure  and  develop- 
ment of  cells,  tissues,  organs,  and  whole 
plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three- 
hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  10-11.  Biology  25.  Alternate  years. 

47  IMMUNOLOGY 

The  course  introduces  concepts  concerning 


28 


how  pathogens  cause  disease  and  host  defense 
mechanisms  agamst  infectious  diseases. 
Characterization  of  and  relationships  between 
antigens,  haptens,  and  antibodies  are  pre- 
sented. Serological  assays  will  include: 
agglutination  precipitations,  immunofluores- 
cence. Immunoelectrophoresis,  and  comple- 
ment fixation.  Other  topics  are:  immediate 
and  delayed  hypersensitivities  (i.e.  allergies 
such  as  hay  fever  and  poison  ivy),  immuno- 
logical renal  diseases,  immunohematology 
(blood  groups,  etc.).  the  chemistry  and  func- 
tion of  complement  autoimmunity,  and  organ 
graft  rejection  phenomena.  Three  hours  of 
lecture,  one  ihree-hour  laboratory,  and  one 
hour  of  arranged  work  per  week.  Prerequis- 
ite: Biology  10-11 .  Alternate  years. 

48  ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This  course  begins  with  a  survey  of  the  role  of 
the  endocrine  hormones  in  the  integration  of 
body  functions.  This  is  followed  by  a  study  of 
the  control  of  hormone  synthesis  and  release, 
and  a  consideration  of  the  mechanisms  by 
which  hormones  accomplish  their  effects  on 
target  organs.  Two  three-hour  lecture! 
laboratory  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

49  BIOLOGY  COLLOQUIUM 

This  course  offers  the  student  a  chance  to 
become  familiar  with  research  in  the  Biologi- 
cal Sciences  using  techniques  such  as  meeting 
and  talking  with  active  researchers,  reading 
and  critically  analyzing  the  current  literature, 
and  discussing  the  ideas  and  methods  shaping 
Biology.  Students  will  be  required  to  read  and 
analyze  scientific  papers,  actively  participate 
in  discussions,  and.  in  the  senior  year,  present 
the  results  of  a  literature  survey  or  of  individu- 
al research.  Students  majoring  in  this  depart- 
ment are  required  to  enroll  during  all  semes- 
ters spent  on  campus  in  the  junior  and  senior 
years.  A  letter  grade  will  be  given  in  a  semes- 
ter when  the  student  gives  a  lecture;  in  other 
semesters  the  grade  will  be  S/U.  Non-credit 
course.  One  hour  per  week.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  majors  with  junior  or  senior  class 
standing. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Recent  samples  of  internships  in  the  depart- 
ment include  ones  with  the  Department  of 
Environmental  Resources,  nuclear  medicine 
or  rehabilitative  therapies  at  a  local  hospital. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Departmental  studies  are  experimentally 
oriented  and  may  entail  either  lab  or  field 
work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
Examples  of  recent  honors  projects  have 


involved  stream  analysis,  gypsy  moth 
research,  drug  synthesis  and  testing. 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

Professor:  Hollenback 
Associate  Professor:  Weaver 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professors:  Gordon 
Lecturer:  Larrabee 

To  graduate  with  a  major  in  business 
administration,  a  student  must  complete 
one  of  two  tracks: 

Track  I  —  Business  Management 

This  track  is  designed  to  train  students 
in  the  functions  of  today's  profit  and 
nonprofit  organizations.  The  program 
provides  a  well-balanced  preparation  for 
a  wide  variety  of  careers,  including  gen- 
era! administration,  personnel  adminis- 
tration, commercial  banking,  invest- 
ments and  portfolio  management, 
security  analysis,  corporate  financial 
management,  general  marketing,  sales, 
product  management,  advertising,  retail 
merchandising,  and  production  and  man- 
ufacturing management. 

Required  courses  are  Business  10,  11, 
23,  28-29,  38,  39,  40.  and  41,  and 
Mathematics  13.  Business  32  or  43  may 
be  substituted  for  Business  29,  and  Busi- 
ness 33  may  be  substituted  for  Business 
39.  Accounting  JO  may  be  substituted  for 
Business  10  if  the  student  is  transferring 
into  the  business  administration  major, 
but  duplicate  credit  will  not  be  granted. 

Majors  are  also  urged  to  enroll  in  Eco- 
nomics 10  and  1 1,  Business  35  and  36, 
Mathematics  12,  and  Computer  Science 
15.  Majors  also  are  encouraged  to  take  a 
foreign  language.  The  additional  elective 
offerings  are  intended  to  add  depth  in  the 
areas  of  finance,  marketing,  and  man- 
agement. 

Track  II  —  Management  Science 

This  track  is  designed  to  train  students 
in  the  quantitative  aspects  of  business 
administration.  It  provides  excellent 
undergraduate  preparation  for  graduate 
study  in  management  science,  operations 


research,  and  quantitative  business 
administration.  The  program  also  pro- 
vides a  solid  preparation  for  careers  in 
production  control,  systems  analysis, 
research,  forecasting,  industrial  and 
technical  sales  and  any  of  the  functional 
areas  of  business  where  quantitative 
training  would  be  an  added  qualification. 
Required  courses  are  Business  10.  11. 
23.  38,  39,  46:  Economics  10.  11,  41: 
Mathematics  18-19.  12,  13.  38,  and 
Computer  Science  15.  Accounting  10 
may  be  substituted  for  Business  10  if  the 
student  is  transferring  into  the  business 
administration  major. 


10  FINANCIAL  ACCOUNTING 

An  introduction  to  the  art  of  measuring,  com- 
municating, and  interpreting  financial  activi- 
ty. Recording,  classifying  and  summarizing 
business  transactions,  the  interpretation  of 
accounts,  and  the  preparation  of  financial 
statements  are  studied.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  received  credit  for  Accounting  10. 

1 1  MANAGERIAL  ACCOUNTING 

An  introduction  to  the  various  components  of 
managerial  accounting.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
managerial  problem  solving  techniques  and 
the  analysis  of  the  results.  Accounting  sys- 
tems, costing  procedures,  cost-volume  profit 
relationships,  managerial  control  processes 
and  the  use  of  computers  as  aids  to  decision 
making  are  studied.  Students  will  gain  hands- 
on  experience  w  ith  various  computer  applica- 
tions of  managerial  accounting.  Prerequisite: 
Business  10  or  Accounting  10. 

23     QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS  ANALYSIS 
Techniques  of  quantitative  analysis  useful  in 
making  business  decisions.  Topics  include: 
decision  theory,  inventory  models,  network 
models,  forecasting,  and  other  selected  appli- 
cations. Students  will  be  introduced  to  com- 
puter applications  of  the  quantitative  models. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  13  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

28-29     MARKETING  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  the 
distribution  activities  of  the  firm,  and  an  anal- 
ysis and  evaluation  of  the  marketing  system, 
its  institutions,  and  processes.  Application  of 
marketing  principles  and  the  development  of 
strategies  for  specific  marketing  problems. 
Product,  channel  fiow.  promotion,  and  pric- 
ing strategies  explored.  Readings,  cases,  and 
games. 

32     ADVERTISING 

Nature,  scope,  methods,  and  effects  of  prom- 


29 


otion.  Techniques  of  analysis  and  control  in 
the  use  of  advertising  and  publicity  as  tools  in 
developing  business  strategy. 

33     INVESTMENTS 

An  introduction  to  the  financial  sector  of  the 
economy  and  the  structure  and  functions  of 
financial  markets  and  the  agencies  involved; 
brokerage  houses  and  stock  exchanges;  the 
various  types  of  investments  available.  Tech- 
niques used  to  evaluate  financial  securities. 
Also  covered  are  recent  developments  in 
investment  theory. 

35  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  I 

Lectures  and  analysis  of  cases  on  the  nature, 
sources,  and  fundamentals  of  the  law  in  gener- 
al, and  particularly  as  relating  to  contracts, 
agency,  and  negotiable  instruments.  Open 
only  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

36  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  II 

Lectures  on  the  fundamentals  and  history  of 
the  law  relating  to  legal  association,  real  prop- 
erty, wills,  and  estates.  Open  only  to  juniors 
and  seniors. 

38  FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  I 

An  introduction  to  working  capital  manage- 
ment and  financial  analysis  and  planning. 
Topics  are  covered  through  readings,  cases 
and  problem  solving  in  the  areas  of  decisions 
on  current  asset  and  liability  structures,  cash 
and  marketable  securities,  accounts  receiv- 
ables, inventory  management  and  control, 
spontaneous  financing,  short-term  borrowing, 
ratio  and  financial  statement  analysis,  source 
and  use  statements,  cash  flow  forecasting,  and 
financial  statements  forecasting.  Prerequis- 
ites: Mathematics  13.  Business  10,  II.  and 
23.  or  consent  of  instructor. 

39  FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT  II 

A  study  of  capital  asset  structure  and  long- 
term  financial  decisions.  Topics  are  covered 
through  readings,  cases,  and  problem  solving 
in  the  areas  of  capital  budgeting,  including 
risk  and  required  rates  of  return,  leveraging 
the  firm,  concepts  of  capital  structures, 
dividend  policy,  external  financing,  term  and 
lease  financing,  long-term  debt,  equity  sec- 
urities, convertible  securities  and  warrants. 
Prerequisite:  Business  iS  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40  MANAGEMENT  CONCEPTS 
Structural  characteristics  and  functional  rela- 
tionships of  a  business  organization  as  well  as 
the  problems  encountered  in  coordinating  the 
internal  resources  of  a  firm.  Emphasis  on 
administrative  efficiency  and  procedures. 

41  BUSINESS  POLICIES 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  busi- 
ness operations;  setting  of  goals;  coordination 
of  resources,  development  of  policies.  Analy- 


sis of  strategic  decisions  encompassing  all 
areas  of  a  business .  and  the  use  and  analysis  of 
control  measures.  Emphasis  on  both  the  inter- 
nal relationship  of  various  elements  of  pro- 
duction, finance,  marketing,  and  personnel, 
and  the  relationship  of  the  business  entity  to 
external  stimuli.  Readings,  cases,  and  games. 
Prerequisites:  Business  23.  28-29.  38-39. 
and  40.  or  consent  of  instructor.  Seniors  only. 

42  PERSONNEL  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  managenal  problems  of 
recruiting,  selecting,  training,  and  retraining 
the  human  resources  of  the  firm.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  interrelationship  of  personnel 
policies  with  management  objectives  and  phi- 
losophies in  such  areas  as  fringe  benefits, 
wage  and  salary  policies,  union  activities,  and 
health  and  safety. 

43  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  I 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  the 
retailing  firm.  Competitive  strategy  develop- 
ment through  store  location,  layout,  adminis- 
tration organization,  buying,  and  pricing. 
Cases,  readings,  and  papers. 

45  MARKETING  RESEARCH 

This  is  a  study  of  the  principles  and  practices 
of  Marketing  Research.  The  focus  is  on  the 
development  and  application  of  Marketing 
Research  Studies.  Topics  covered  include 
selection  of  a  research  design,  project  plan- 
ning and  scheduling,  data  specification  and 
gathering,  quantitative  methods  to  analyze 
data,  interpretation  of  data,  and  research 
report  wnting.  Readings,  cases,  and  research 
project.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  13.  Busi- 
ness 28.  or  consent  of  instructor. 

46  PRODUCTION  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  planning,  organization, 
and  controlling  of  operations  in  a  production 
facility.  The  course  also  incorporates  quanti- 
tative techniques  and  computer  applications 
used  in  the  production  and  operations  manage- 
ment environment.  Topics  include  capacity 
and  layout  planning,  facility  location  analysis, 
job  design  and  work  measurement,  production 
scheduling,  materials  requirement  planning 
models,  and  quality  controls.  Students  will 
engage  in  the  actual  design  of  an  inventory 
status  file  and  MRP  system.  Prerequisites: 
Business  23  or  consent  of  instructor. 

47  CREATIVE  ADVERTISING 

A  workshop  concerned  with  theme,  copy,  and 
effective  presentation  of  advertisements  for 
print  media,  radio,  and  direct  mail.  Primarily 
an  exploration  of  creativity  through  analysis 
of  works  of  artists  and  writers  with  application 
to  practical  advertising,  and  tailored  to  the 
interests  of  individual  students.  May  term. 

48  SALES  SEMINAR 

The  role  of  selling  in  the  economy.  The  art  of 


creative  selling;  application  of  theories  from 
the  behavioral  sciences  to  selling  through  the 
analysis  of  sales  situations  and  techniques. 

49     MANAGING  THE 
SMALL  BUSINESS 

How  the  potential  businessman  proceeds  in 
establishing,  operating,  and  profiting  from  a 
small  business  operation.  Considered  and 
analyzed  are  such  aspects  as  marketing,  man- 
aging, financing,  promoting,  insuring,  estab- 
lishing, developing,  and  staffing  the  small 
retail,  wholesale  service,  and  manufacturing 
firm.  May  term. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Typical  examples  are  marketing  analysis  for  a 
paper  products  firm,  planning  a  branch  store, 
hotel  and  real  estate  management,  banking 
and  insurance. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Examples  of  recent  studies  are;  the  economic 
impact  of  a  college  on  a  community;  a  mark- 
eting strategy  for  a  local  firm  enlerting  the 
consumer  market. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
A  recent  project  was  a  study  of  the  evolution 
of  anti-trust  legislation  in  the  United  States. 


CHEMISTRY 

Professors:  Hummer.  Radspinner 
Associate  Professor:  Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time  Instructor:  Baggett 

A  major  in  chemistry  consists  of 
Chemistry  10-11.  20-21.  30-31,  32  and 
33;  Physics  25-26:  Mathematics  18.  19 
and  one  of  the  following  courses:  Mathe- 
matics 1 3 ,  20.  2 1 ,  32 ,  or  Computer  Sci- 
ence 15.  Mathematics  20  and  21  and 
French  or  German  are  strongly  recom- 
mended for  students  planning  on  gradu- 
ate study  in  chemistry.  To  be  certified  in 
secondary  education,  chemistry  majors 
must  also  pass  two  biology  courses  num- 
bered 10  or  higher. 

A  minor  in  Chemistry  requires  com- 
pletion of  four  courses  numbered  20  or 
higher;  at  least  one  must  be  taken  from 
each  of  the  following  groups:  Group  A 
(20,  21,40,  41,  44,  45)  and  Group  B  (26 


30 


or  32,  30, 3 1 ,  33. 39, 43).  Named  minors 
in  specialized  ares  may  be  designed  by 
students  with  departmental  approval. 

8      CHEMICAL  PRINCIPLES 

An  introduction  to  the  principles  of  inorganic 
chemistry.  Topics  include  atomic  and 
molecular  structure,  nomenclature,  gases, 
solutions,  acids  and  bases,  kinetics,  equili- 
brium, oxidation-reduction,  and  stoichiomet- 
ry.  The  approach  is  primarily  descriptive, 
with  illustrations  drawn  mostly  from  the 
health  sciences.  Along  with  Chemistry  15. 
this  course  is  designed  for  those  students  who 
require  only  two  semesters  of  chemistry,  and 
is  not  intended  for  students  planning  to  enroll 
in  chemistry  courses  numbered  20  or  above. 
Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  discussion,  and 
one  three-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  high  school  algebra  or  Math  5. 
Not  open  for  credit  to  students  who  have 
received  credit  for  Chemistry  10. 

10  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  I 

A  quantitative  introduction  to  the  concepts 
and  models  of  chemistry.  Topics  include 
stoichiometry.  atomic  and  molecular  struc- 
ture, nomenclature,  bonding,  thermochemi- 
stry, gases,  solutions,  and  chemical  reactions. 
The  laboratory  introduces  the  student  to 
methods  of  separation,  purification,  and  iden- 
tification of  compounds  according  to  their 
physical  properties.  This  course  is  designed 
for  students  who  plan  to  major  in  one  of  the 
sciences.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  dis- 
cussion and  one  three-hour  laboratory  period 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  placement  in  Chem- 
istry 10  is  determined  in  part  by  a  student's 
score  on  the  mathematics  placement  e.xami- 
nation.  Not  open  for  credit  to  students  who 
have  received  credit  for  Chemistry  8.  except 
by  permission  of  the  Chemistry  Department. 

1 1  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  II 

A  continuation  of  Chemistry  10.  with  empha- 
sis placed  on  the  foundations  of  analytical, 
inorganic,  and  physical  chemistry.  Topics 
include  kinetics,  general  and  ionic  equilibria, 
acid-base  theory,  electrochemistry,  ther- 
modynamics, nuclear  chemistry,  coordination 
chemistry,  and  descriptive  inorganic  chemis- 
try of  selected  elements.  The  laboratory  treats 
aspects  of  quantitative  and  qualitative  inor- 
ganic analysis.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour 
discussion,  and  one  three-hour  laboratory 
period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10 
or  consent  of  the  Chemistry  Department. 

15     BRIEF  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  descriptive  study  of  the  compounds  of  car- 
bon. This  course  will  illustrate  the  pnnciples 
of  organic  chemistry  with  material  relevant  to 
students  in  medical  technology,  biology, 
nursing,  forestry,  education  and  the  humani- 
ties. Topics  include  nomenclature,  alkanes. 


arenes.  functional  denvatives.  amino  acids 
and  proteins,  carbohydrates  and  other  natur- 
ally occurring  compounds.  This  course  is 
designed  for  students  who  require  only  one 
semester  of  organic  chemistry.  Three  hours 
lecture,  one  hour  discussion,  and  one  four- 
hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry  8  or  10.  Not  open  for  credit 
to  students  who  have  received  credit  for 
Chemistry  20. 

20-21     ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  systematic  study  of  the  compounds  of  car- 
bon, including  both  aliphatic  and  aromatic 
series.  The  laboratory  work  introduces  the 
student  to  simple  fundamental  methods  of 
organic  synthesis,  isolation,  and  analysis. 
Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  labo- 
ratory period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  II. 

26     CLINICAL  ANALYSIS 

A  presentation  of  selected  wet-chemical  and 
instrumental  methods  of  quantitative  analysis 
with  an  orientation  toward  clinical  applica- 
tions in  medical  technology.  Topics  include: 
general  methods  and  calculations;  solutions; 
titrations;  photometric  analyses  (colorimetric, 
atomic  absorption,  flame  emmision);  electro- 
chemical methods  (ion-selective  electrodes, 
coulometry).  automation.  Lecture,  recitation, 
and  laboratory  daily.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry 
10-11  or  consent  of  instructor.  May  not  be 
taken  for  credit  following  Chemistry  32.  May 
term  only. 

30-31     PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
theoretical  chemistry  and  their  applications. 
The  laboratory  work  includes  techniques  in 
physicochemical  measurements.  Three  hours 
lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period 
each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11. 
Mathematics  19.  and  one  year  of  physics  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

32  ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  methods  of  gra- 
vimetric, volumetric,  and  elementary  instru- 
mental analysis  together  with  practice  in  labo- 
ratory techniques  and  calculations  of  these 
methods.  Two  hours  lecture  and  mo  three- 
hour  labortory  periods  each  week.  Prerequis- 
ite: Chemistry  1 1  or  consent  of  instructor. 

33  ADVANCED  INORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 
A  study  of  modem  theories  of  atomic  and 
molecular  structure  and  their  relationship  to 
the  chemistry  of  selected  elements  and  their 
compounds.  Three  hours  lecture  and  one 
four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry  30.  Mathematics  19.  and 
one  year  of  physics  or  consent  of  instructor. 


39  INTRODUCTION  TO 
QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

After  presenting  the  origin,  basic  concepts, 
and  formulation  of  quantum  mechanics  with 
emphasis  on  its  physical  meaning,  the  free 
particle,  simple  harmonic  oscillator,  and 
central-force  problems  will  be  investigated. 
Both  time-independent  and  time-dependent 
perturbation  theory  will  be  covered.  The  eleg- 
ant operator  formalism  of  quantum  mechanics 
will  conclude  the  course.  Four  hours  of  lec- 
ture and  recitation.  Prerequisites:  Mathema- 
tics 21 .  either  Chemistry  31  or  Physics  26. 
and  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as 
Physics  48. 

40  ADVANCED  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 
Selected  topics,  which  may  include  mechan- 
isms of  organic  reactions,  synthesis,  detailed 
structure  and  chemistry  of  natural  products, 
polynuclear  hydrocarbons,  and  aromatic 
heterocyclics.  Three  hours  lecture.  Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry  21 . 

41  QUALITATIVE  ORGANIC  ANALYSIS 
Theory  and  application  of  the  systematic 
identification  of  pure  organic  compounds  and 
mixtures.  Two  hours  lecture  and  nvo  three- 
hour  laboratory  periods  each  week.  Prere- 
quisite: Chemistry  21 . 

43  ADVANCED 
ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  advanced  analytical  methods  with 
emphasis  on  chromatographic,  electrochemi- 
cal, and  spectroscopic  methods  of  instrumen- 
tal analysis.  Three  hours  lecture  and  one 
four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry  31  and  32  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

44  BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of  car- 
bohydrates, lipids,  amino  acids,  proteins,  and 
nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and 
biochemical  control  mechanisms,  including 
allosteric  control,  induction,  repression  as 
well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibitive  control 
mechanisms.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21  or 
IS  or  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as 
Biology  44. 

45  SPECTROSCOPY  AND 
MOLECULAR  STRUCTURE 

Theory  and  practice  of  molecular  structure 
determination  by  spectroscopic  methods. 
Three  hours  lecture.  Pre-  or  co-requisites: 
Chemistry  31 .  33.  or  consent  of  instructor. 

48     CHEMISTRY  COLLOQUIUM 

A  seminar  in  which  faculty,  students,  and 
invited  professional  chemists  discuss  their 
own  reseach  activities  or  those  of  others  which 
have  appeared  in  recent  chemical  literature. 
Prerequisite:  Three  semesters  of  non-credit 


31 


Chemistry  Colloquium  taken  during  the  junior 
and  senior  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  under  super- 
vision in  an  industrial  labortory  and  submit  a 
wntlen  report  on  his  project. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laborato- 
ry research  project  and  will  write  a  thesis  on 
his  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laborato- 
ry research  project  with  emphasis  being  on  the 
student's  showing  initiative  and  making  a 
scholarly  contribution.  A  thesis  will  be  writ- 
ten. 


CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

Assistant  Professor:  Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This  major  is  designed  to  acquaint 
students  with  the  American  criminal  jus- 
tice system  and  to  provide  an  under- 
standing of  the  social,  psychological, 
philosophical,  and  political  contexts 
within  which  the  system  of  criminal  jus- 
tice functions.  Its  aim  is  to  develop  stu- 
dents" intellectual  and  scientific  skills  in 
raising  and  attempting  to  answer  impor- 
tant questions  about  the  system  of  justice 
and  its  place  in  society.  The  program 
offers  opportunity  for  intern  experience 
in  the  field,  and  prepares  for  careers  in 
the  areas  of  law  enforcement,  probation 
and  parole,  prisons,  and  treatment  ser- 
vices. 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I 
prepares  for  careers  in  law  enforcement. 
Track  II  prepares  for  careers  in  correc- 
tions. 

Track  I  —  Law  Enforcement. 

The  major  consists  of  10  courses,  dis- 
tributed as  follows: 

A.   Professional  courses  in  criminal 
justice  (three  courses) 
Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice 
System  (Sociology  and  Anthropolo- 
gy 15) 


Introduction  to  Law  Enforcement 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  23) 
The  American  Prison  System 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological, 
philosophical,  and  political  context 
of  the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 
Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthro- 
pology 30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropolo- 
gy 21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural 
Minorities  (Sociology  and  Anthro- 
pology 34)  (two  courses) 
Anthropology  34  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology 
(Psychology  16)  (one  course) 
America  as  a  Civilization  (American 
Studies  10),  Afro- American  History 
(History  28)  or  United  States  Social 
and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 
(History  43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political  Science 
35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties 
(Political  Science  31)  (two  courses) 
Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Jus- 
tice (Philosophy  18)  (one  course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  law  enfor- 
cement. (Recommended  but  not 
required  for  the  major) 

Track  II  —  Corrections. 

The  major  consists  of  10  courses,  dis- 
tributed as  follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal 
justice  (three  courses) 
Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice 
System  (Sociology  and  Anthropolo- 
gy 15) 

The  American  Prison  System 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 
Introduction  to  Human  Services 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  22) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological, 
philosophical,  and  political  context 
of  the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 
Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthro- 
pology 30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropolo- 
gy 21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural 
Minorities  (Sociology  and  Anthro- 
pology 34)  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychology 
16)  (one  course) 

America  as  a  Civilization  (American 
Studies  10),  Afro-American  History 


(History  28)  or  United  States  Social 
and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 
(History  43)  (one  course) 
Law  and  Society  (Political  Science 
35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties 
(Political  Science  31)  (two  courses) 
Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Jus- 
tice (Philosophy  18)  (One  course) 
C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  correc- 
tions. (Recommended  but  not 
required  for  the  major).  Prerequis- 
ites: Mathematics  13,  Psychology 
31 ,  and  Psychology  39.  These  prere- 
quisites may  be  waived  in  certain 
cases  by  the  coordinating  committee. 

Majors  should  seek  advice  concerning 
course  selection  from  members  of  the 
coordinating  committee  and  should  note 
course  prerequisites  in  planning  their 
programs. 

ECONOMICS 


Professors:  Opdahl  (Chairperson), 
Rabold 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  is 
designed  for  the  student  whose  primary 
interest  lies  in  business  management; 
Track  II  is  designed  for  students  with  an 
interest  in  graduate  work,  teaching,  gov- 
ernment or  non-business  careers,  and  for 
those  with  less  well-defined  interests. 

Track  I  —  Managerial  Economics 

requires:  Economics  10,  1 1,  32,  and  41; 
Business  10-1 1  or  Accounting  10  and  20; 
Business  38  and  39,  plus  two  electives 
from  Economics  20,  3 1 ,  35,  37,  43,  and 
Business  40.  Business  33  (Investments) 
may  be  substituted  for  Business  39 
(Financial  Management  II). 

Track   II  —  Political   Economy 

requires:  Economics  10,  11,  30.  31,40, 
and  five  electives  of  which  three  must  be 
in  economics  and  two  in  political  sci- 
ence, all  selected  with  the  advice  and 
consent  of  the  student's  adviser  or 
department  chairperson.  Economics  41 
(Managerial  Economics)  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  Economics  30  (Intermediate 
Microeconomics). 


32 


In  addition,  the  following  courses  are 
recommended:  all  majors  —  Math  13 
and  Business  23;  majors  planning  gra- 
dute  work  —  Math  12-18:  Track  II 
majors  —  Business  10-1 1. 

A  minor  in  Economics  requires  the 
completion  of  Economics  10  and  1 1  and 
three  other  economics  courses  numbered 
20  or  above,  selected  by  the  student  with 
prior  approval  of  the  department  chair- 
person. 

2      CONSUMER  ECONOMICS 

A  course  in  "family"  or  "practical"  eco- 
nomics, designed  to  teach  students  how  they 
and  their  families  can  be  intelligent  consum- 
ers: that  is,  how  they  can  spend,  save,  and 
borrow  so  as  to  maximize  the  value  they 
receive  for  the  income  they  have.  Treats  sub- 
jects such  as  intelligent  shopping;  the  uses  and 
abuses  of  credit;  investing  savings;  buying 
insurance,  automobiles,  and  houses;  medical 
care  costs;  estates  and  wills,  etc.  Alternate 
years. 

10  PRINCIPLES  OF 
POLITICAL  ECONOMY  I 
Macroeconomics.  Deals  with  problems  of  the 
economic  system  as  a  whole.  What  influences 
the  level  of  national  income  and  employment? 
What  is  inflation  and  why  do  we  have  it?  What 
is  the  role  of  government  in  a  modem  capita- 
listic system?  How  does  business  organize  to 
produce  the  goods  and  services  we  demand? 
How  are  the  American  financial  and  banking 
systems  organized?  What  is  the  nature  of 
American  unionism?  What  are  the  elements  of 
government  finance  and  fiscal  policy? 

1 1  PRINCIPLES  OF 
POLITICAL  ECONOMY  II 

This  course  focuses  upon  microeconomics 
and  selected  current  economic  problems.  It 
deals  with  the  relatively  small  units  of  the 
economy  such  as  the  firm  and  the  family. 
Analyzes  demand  and  supply.  Discusses  how 
business  firms  decide  what  and  how  much  to 
produce  and  how  goods  and  services  are 
priced  in  different  types  of  markets.  Also 
considers  such  problems  as  economic  growth, 
international  trade,  poverty,  discrimination, 
ecology,  and  alternative  economic  systems. 

20     MONEY  AND  BANKING 

Covers  business  fluctuations  and  monetary 
and  fiscal  policy;  the  financial  organization  of 
society;  the  banking  system;  credit  institu- 
tions; capital  markets,  and  international  finan- 
cial relations.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10 and 
11. 

22     ECONOMIC  SYSTEMS  OF  THE  WEST 
(CAPITALISM  AND  SOCIALISM) 
A  comparative  analysis  of  the  underlying 


ideologies,  the  basic  institutions,  and  the  per- 
formance of  selected  economic  systems  extant 
in  the  West.  Alternate  years. 

23  SOVIET-TYPE  ECONOMICS 

An  analysis  of  the  ideologies,  institutions,  and 
performance  of  Soviet-type  economics,  with 
emphasis  upon  Marxian  theory  and  the  eco- 
nomy of  the  U .  S  S .  R. ;  comparison  of  selected 
Eastern  European  and  Chinese  approaches  to 
communism.  Alternate  years. 

24  URBAN  PROBLEMS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  to  the 
study  of  significant  social,  political,  and  eco- 
nomic problems  associated  with  urbanization, 
including  poverty,  employment,  education, 
crime,  health,  housing,  land  use  and  the  envi- 
ronment, transportation,  and  public  finance. 
Analysis  of  solutions  offered.  ;4/rfrna/ev<'ari. 

25  ENVIRONMENTAL  ECONOMICS 

A  study  of  the  relationship  between  environ- 
mental decay  and  economic  growth,  with  par- 
ticular reference  to  failures  of  the  price  and 
property-rights  systems;  application  of  cost/ 
benefit  analysis,  measures  aimed  at  the  crea- 
tion of  an  ecologically  viable  economy.  Alter- 
nate years. 

30  INTERMEDIATE  MICROECONOMICS 
An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory 
regarding  consumer  demand,  production  costs 
and  theory,  profit  maximization,  market 
structures,  and  the  determinants  of  returns  to 
the  factors  of  production.  Prerequisites:  Eco- 
nomics 10  and  II.  Alternate  years. 

31  INTERMEDIATE  MACROECONOMICS 
An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory 
and  practice  with  regard  to  business  fluctua- 
tions, national  income  accounting,  the  deter- 
mination of  income  and  employment  levels, 
and  the  use  of  monetary  and  fiscal  policy. 
Prerequisites:  Economics  10  and  II.  Alter- 
nate years. 

32  GOVERNMENT  AND  THE  ECONOMY 
An  analytical  survey  of  government's  efforts 
to  maintain  competition  through  antitrust 
legislation;  to  supervise  acceptable  cases  of 
private  monopoly  through  public  utility  reg- 
ulation and  via  means  of  regulatory  commis- 
sions, and  to  encourage  or  restrain  various 
types  of  private  economic  activities.  Prere- 
quisites: Economics  10  and  1 1  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

35     LABOR  PROBLEMS 

The  history  of  organized  labor  in  the  United 
States,  including  the  structure  of  unions, 
employers'  opposition  to  unions,  the  role  of 
government  in  labor-management  relations, 
the  economic  impact  of  unions.  Alternate 
\ears. 


37     PUBLIC  FINANCE 

An  analysis  of  the  fiscal  economics  of  the 
public  sector,  including  the  development, 
concepts,  and  theories  of  public  expenditures, 
taxation,  and  debt  at  all  levels  of  American 
government.  Includes  also  the  use  of  fiscal 
policy  as  an  economic  control  device.  Prere- 
quisites: Economics  10  and  II  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40  HISTORY  OF  ECONOMIC  THOUGHT 

A  discussion  of  the  origins,  development,  and 
significance  of  the  economic  ideas  embodied 
in  the  works  of  Smith,  Marx,  Schumpeter. 
Keynes,  and  others.  Prerequisites:  Econom- 
ics 10  and  1 1  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

41  MANAGERIAL  ECONOMICS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  and 
methodology  to  the  solution  of  business  prob- 
lems. Subjects  include:  optimizing  tech- 
niques, risk  analysis,  demand  theory,  produc- 
tion theory,  cost  theory,  linear  programming, 
capital  budgeting,  market  structures,  and  the 
theory  of  pricing.  Prerequisites:  Economics 
10  and  II. 

43     INTERNATIONAL  TRADE 

A  study  of  the  principles,  theories,  develop- 
ment, and  policies  concerning  international 
economic  relations,  with  particular  reference 
to  the  United  States.  Subjects  covered  include: 
U.S.  commercial  policy  and  its  development, 
international  trade  theory,  tariffs  and  other 
protectionist  devices,  international  monetary 
system  and  its  problems,  balance  of  payments 
issues.  Alternate  years.  Prerequisites:  Eco- 
nomics 10  and  II. 

45     DEVELOPMENT  OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED  NATIONS 
A  study  of  the  theories  and  problems  of  capital 
accumulation,  allocation  of  resources,  tech- 
nological development,  growth,  planning 
techniques,  and  institutions  and  international 
relations  encountered  by  the  developing 
nations.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Typically  off  campus  in  business,  banking,  or 
government,  supervised  by  assigned  employ- 
ee of  sponsoring  organization. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Superior  students  may  select  independent 
study  in  various  courses,  particularly  in  prepa- 
ration for  graduate  school. 

90-99    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


33 


EDUCATION 


Associate  Professor:  Keesbury 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professor:  Conrad 
Instructor:  Cherrington 

Lycoming  believes  that  the  liberal  arts 
provide  the  best  preparation  for  future 
teachers,  thus  all  education  students 
complete  a  liberal-arts  major  in  addition 
to  the  certification  requirements.  Stu- 
dents can  be  certified  in  elementary  edu- 
cation or  one  or  more  of  the  following 
secondary  areas:  biology,  chemistry. 
English,  French,  general  science  (with 
biology  or  astronomy/physics  tracks), 
German,  mathematics,  physics,  social 
studies,  and  Spanish.  All  teacher- 
education  programs  are  approved  by  the 
Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education, 
and  Pennsylvania  certificates  are  recog- 
nized in  most  other  states  whether 
through  reciprocal  agreements  or  by 
transcript  evaluation. 

Education  20  and  Psychology  38  are 
prerequisites  to  all  other  offerings  in  the 
Department  of  Education.  Education  20 
should  be  taken  at  least  two  semesters 
before  the  professional  semester. 

Students  seeking  elementary  certifi- 
cation must  complete  Mathematics  7, 
Education  40,  41,  42,  and  43  as  prere- 
quisites to  the  professional  semester 
(Education  45,  47,  and  48). 

Students  interested  in  the  teacher- 
education  program  should  consult  with  a 
member  of  the  department  no  later  than 
the  first  semester  of  the  sophomore  year. 
Application  for  the  professional  semester 
must  be  made  during  the  Fall  Semester  of 
the  junior  year.  The  Department  of  Edu- 
cation will  admit  to  the  professional 
semester  those  applicants  who  are  in 
good  academic  standing,  have  satisfac- 
torily completed  the  participation 
requirements,  have  paid  the  student 
teaching  fee,  and  have  received  a  posi- 
tive recommendation  based  upon:  (a) 
letters  from  each  student's  major  depart- 
ment, two  additional  faculty  outside  the 
Department  of  Education;  ( b)  a  screening 
interview  conducted  by  the  Education 
Department,  and  (c)  a  writing  sample 


from  each  student  applicant.  Major 
departments  have  different  criteria  for 
their  recommendations.  Therefore,  stu- 
dents should  consult  with  the  chairperson 
of  their  major  department  about  those 
requirements  as  soon  as  they  begin  to 
study  for  certification. 

5       DEVELOPMENTAL  SEMINAR 

The  course  focuses  on  developing  reading  and 
study  skills  which  are  useful  in  college.  Read- 
ing comprehension,  vocabulary  building,  and 
critical  reading  are  especially  emphasized. 
Study  skills,  includmg  time  management, 
textbook  reading,  reading-study  systems, 
notetakmg.  test-taking  skills,  and  library 
reference  skills  are  also  stressed.  Open  only  to 
freshmen  who  are  enrolled  in  Engish  5  or  with 
consent  of  instructor.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

20    INTRODUCTION  TO 

THE  STUDY  OF  EDUCATION 

A  study  of  teaching  as  a  profession  with 
emphasis  on  the  economic,  social,  political, 
and  religious  conditions  which  influence 
Amencan  schools  and  teachers.  Considera- 
tion is  given  to  the  school  environment,  the 
curriculum,  and  the  children  with  the  intention 
that  students  will  examine  more  rationally 
their  own  motives  for  entering  the  profession. 

32  INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDIA 
AND  COMMUNICATIONS 
A  study  of  the  value,  design,  construction, 
and  application  of  the  visual  and  auditory  aids 
to  learning.  Practical  experience  in  the  hand- 
ling of  audio-visual  equipment  and  materials 
is  provided.  Application  of  audio-visual  tech- 
niques. Application  of  the  visual  and  auditory 
aids  to  learning.  Students  will  plan  and  carry 
out  actual  teaching  assignments  utilizing  vari- 
ous A-V  devices. 

39  PUBLIC  SCHOOL  CURRICULUM 

An  examination  of  the  vanous  curricula  of  the 
public  schools  and  their  relationships  to  cur- 
rent practices.  Special  attention  will  be  given 
to  the  meaning  and  nature  of  the  curriculum, 
the  desirable  outcomes  of  the  curriculum, 
conflicting  and  variant  conceptions  of  cum- 
cular  content,  modem  techniques  of  cumcular 
construction,  criteria  for  the  evaluation  of 
curricula,  the  curriculum  as  a  teaching  instru- 
ment. Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  the  curri- 
culum work  within  the  teaching  Tield  of  each 
individual. 

40  TEACHING  LANGUAGE  ARTS 
AND  CHILDREN'S  LITERATURE  IN 
THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  course  designed  to  consider  the  pnncipal 
means  of  communication,  oral  and  written, 
including  both  practical  and  creative  uses. 
Attention  will  be  given  to  listening,  speaking. 


written  expression,  linguistics  and  grammar, 
spelling,  and  handwriting.  Stress  will  be 
placed  upon  the  interrelatedness  of  the  lan- 
guage arts.  Children's  literature  will  be 
explored  as  a  vehicle  for  developing  creative 
characteristics  in  children  and  for  ensuring  an 
appreciation  of  the  creative  writing  of  others. 
Observation  and  participation  in  Greater  Wil- 
liamsport  elementary  schools.  Prerequisites: 
Education  20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

41  TEACHING  THE  SOCIAL  STUDIES 
IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
Studies  and  experiences  to  develop  a  basic 
understanding  of  the  structure,  concepts,  and 
processes  of  anthropology,  economics,  geo- 
graphy, history,  political  science,  and  sociol- 
ogy as  they  relate  to  the  elementary  school 
social-science  curriculum.  Practical  applica- 
tions, demonstrations  of  methods,  and  the 
development  of  integrated  teaching  units 
using  tests,  reference  books,  films,  and  other 
teaching  materials.  Observation  and  partici- 
pation in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary 
schools.  Prerequisites:  Education  20  and 
Psychology  38  or  consent  of  instructor. 

42  TEACHING  SCIENCE  IN 
THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Science  methods  and  materials  interpreting 
children's  sciencetxperiences  and  guiding  the 
development  of  their  scientific  concepts.  A 
study  of  the  science  content  of  the  curriculum, 
its  material,  and  use.  Observation  and  partici- 
pation in  Greater  Williamsport  elementary 
schools.  Prerequisites:  Education  20  and 
Psychology  38  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  TEACHING  READING  IN 
THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  basic  course  in  the  philosophy  and  rationale 
for  the  implementation  of  an  elementary 
developmental-reading  program  from  kinder- 
garten through  sixth  grade.  Emphasis  is  upon 
designing  a  reading  instructional  program 
which  reflects  the  nature  of  the  learning  pro- 
cess and  recognizes  principles  of  child  deve- 
lopment through  examination  of  the  princi- 
ples, problems,  methods,  and  materials  used 
in  elementary  reading  programs.  Observation 
and  participation  in  Greater  Williamsport 
elementary  schools.  Prerequisites:  Psycholo- 
gy 38.  Education  20.  or  consent  of  instructor . 

45     METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
The  course  emphasizes  the  relationship 
between  the  theoretical  studies  of  physical, 
social,  and  cognitive  development  and  the 
elementary  classroom  environment.  Particu- 
lar consideration  will  be  given  to  the  appropri- 
ate age  and  developmental  level  of  the  stu- 
dents with  an  emphasis  upon  selection  and 
utilization  of  methods  in  all  the  elementary 


34 


subject  areas,  including  art  and  music.  Spe- 
cific attention  will  be  given  to  the  develop- 
ment of  strategies  for  structuring  lesson  plans, 
for  maintaining  classroom  control,  and  for 
overall  classroom  management.  Direct  appli- 
cation will  be  made  to  the  individual  student- 
teaching  experience.  Prerequisites:  Math  7. 
Education  40.  41,  42.  and  43.  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

46  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE 
SECONDARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

A  study  of  materials,  methods,  and  techniques 
with  emphasis  on  the  student's  major.  Stress  is 
placed  on  the  selection  and  utilization  of  vis- 
ual and  auditory  aids  to  learning .  Students  will 
teach  demonstration  lessons  in  the  presence  of 
the  instructor  and  the  members  of  the  class  and 
will  observe  supenor  teachers  in  Greater  Wil- 
liamsport  secondary  schools.  Prerequisites: 
Education  20.  Psychology  JS.  and  the  partici- 
pation experience. 

47  PROBLEMS  IN  CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN  EDUCATION  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 
Seminar  in  the  issues,  problems,  and  chal- 
lenges encountered  by  teachers  in  the  Ameri- 
can public  schools,  especially  those  related  to 
the  student-teaching  experience. 

48  STUDENT  TEACHING  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  units.  Exceeds  state-mandated  minimum 
requirements.  Professional  laboratory  experi- 
ence under  the  supervision  of  a  selected 
cooperating  teacher  in  a  public  elementary 
school  in  Greater  Williamsport.  Organizes 
learning  experiences.  Actual  classroom 
experience.* 

49  STUDENT  TEACHING  IN  THE 
SECONDARY  SCHOOL  (PART  OF 
THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  units.  Exceeds  slate-mandated  minimum 
requirements.  Professional  laboratory  experi- 
ence under  the  supervision  of  a  selected 
cooperating  teacher  in  a  public  secondary 
school  in  Greater  Williamsport.  Organized 
learning  experience.  Emphasis  on  actual 
classroom  experience,  responsibility  in  the 
guidance  program,  and  out-of-class  activi- 
ties.* 

*Sludent  teachers  are  required  to  follow  the  calen- 
dar of  the  school  district  to  which  they  are  assigned , 


ENGLISH 


Professor:  Van  Marter 
Associate  Professors:  Jensen 

(Chairperson),  Rife 
Assistant  Professors:  Gold, 

Moses,  Wild 
Visiting  Instructor:  Hartsock 

A  major  consists  of  nine  courses  not 
including  English  3,  5  or  6.  These  nine 
courses  must  include  English  1 7 ,  20,  2 1 , 
22,  23.  and  one  from  English  35  and  36. 

The  remaining  electives  may  include 
any  course  from  English  12  and  above 
not  already  taken  to  satisfy  the  preceding 
requirements.  With  the  consent  of  the 
Department  of  English,  an  appropriate 
course  from  the  offerings  of  other  depart- 
ments may  be  substituted  for  an  English 
elective. 

Majors  seeking  secondary  certifica- 
tion in  English  are  required  to  take  Eng- 
lish 35  and  English  38. 

The  Department  of  English  partici- 
pates with  seven  others  in  the  American 
Studies  interdisciplinary  major,  in  which 
American  literature  courses  constitute  an 
important  part  of  the  American-arts  con- 
centration area. 

Because  of  its  emphasis  on  communi- 
cation skills,  a  major  or  a  minor  in  Eng- 
lish is  excellent  preparation  for  a  wide 
range  of  professions.  In  addition  to  pre- 
paring students  for  graduate  work  or  for 
teaching,  a  major  or  a  minor  in  English 
can  be  valuable  for  those  interested  in  a 
career  in  law,  ministry,  publishing,  edit- 
ing or  writing,  and  business,  to  name  a 
few. 

Two  minors  are  available  in  the 
Department  of  English.  A  minor  in 
English  Literature  consists  of  five  litera- 
ture courses  numbered  12  and  above, 
three  of  which  must  be  numbered  20  or 
above,  and  at  least  one  of  which  must  be 
numbered  30  or  above.  With  the  prior 
written  consent  of  the  department,  one 
writing  course  may  be  substituted  for  a 
literature  course.  A  minor  in  Writing 
consists  of  English  16  or  17;  18  and  38; 
28  or  37;  and  a  senior  practicum  in  an 
extended  writing  project.  At  least  three 
of  these  courses  must  be  numbered  20  or 


above.  With  prior  written  consent  of  the 
department,  one  literature  course  may  be 
substituted  for  a  writing  course  with  the 
following  restriction:  16  or  17  and  a 
senior  practicum  are  required  for  the 
writing  minor. 

3       BASIC  WRITING  AND 

COMMUNICATION  SKILLS 
Intensive  practice  in  using  basic  grammar  and 
spelling  conventions  and  in  writing  sentences, 
paragraphs,  and  essays;  major  emphasis  on 
the  development  and  organization  of  con- 
cepts. This  course  does  not  substitute  for 
English  5  or  6  and  may  not  be  taken  to  satisfy 
the  English  distnbution  requirement. 

5  WORKSHOP  IN 
DEVELOPMENTAL  WRITING 
Classroom  and  laboratory  instruction  in  or- 
ganizing and  writing  the  detailed  paragraph 
and  illustrative  expository  theme,  with  major 
emphasis  on  spelling,  grammar,  and  sentence 
structure.  Writing  assignments  and  classroom 
exercises  designed  to  ensure  mastery  of  the 
student's  special  problems  in  basic  writing 

One-half  unit  grade  of  "S  "  will  be  assigned 
when  the  student  has  successfully  completed 
all  of  the  work  in  the  course.  Required  of,  and 
limited  to.  those  who  have  not  been  exempted 
from  English  5. 

6  COMPOSITION 

Extensive  practice  in  analytical  writing.  Spe- 
cial emphasis  on  developing  the  composing 
skills  needed  to  articulate  and  defend  a  posi- 
tion in  various  situations  requiring  the  use  of 
written  English. 

12     INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERATURE 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  literature 
designed  for  the  general  student  and  utilizing 
one  of  the  following  approaches:  major  liter- 
ary genres,  selected  literary  masterpieces,  or 
traditional  themes  in  literature. 

16  WRITING  FOR  SPECIAL  AUDIENCES 
Intensive  practice  in  writing  and  presenting 
information  to  various  audiences  within  the 
student's  own  discipline.  Includes  training  in 
the  use  of  graphics  and  in  basic  library 
research  methods.  Prerequisites:  a  grade  ofC 
or  belter  in  English  6  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

17  CRITICAL  WRITING 

Designed  to  provide  intermediate  students  of 
literature  with  the  critical  skills  necessary  for 
an  understanding  of  poetry,  fiction,  drama, 
and  film.  Intensive  reading  and  extensive 
practice  in  writing  the  critical  essay.  Required 
of  English  majors. 


35 


18     NEWSWRITING  FOR 
THE  PRINT  MEDIA 

Analysis  of  and  practice  in  the  basic  forms  of 
newswriting:  the  elements  of  news,  lead, 
style,  and  structure.  Frequent  workshop  ses- 
sions for  detailed  critiques  and  discussion  of 
student  writing.  Alternate  years. 

20  BRITISH  LITERATURE  I 

Literary  forms,  themes,  and  authors  from  the 
Anglo-Saxon  through  the  Neo-Classical  per- 
iods. Such  writers  as  Chaucer.  Spenser. 
Shakespeare.  Milton.  Swift.  Pope,  and  John- 
son; representative  works  from  Beowulf  to 
Sterne's  Sentimenlal  Journey. 

21  BRITISH  LITERATURE  II 

Literary  movements  and  authors  from  the 
Romantic  Period  to  the  present.  Particular 
empha.sis  on  such  writers  as  Blake.  Words- 
worth. Shelley.  Keats.  Tennyson.  Browning. 
Arnold.  Hardy.  Yeats,  Eliot 

22  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  I 

Brief  survey  of  American  literature  and 
thought  before  1 800.  followed  by  more  inten- 
sive study  of  the  literature  and  thought  of  the 
period  1800-1900.  Major  focus  on  the  works 
of  Emerson.  Thoreau.  Poe.  Hawthorne.  Mel- 
ville. Whitman,  Dickinson,  and  Howells. 

23  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  II 

Major  writers,  movements,  and  tendencies  in 
American  literature  during  the  present  cen- 
tury. Such  forces  as  naturalism,  realism,  and 
modernism:  such  writers  as  James,  Dreiser, 
Hemingway,  Faulkner,  Frost,  Eliot,  and  Ste- 
vens. 

24  THE  SHORT  STORY 

Historical  and  critical  study  of  the  short  story. 
Consideration  of  representative  examples  of 
the  form  with  emphasis  on  American  and 
European  writers  of  the  19th  and  20th  centu- 
ries. 

25  THE  NOVEL 

Historical  study  of  the  development  of  the 
novel  from  the  18th  through  the  20th  centu- 
ries. Novels  analyzed  both  as  works  of  prose 
an  and  as  turning  points  in  the  development  of 
the  novel.  Alternate  years. 

26  LITERATURE  AND  FILM 

The  relationship  between  the  conventions  of 
literature  and  lilm  with  emphasis  on  examina- 
tion of  representative  literary  and  film  works. 
Media  comparison  to  reveal  the  problems  of 
adaptation. 

28     CREATIVE  WRITING  WORKSHOP: 
FICTION  AND  POETRY 
A  beginning  course  in  the  theory  and  practice 
of  writing  fiction  and  poetry.  Students  may 


concentrate  in  either  genre  or  both.  Alternate 
years. 

30  ROMANTIC  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  the  major  poetry  and  fiction,  plus 
some  non-fiction  prose,  written  during  the 
years.  1789-1832.  Emphasis  on  the  work  of  at 
least  three  poets,  two  novelists,  and  assorted 
prose  writers.  Alternate  years. 

31  MODERN  FICTION 

Study  of  the  novels  and  short  fiction  of  such 
major  British  and  American  figures  as  Con- 
rad. Forster.  Woolf.  Lawrence.  Joyce. 
Hemingway,  Faulkner.  Nabokov,  and  Bel- 
low. 

32  MODERN  POETRY 

A  study  of  the  poetry  written  in  this  century, 
beginning  with  Yeats  and  Eliot  and  continuing 
through  such  writers  as  Frost.  Williams. 
Moore.  Stevens,  Auden,  Lowell,  Roethke, 
Thomas,  Ginsberg,  and  Rich.  Alternate 
years. 

33  COMEDY,  TRAGEDY,  AND 
THE  MODERN  THEATRE 
Introduction  to  the  theories  of  comedy  and 
tragedy  as  those  theories  help  us  to  deepen  our 
response  to  the  theatre.  Major  focus  on  plays, 
including  musicals,  from  Ibsen  and  Shaw  to 
the  present.  Alternate  years. 

34  WOMEN  AND  LITERATURE 

Through  an  examination  —  literary,  social, 
and  historical  —  of  selected  British  and 
American  literature  by  women,  this  course 
will  seek  to  identify  those  elements  which 
distinguish  women's  particular  contribution  to 
the  literary  canon.  Alternate  years. 

35  CHAUCER 

A  study  of  the  major  works  with  emphasis  on 
The  Canterbury  Tales  and  Troilus  and  Crisey- 
de.  Some  attention  to  the  traditions  out  of 
which  these  works  arose.  Required  of  majors 
seeking  secondary  certification  in  English. 
Alternate  years. 

36  SHAKESPEARE 

A  study  of  representative  plays:  comedies, 
tragedies,  histories,  romances.  Attention 
given  to  Shakespeare's  life  and  times.  Alter- 
nate years. 

37  PUBLIC  RELATIONS  AND 
PUBLICITY  WRITING 
Communication  and  publicity  techniques  in 
the  field  of  public  relations  focused  on  writing 
for  the  media.  The  news  and  feature  release, 
newsletter,  and  house  organ.  Prerequisite: 
English  IS  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 


38  LINGUISTICS  AND  THE  ANALYSIS 
OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 
Introduction  to  methods  of  analyzing  spoken 
and  written  English.  Classroom  work  sup- 
ported by  weekly  tutorials,  in  which  the  stu- 
dent gains  practical  experience  in  identifying 
diagnosing,  and  correcting  basic  communica- 
tions problems.  Required  of  majors  seeking 
secondary  certification  in  English.  Alternate 
years. 

40  SELECTED  WRITERS 

An  intensive  study  of  no  more  than  three 
writers,  selected  on  the  basis  of  student  and 
faculty  interest.  Possible  combinations 
include;  Frost,  Hemingway,  and  Faulkner; 
O'Connor,  Welty,  and  Porter;  Spenser  and 
Milton;  Hawthorne,  Melville,  and  Dickens; 
Woolf,  Forster,  and  Lawrence:  Joyce  and 
Yeats.  May  be  repealed  for  credit  if  the  wri- 
ters are  different.  Alternate  years. 

41  TOPICS  IN  LITERATURE 
Examination  of  a  literary  theme,  idea,  or 
movement  as  it  appears  in  one  or  more  types  of 
literature  and  as  it  cuts  across  various  epochs. 
Possible  topics  include:  American  Novelists 
and  Poets  of  the  Jazz  Age  and  Depression; 
Religion  and  Literature;  Gothic  Tradition  in 
American  Literature;  Realism  in  the  Novel; 
Literary  Modernism;  Literature  and  Mytholo- 
gy; The  Hero  in  Literature.  May  be  repeated 
for  credit  if  the  topic  is  different.  Alternate 


70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  typically  work  off  campus  in  a  profes- 
sion related  to  their  career  interest  such  as  law. 
public  relations,  journalism,  and  others. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Recent  studies  include  The  Arthurian  Legend. 
Shakespeare's  Women,  D.H.  Lawrence,  and 
T.S.  Eliot:  The  Social  Vision. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
Recent  projects  include  The  Creative  Process 
in  Literature  and  Art  and  Images  of  Women  in 
the  I890's. 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 
AND  LITERATURES 

Associate  Professors:  Flam,  Maples, 

MacKenzie  (Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professor:  Barker,  Gilmore 

Study  of  foreign  languages  and  litera- 
tures offers  opportunity  to  explore 


36 


broadly  the  varieties  of  human  experi- 
ence and  thought.  It  contributes  both  to 
personal  and  to  international  under- 
standing by  providing  competence  in  a 
foreign  language  and  a  critical  acquain- 
tance with  the  literature  and  culture  of 
foreign  peoples.  A  major  can  serve  as 
entree  to  careers  in  business,  industry, 
government,  publishing,  education, 
journalism,  social  agencies,  translating, 
and  writing.  It  prepares  for  graduate 
work  in  literature  or  linguistics  and  the 
international  fields  of  politics,  com- 
merce, law,  health,  and  area  studies. 

French,  German,  and  Spanish  are 
offered  as  major  fields  of  study.  The 
major  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses 
numbered  10  or  above.  Majors  seeking 
teacher  certification  and  students  plan- 
ning to  enter  graduate  school  are  advised 
to  begin  study  of  a  second  foreign  lan- 
guage. The  department  encourages  the 
development  in  breadth  of  programs, 
including  allied  courses  from  related 
fields  or  a  second  major,  and  also  indivi- 
dual or  established  interdisciplinary 
majors  combining  interest  in  several  lit- 
eratures or  area  or  cross-cultural  studies; 
for  example.  International  Studies.  20th 
Century  Studies,  the  Major  in  Literature. 
Majors,  teacher  certification  candidates, 
and  all  students  are  encouraged  to  spend 
at  least  a  semester  of  study  abroad  by 
applying  to  one  of  the  many  programs 
available.  The  department  maintains  a 
file  of  such  programs. 

Courses  taught  in  English:  Foreign 
Languages  and  Literatures  25,  French  28 
(Section  A)  and  Spanish  32  (Section  A). 


Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

25     CONTINENTAL  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  such  major  continental  authors  as 
Cervantes,  Dostoevsky,  Chekhov,  Dante, 
Ibsen.  Proust.  Gide.  Kafka.  Hesse,  Goethe. 
Sartre.  Camus.  Brecht.  and  lonesco.  Works 
read  in  English  translation  will  vary  and  be 
organized  around  a  different  theme  or  topic; 
recent  topics  have  been  existentialism,  mod- 
ernism, drama,  the  Weimar  era.  and  20th 
century  Scandinavian  and  German  prose  wri- 
ters. Prerequisite:  None.  May  be  repealed  for 
credit  with  consent  of  instructor.  May  be 
accepted  toward  the  English  major  with  con- 
sent of  the  Department  of  English. 


38  FOREIGN  LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS  AND  PROCESS 
Study  of  basic  linguistic  concepts  as  a  tool  for 
language  learning  and  teaching.  Discussion 
and  application  of  languge  teaching  tech- 
niques, including  work  in  the  language  labo- 
ratory. Designed  for  future  teachers  of  one  or 
more  languages  and  normally  taken  in  the 
junior  year.  Students  should  arrange  through 
the  Department  of  Education  to  fulfill  in  the 
same  semester  the  requirements  of  a  partici- 
pation experience  in  area  schools.  Prerequis- 
ite: consent  of  instructor. 

French 

A  major  consists  of  a  minimum  of 
eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above, 
including  at  least  two  from  40,  42,  44, 
and  46.  In  addition,  all  majors  who  wish 
to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass 
courses  21-22,  and  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  38  (the  latter  course  with 
a  C  or  better). 

A  minor  in  French  consists  of  at  least 
four  courses  numbered  20  and  above. 
Courses  10  and  11  may  be  counted  to- 
ward the  minor,  but  then  the  minor  must 
consist  of  at  least  five  courses,  three  of 
which  must  be  numbered  20  and  above. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY  FRENCH 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  acquire  the  funda- 
mentals of  the  language  with  a  view  to  using 
them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  under- 
standing, and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE  FRENCH 

Review  and  development  of  the  fundamentals 
of  the  language  for  immediate  use  in  speaking , 
understanding,  and  reading  with  a  view  to 
building  confidence  in  self-expression.  Prere- 
quisite: French  2  or  equivalent. 

21-22     FRENCH  LANGUAGE  PRACTICE 

Further  training  in  speaking,  listening  com- 
prehension, reading,  and  writing.  Includes 
extensive  work  in  grammar.  Prerequisite: 
French  1 1  or  equivalent. 

28     MODERN  FRANCE 

A  course  designed  to  familiarize  students  with 
political  and  social  structures  and  cultural 
attitudes  in  contemporary  French  society. 
Materials  studied  may  include  such  docu- 
ments as  newspaper  articles,  interviews  and 
sociological  surveys,  and  readings  in  history, 
religion,  anthropology,  and  the  arts.  Some 
attention  to  the  changing  education  system 
and  the  family  and  to  events  and  ideas  which 
have  shaped  French  society.  May  include 
some  comparative  study  of  France  and  the 
United  States. 


English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward 
satisfying  the  foreign  language  distribution 
requirement.  Prerequisite:  none. 

French  Section:  Offers  readings,  papers, 
and  interviews  in  French  for  students  with 
sufficient  language  skill.  Can  be  applied  to- 
ward the  foreign  language  distribution 
requirement.  Prerequisite:  French  21  or  con- 
seru  of  instructor. 

40     FRENCH  LITERATURE  TO  1800 

Major  authors  and  movements  from  the 
Medieval.  Renaissance.  Classical  and 
Enlightenment  periods.  Includes  the  chanson 
de  geste.  Villon.  Montaigne,  Corneille. 
Racine,  Moliere,  Voltaire  and  Rousseau.  Pre- 
requisite: French  22  or  28  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

42  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF 
THE  I9TH  CENTURY 
The  dimensions  of  the  Romantic  sensibility: 
Musset.  Hugo,  Vigny,  Balzac,  Stendhal 
Realism  and  Naturalism  in  the  novels  of 
Flaubert  and  Zola.  Reaction  in  the  poetry  of 
Baudelaire,  Rimbaud,  Verlaine.  and  Mallar- 
me.  Prerequisite:  French  22  or  28  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

44     MODERN  FRENCH  THEATRE 

Major  trends  in  French  drama  from  the  turn  of 
the  century  to  Existentialism  and  the  Theatre 
of  the  Absurd.  Giraudoux,  Anouilh,  Sartre, 
Camus,  Beckett  lonesco.  Genet,  Adamov. 
and  others.  Prerequisite:  French  22  or  28  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

46  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF 
THE  20TH  CENTURY 
Representative  poets  and  novelists  of  modem 
France.  Readings  selected  from  the  works  of 
authors  such  as  Proust.  Gide.  Aragon.  Giono, 
Mauriac.  Celine.  Malraux.  Saint-Exupery. 
Camus,  the  "new  novelists"  (Robbe-Gnllet. 
Butor.  Sarraute.  Le  Clezio).  and  the  poetry  of 
Apollinaire,  Valery.  the  Surrealists  (Breton. 
Reverdy.  Eluard.  Char),  Samt-John  Perse. 
Supervielle,  Prevert,  and  others.  Some  atten- 
tion to  works  of  French-speaking  African 
writers.  Prerequisite:  French  22  or  28  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

49  ADVANCED  LANGUAGE  PRACTICE 

Intensive  practice  for  advanced  students  who 
wish  to  improve  further  their  spoken  and  writ- 
ten French.  Includes  work  in  oral  comprehen- 
sion, phonetics,  pronunciation,  oral  and  wnt- 
ten  composition,  and  translation. 
Prerequisite:  one  course  from  French  40.  42. 
44.  46  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  mdex) 


37 


Examples  of  recent  studies  in  French  include 
translation,  existentialism,  the  classical  peri- 
od, enlightenment  literature,  and  Saint- 
Exupery. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

{See  index) 

German 

A  major  consists  of  a  minimum  of 
eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above. 
One  unit  of  Foreign  Languages  and  Lit- 
eratures 25  may  be  included  in  the  major 
with  permission.  German  40  or  German 
47  is  required  of  all  majors. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for 
teaching  must  pass  German  33  and  34.  In 
addition  to  the  eight  courses  for  the  major 
they  must  also  pass  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  38  with  a  grade  of  C  or 
better.  All  majors  are  urged  to  enroll  in 
History  41.  Music  36,  Political  Science 

20  and  Theatre  35. 

A  minor  in  German  consists  of  at  least 
four  courses  numbered  20  and  above. 
Courses  10  and  1 1  may  be  counted  to- 
ward the  minor,  but  then  the  minor  must 
consist  of  at  lest  five  courses,  three  of 
which  must  be  numbered  20  and  above. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY  GERMAN 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals 
of  the  language  with  a  view  to  using  them. 
Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding, 
and  reading 

1011     INTERMEDIATE  GERMAN 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of 
the  language  for  immediate  use  in  speaking, 
understanding,  and  reding  with  a  view  to 
huilding  confidence  in  self-expression.  Prere- 
quisite: German  2  or  equivalent. 

2 1  -22     COMPREHENSIVE  REVIEW  AND 

LANGUAGE  PRACTICE 
A  two-semester  course  designed  to  review  and 
develop  skills  in  speaking,  listening,  writing 
and  reading  Grammar  and  vocabulary  build- 
ing are  stressed  with  intensive  review,  writing 
practice  and  some  reading  on  contemporary 
issues  in  German-speaking  countries.  As  the 
course  progresses,  greater  emphasis  is  placed 
on  speaking,  listening  comprehension,  and 
translation.  Some  attention  is  given  to  the 
development  of  the  language  and  its  relation- 
ship to  English.  Prerequisite:  German  II  or 
equivalent. 

33     SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  I 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  impor- 


tant periods  of  German  literature,  representa- 
tive authors,  and  major  cultural  developments 
in  Germany.  Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The 
course  deals  with  literature  and  culture  from 
the  Early  Middle  Ages  through  the  1 8th  cen- 
tury. Prerequisite:  German  22  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

34  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE 
AND  CIVILIZATION  II 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  impor- 
tant periods  of  German  literature,  representa- 
tive authors,  and  major  cultural  developments 
in  Germany,  Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The 
course  deals  with  literature  and  culture  from 
the  19th  century  to  the  present.  Prerequisite: 
German  22  or  consent  of  instructor. 

40  GOETHE 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Goethe. 
Goethe's  significance  in  the  Classical  period 
and  later.  Readings  in  the  major  works.  Prere- 
quisite: German  33  or  34  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

41  CLASSICAL  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  development  of  das  klassische  Drama 
with  emphasis  on  works  of  Lessing,  Goethe, 
Kleist,  and  Schiller.  Prerequisite:  German  33 
or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43     THE  NOVELLE 

The  German  Novelle  as  a  genre  relating  to 
various  literary  periods.  Prerequisite:  Ger- 
man 33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

45     GERMAN  POETRY 

A  study  of  selected  poets  or  the  poetry  of 
various  literary  periods.  Possible  topics 
include:  Romantic  poetry,  Heine,  Rilke,  and 
Benn  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

47     CONTEMPORARY  GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative  poets,  novelists  and  dramatists 
of  contemporary  Germany,  Switzerland  and 
Austria  covering  the  period  from  1945  to  the 
present.  Readings  selected  from  writers  such 
as:  Borchert,  Boll,  Brechi,  Benn,  Frisch,  Diir- 
renmatt,  Bichsel.  Handke,  Walser,  Grass  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Examples  of  recent  studies  in  German  include 
Classicism,  Germanic  Mythology,  Hermann 
Hesse,  the  dramas  of  Frisch,  and  Diirrenmatt. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


Greek 

Greek  is  not  offered  as  a  major.  An 
interdisciplinary  minor  in  Biblical  Lan- 
guages requires  the  completion  of  Greek 
21,  22  and  Hebrew  21  and  22. 

1-2     NEW  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR 
AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  New  Testament  Greek  gram- 
mar and  readings  of  selected  passages  of  the 
Greek  text.  Alternate  years. 

21  READINGS  IN  THE 
SYNOPTIC  GOSPELS 

A  comparative  study  of  the  synoptic  tradition 
in  Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  2  or  equivalent. 
Alternate  years. 

22  READINGS  IN  THE 
PAULINE  EPISTLES 

Selected  readings  from  the  letters  of  Paul  in 
Greek.  Prerequisite:  Greek  II  or  equivalent . 
Alternate  years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew  is  not  offered  as  a  major.  An 
interdisciplinary  minor  in  Biblical  Lan- 
guages requires  the  completion  of  Greek 
21,  22  and  Hebrew  21  and  22. 

I  -2     OLD  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR 
AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  Old  Testament  Hebrew 
grammar  and  readings  of  selected  passages  of 
the  Hebrew  text.  Alternate  years. 

21  READINGS  IN  OLD 
TESTAMENT  NARRATIVE 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Hebrew  text  of 
selected  narrative  portions  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment with  special  attention  being  given  to 
exegetical  questions.  The  text  read  varies 
from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite:  Hebrew  2  or 
equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

22  READINGS  IN  THE  PROPHETIC 
BOOKS  AND  WISDOM  LITERATURE 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Hebrew  text  of 
selected  portions  of  Old  Testament  prophecy 
and  wisdom  literature  with  special  attention 
being  given  to  exegetical  questions.  The  text 
read  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite: 
Hebrew  21  or  equivalent.  Alternate  years. 

Spanish 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses  num- 
bered 10  or  above.  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  38  does  not  count  toward 
the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for 
teaching  in  secondary  school  must  pass 


38 


Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38 
(grade  of  C  or  better)  and  Spanish  49. 

A  minor  in  Spanish  consists  of  at  least 
four  courses  numbered  20  and  above. 
Courses  10  and  1 1  may  be  counted 
toward  the  minor,  but  then  the  minor 
must  consist  of  at  least  five  courses,  three 
of  which  must  be  numbered  20  and 
above. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY  SPANISH 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals 
of  the  language  with  a  view  to  using  them. 
Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding, 
and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE  SPANISH 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of 
the  language  for  immediate  use  in  speaking, 
understanding,  and  reading  with  a  view  to 
building  confidence  in  self-expression.  Prere- 
quisite: Spanish  2  or  equivalent. 

21-22  COMPREHENSIVE  REVIEW  AND 
LANGUAGE  PRACTICE 
This  course  consists  of  a  thorough  review  of 
grammar,  drills  for  oral  comprehension  and 
expression,  discussion  of  readings  and  the 
writing  of  compositions.  It  is  designed  to 
develop  the  student's  ability  to  read,  write  and 
converse  in  Spanish  with  confidence.  Prere- 
quisite: Spanish  J  J  or  equivalent. 

32  HISPANIC  CULTURE 

To  introduce  students  to  the  Spanish-speaking 
people  —  their  values,  customs  and  institu- 
tions, with  reference  to  the  geographic  and 
historical  forces  governing  present-day  Spain 
and  Spanish  America.  Prerequisite:  Spanish 
22  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

33  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH 
LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  impor- 
tant periods  of  Spanish  literature,  representa- 
tive authors,  and  major  socio-economic  deve- 
lopments. The  course  deals  with  the  literature 
from  the  beginning  to  the  present.  Prerequis- 
ite: Spanish  22  or  consent  of  instructor .  Alter- 
nate years. 

35  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  impor- 
tant periods  of  Spanish-American  literature, 
representative  authors,  and  major  socio- 
economic developments.  The  course  deals 
with  the  literature,  especially  the  essay  and 
poetry,  from  the  16th  century  to  the  present. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  22  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  \ears. 


44  SPANISH  LITERATURE  OF 
THE  GOLDEN  AGE 

A  study  of  representative  works  and  principal 
literary  figures  in  the  poetry,  prose,  and  drama 
of  the  16th  and  17th  centuries.  Prerequisite: 
Spanish  33.  35.  or  consent  of  instructor. 

45  MODERN  HISPANIC  LITERATURE 
Readings  of  important  works  of  drama,  poet- 
ry, and  prose  from  the  major  periods  of  19th 
and  20th  century  Spanish  and  Latin-American 
literature.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  33.  35.  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

49  ADVANCED  LANGUAGE  PRACTICE 
Intensive  practice  for  advanced  students  who 
wish  to  improve  further  their  spoken  and  writ- 
ten Spanish.  Includes  work  in  oral  com- 
prehension, pronunciation,  oral  and  written 
composition,  and  translation.  Prerequisite: 
One  Spanish  course  at  the  30' s  level  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

(See  index) 
Recent  studies  include  literary,  linguistic,  and 
cultural  topics  and  themes  such  as  urban 
problems  as  reflected  in  the  modem  novel. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


HISTORY 

Professor:  Piper 

Associate  Professor:  Larson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professor:  Morris 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses, 
including  10,  11,  and  45.  At  least  seven 
courses  must  be  taken  in  the  department. 
The  following  courses  may  be  counted 
toward  fulfilling  the  major  requirements: 
American  Studies  10,  Political  Science 
39,  Religion  26  and  28.  Other  appropri- 
ate courses  outside  the  department  may 
be  counted  upon  departmental  approval . 
For  history  majors  who  student  teach  in 
history,  the  major  consists  of  nine 
courses.  In  addition  to  the  courses  listed 
below,  special  courses,  independent 
study,  and  honors  are  available.  Special 
courses  recently  taught  and  anticipated 
include  a  biographical  study  of  European 


Monarchs,  the  European  Left,  the 
Industrialization  and  Urbanization  of 
Modem  Europe,  Utopian  Movements  in 
America,  the  Peace  Movement  in  Ameri- 
ca, The  Vietnam  War,  and  American 
Legal  History.  History  majors  are 
encouraged  to  participate  in  the  intern- 
ship program. 

Three  minors  are  offered  by  the 
Department  of  History.  The  following 
courses  are  required  to  complete  a  minor 
in  Amer/caw ///iron;  History  12,  13,  and 
three  courses  in  American  history  num- 
bered 20  and  above.  A  minor  in  Euro- 
pean History  requires  the  completion  of 
History  10.  11,  and  three  courses  in 
European  history  numbered  20  and 
above.  To  obtain  a  minor  in  History 
(without  national  or  geographic  designa- 
tion), a  student  must  complete  six 
courses  in  history,  of  which  three  must 
be  chosen  from  History  10,  11,  12  and  13 
and  three  must  be  history  courses  num- 
bered 20  and  above. 

5  SELECTED  THEMES  IN 
WESTERN  CIVILIZATION 
A  survey  of  the  political,  economic,  social, 
and  cultural  values  and  institutions  in  Western 
Civilization  from  the  time  of  classical  Greece 
to  the  present.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  (Not 
open  to  students  who  have  had  History  10  and 
II). 

10  EUROPE  1500-1815 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultur- 
al, and  intellectual  history  of  Europe  and  its 
relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from 
1500  to  1815. 

1 1  EUROPE  1 8 1 5-Present 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultur- 
al, and  intellectual  history  of  Europe  and  its 
relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from 
1815  to  the  present. 

12  UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1607-1877 

A  study  of  the  men.  measures,  and  move- 
ments which  have  been  significant  in  the 
development  of  the  United  States  between 
1607  and  1877.  Attention  is  paid  to  the  prob- 
lems of  minonty  groups  as  well  as  to  majority 
and  national  influences. 

13  UNITED  STATES  HISTORY 

1877-Present 

A  study  of  men.  measures,  and  movements 
which  have  been  significant  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  United  States  since  1877.  Atten- 


39 


tion  is  paid  to  the  problems  of  minority  groups 
as  well  as  to  majority  and  national  influences. 

20     ANCIENT  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  ancient  western  world,  includ- 
ing the  foundations  of  the  western  tradition  in 
Greece,  the  emergence  and  expansion  of  the 
Roman  state,  its  experience  as  a  republic,  and 
its  transformation  into  the  Empire.  The  course 
will  focus  on  the  social  and  intellectual  life  of 
Greece  and  Rome  as  well  as  political  and 
economic  changes.  Alternate  years. 

22  MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  AND 
ITS  NEIGHBORS 

The  history  of  Europe  from  the  dissolution  of 
the  Roman  Empire  to  the  mid- 15th  century. 
The  course  will  deal  with  the  growing 
estrangement  of  western  Catholic  Europe 
from  the  Byzantium  and  Islam,  culminating  in 
the  Crusades;  the  rise  of  the  Islamic  Empire 
and  its  later  fragmentation;  the  development 
and  growth  of  feudalism;  the  conflict  of 
empire  and  papacy,  and  the  rise  of  the  towns. 
Alternate  years. 

23  EUROPE  IN  THE  ERA  OF 
THE  WORLD  WARS 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political,  economic, 
social,  and  cultural  history  of  Europe  from 
1 900- 1 945 .  Topics  include  the  rise  of  irration- 
alism,  the  origins  of  the  First  World  War,  the 
Communist  and  Fascist  Revolutions,  and  the 
attempts  to  preserve  peace  before  1939.  Pre- 
requisite: History  1 1  or  consent  of  instructor. 

24  CONTEMPORARY  EUROPE 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political,  economic, 
social,  and  cultural  history  of  Europe  since 
1945.  Topics  include  the  post-war  economic 
recovery  of  Europe,  the  Sovietization  of  East- 
em  Europe,  the  origins  of  the  Cold  War, 
decolonization,  and  the  flowering  of  the  wel- 
fare state.  Prerequisite.  History  II  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

25  FRENCH  REVOLUTION 
AND  NAPOLEON 

An  analysis  of  the  political,  social,  and  intel- 
lectual background  of  the  French  Revolution, 
a  survey  of  the  course  of  revolutionary  deve- 
lopment, and  an  estimate  of  the  results  of  the 
Napoleonic  conquests  and  administration. 
Prerequisite:  History  JO  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

26  COLONIAL  AMERICA  AND 
THE  REVOLUTIONARY  ERA 

The  establishment  of  British  settlements  on 
the  American  continent,  their  history  as  colo- 
nies, the  causes  and  events  of  the  American 
Revolution,  the  critical  period  following  inde- 
pendence, and  proposal  and  adoption  of  the 
United  States  Constitution.  Alternate  years. 


27  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES 

This  course  begins  with  the  Progressive  Era 
and  includes  the  political,  economic,  and 
social  developments  in  the  20th  century. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  domestic  and 
international  demands  which  have  faced  the 
United  States  in  the  period  following  World 
War  II. 

28  AFRO-AMERICAN  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  experiences  and  participation  of 
Afro-Americans  in  the  United  States.  The 
course  includes  historical  experiences  such  as 
slavery,  abolition,  reconstruction,  and  urbani- 
zation. It  also  raises  the  issue  of  the  develop- 
ment and  growth  of  white  racism,  and  the 
effect  of  this  racism  on  contemporary  Afro- 
American  social,  intellectual,  and  political 
life.  Alterrmte  years. 

29  LATIN  AMERICAN  HISTORY 

An  examination  of  the  native  civilization,  the 
age  of  discovery  and  conquest,  Spanish  colo- 
nial policy,  the  independence  movements, 
and  the  development  of  modem  institutions 
and  governments  in  Latin  America.  Alternate 
years. 

3 1     HISTORY  OF  WORLD  WAR  11 

A  comprehensive  examination  of  World  War 
11  emphasizing  the  effect  of  ideological,  eco- 
nomic, and  political  forces  on  the  formulation 
of  military  strategy  and  the  conduct  of  opera- 
tion; the  nature  and  extent  of  the  expansion  of 
government  powers;  and  the  experience  of 
war  from  the  perspective  of  ordinary  civilians 
and  military  alike.  Does  not  count  toward 
distribution. 

33  CONFLICT  IN 
WESTERN  CIVILIZATION 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  changing  nature  of 
war  and  its  relationship  to  the  development  of 
Western  Civilization  since  the  end  of  the 
Middle  Ages.  Particular  emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  role  of  war  in  the  development  of 
the  modem  nation  state  and  the  origins  and 
nature  of  total  war.  Alternate  years. 

34  DIPLOMATIC  HISTORY  OF 
EUROPE  SINCE  1789 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the 
European-states  system  and  the  relations 
between  the  European  states  since  the  begin- 
ning of  the  French  Revolution.  Prerequisite: 
History  1 1  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 

35  THE  CRISIS  OF  LIBERALISM  AND 
NATIONALISM,  EUROPE  1848-1870 

An  in-depth  investigation  of  the  crucial 
"Middle  Years"  of  19th  century  Europe  from 
the  revolutions  of  1 848  through  the  unification 
of  Germany.  The  course  centers  on  the  strug- 
gles for  power  within  the  major  stales  of 


Europe  at  this  time,  and  how  the  vehicle  of 
nationalism  was  used  to  bring  about  one  type 
of  solution.  Alternate  years. 

37  AGE  OF  JEFFERSON  AND  JACKSON 
The  theme  of  the  course  is  the  emergence  of 
the  political  and  social  characteristics  that 
shaped  modem  America.  The  personalities  of 
Thomas  Jefferson,  John  Marshall.  John  Ran- 
dolph. Aaron  Burr,  and  Andrew  Jackson 
receive  special  attention.  Special  considera- 
tion is  given  to  the  first  and  second  party 
systems,  the  decline  in  community  cohesive- 
ness.  the  westward  movement,  and  the  grow- 
ing importance  of  the  family  as  a  unit  of  social 
organization.  Alternate  years. 

38  CIVIL  WAR  AND  RECONSTRUCTION 
The  problems  and  events  leading  to  war,  the 
political  and  military  history  of  the  war,  and 
the  bitter  aftermath  to  the  Compromise  of 

1877. 

39  20TH  CENTURY 
UNITED  STATES  RELIGION 

The  study  of  historical  and  cultural  develop- 
ments in  American  society  which  relate  to 
religion  or  what  is  commonly  called  religion. 
This  involves  consideration  of  the  institutional 
and  intellectual  development  of  several  faith 
groups  as  well  as  discussion  of  certain  prob- 
lems, such  as  the  persistence  of  religious 
bigotry  and  the  changing  modes  of  church- 
state  relationships.  Alternate  years. 

40  HISTORY  OF 
RENAISSANCE  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  classical,  humanist,  and  scho- 
lastic elements  involved  in  the  development  of 
the  Renaissance  outlook  on  views  and  values, 
both  in  Italy  and  in  Northem  Europe.  The 
various  combinations  of  social  and  political 
circumstances  which  constitute  the  historical 
context  of  these  intellectual  developments  will 
be  noted.  Alternate  years. 

41  HISTORY  OF 
REFORMATION  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of  ideas 
propounded  prior  to  the  Reformation,  but 
which  are  historically  related  to  its  inception, 
and  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of  ideas  involved 
in  the  formulation  of  the  major  Reformation 
Protestant  traditions,  and  in  the  Catholic 
Reformation.  Included  are  the  ideas  of  the 
humanists  of  the  Reformation  Era.  Alternate 


42     UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND 

INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  TO  1877 
A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experi- 
ence of  the  United  States  from  its  colonial 
antecedents  through  reconstruction.  Among 
the  topics  considered  are  Puritanism,  tran- 
scendentalism, community  life  and  organiza- 
tion, education,  and  social-reform  move- 


40 


merits.  Prerequisites:  two  courses  from 
History  12,  13.  28.  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43     UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND 

INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  SINCE  1877 
A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experi- 
ence of  the  United  States  from  reconstruction 
to  the  present  day.  Among  the  topics  consid- 
ered are  social  Darwinism,  pragmatism,  com- 
munity life  and  organization,  education  and 
social  reform  movements.  Prerequisites:  mo 
courses  from  History  12.  13,  28.  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

45     HISTORICAL  METHODS 

This  course  focuses  on  the  nature  and  meaning 
of  history.  It  will  open  to  the  student  different 
historical  approaches  and  will  provide  the 
opportunity  to  explore  these  approaches  in 
terms  of  particular  topics  and  periods.  Majors 
are  required  to  enroll  in  this  course  in  either 
their  junior  or  senior  year.  The  course  is  open 
to  other  students  who  have  two  courses  in 
history  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Typically,  history  interns  work  for  local  gov- 
ernment agencies  engaged  in  historical  pro- 
jects or  for  the  Lycoming  County  Histoncal 
Museum. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Recent  topics  include  studies  of  the  immigra- 
tion of  American  blacks,  political  dissension 
in  the  Weimer  Republic,  Indian  relations 
before  the  American  Revolution,  and  the  his- 
tory of  Lycoming  County. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

(See  index) 


INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The  major  is  designed  to  integrate  an 
understanding  of  the  changing  social, 
political,  and  historical  environment  of 
Europe  today  with  study  of  Europe  in  its 
relations  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  particu- 
larly the  United  States.  It  stresses  the 
international  relations  of  the  North 
Atlantic  community  and  offers  the  stu- 
dent opportunity  to  emphasize  either 
European  studies  or  international  rela- 
tions. The  program  provides  multiple 
perspectives  on  the  cultural  traits  that 


shape  popular  attitudes  and  institutions. 
Study  of  a  single  country  is  included  as  a 
data-base  for  comparisons,  and  study  of 
its  language,  as  a  basis  for  direct  commu- 
nication with  its  people. 

The  program  is  intended  to  prepare  a 
student  either  for  graduate  study  or  for 
careers  which  have  an  international  com- 
ponent. International  obligations  are 
increasingly  assumed  by  government 
agencies  and  a  wide  range  of  business, 
social,  religious,  and  educational  organi- 
zations. Opportunities  are  found  in  the 
fields  of  journalism,  publishing,  com- 
munications, trade,  banking,  advertis- 
ing, management,  and  tourism.  The  pro- 
gram also  offers  flexible  career 
preparation  in  a  variety  of  essential 
skills,  such  as  research,  data  analysis, 
report  writing,  languge  skills,  and  the 
awareness  necessary  for  dealing  with 
people  and  institutions  of  another  cul- 
ture. Preparation  for  related  careers  can 
be  obtained  through  the  guided  selection 
of  courses  outside  the  major  in  the  areas 
of  business,  economics,  foreign  lan- 
guages and  literatures,  government,  his- 
tory, and  international  relations  or 
through  a  second  major.  Students  should 
design  their  programs  in  consultation 
with  members  of  the  Committee  on  Inter- 
national Studies. 

By  completing  six  to  eight  additional 
courses  in  the  social  sciences  (which 
include  those  courses  needed  to  complete 
a  major  in  economics,  history,  political 
science,  or  sociology/anthropology)  and 
the  required  program  in  eduction,  stu- 
dents can  be  certified  for  the  teacher 
education  program  in  social  studies.  By 
completing  a  major  in  the  foreign  lan- 
guage (five  or  more  courses)  and  the 
education  program,  students  can  be  certi- 
fied to  teach  that  language.  The  Interna- 
tional Studies  program  also  encourages 
participation  in  study-abroad  programs, 
as  well  as  the  Washington  and  United 
Nations  semesters. 

The  major  includes  1 1  courses 
selected  as  follows: 

International  Relations  Courses  — 

Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four 
must  be  taken  from  Area  Courses). 
Courses  within  this  group  are  designed  to 


provide  a  basic  understanding  of  the 
international  system  and  of  Europe's 
relations  with  the  rest  of  the  world. 
Political  Science  25  is  required. 

Political  Science  25:  World  Politics 
Economics  43:  International  Trade 
History  34:  European  Diplomatic  History 
Political  Science  39:  American  Foreign 
Policy 

Area  Courses  —  Four  or  two  courses  (if 
two,  then  four  must  be  taken  from  Inter- 
national Relations  Courses).  Courses 
within  this  group  are  designed  to  provide 
a  basic  understanding  of  the  European 
political,  social,  and  economic  environ- 
ment. History  1 1  and  Economics  22  are 
required. 

History  II;  Europe  1815-Present 
Economics  22:  Economic  Systems  of 

the  West 
Political  Science  20:  European  Politics 
History  23:  Europe  in  the  Era  of  the 

World  Wars 
History  24:  Contemporary  Europe 

National  Courses 

Language  —  Two  courses  in  one  lan- 
guage. 

French  21.  plus  one  course  numbered  22  or 

above  (except  281 
German  2 1 ,  plus  one  course  numbered  22  or 

above 
Spanish  2 1 ,  plus  one  course  numbered  22  or 

above 


Country  —  One  course.  The  student 
must  select,  according  to  his  or  her  lan- 
guage preparation,  one  European  coun- 
try which  will  serve  as  a  special  interest 
area  throughout  the  program.  The  coun- 
try selected  will  serve  as  the  base  for 
individual  projects  in  the  major  courses 
wherever  possible. 

France  —  French  28:  Modem  France 
Germany  —  History  80:  Topics  in  German 

History 
Spain  —  Spanish  32:  Hispanic  Culture 

Elective  Course  —  One  course  which 
should  involve  further  study  of  some 
aspect  of  the  program.  Appropriate 
courses  are  any  area  or  international 


42 


relations  courses  not  yet  taken.  History 
10,  33;  Economics  23,  45;  Political  Sci- 
ence 26,  27,  38,  46;  related  foreign- 
literature  courses  counting  toward  the 
fine-arts  requirement  and  internships. 

49     SENIOR  SEMINAR 

A  one-semester  seminar,  taken  in  the  senior 
year,  in  which  students  and  several  faculty 
members  will  pursue  an  integrative  topic  in 
the  field  of  international  studies.  Students  will 
work  to  some  extent  independently.  Guest 
speakers  will  be  invited.  The  seminar  will  be 
open  to  qualified  persons  from  outside  the 
major  and  the  College.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor. 


LITERATURE 

Associate  Professor:  Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This  major  recognizes  literature  as  a 
distinct  discipline  beyond  national 
boundaries  and  combines  the  study  of 
any  two  literatures  in  the  areas  of 
English,  French,  German,  and  Spanish. 
Students  can  thus  explore  two  literatures 
widely  and  intensively  at  the  upper  levels 
of  course  offerings  within  each  of  the 
respective  departments  while  developing 
and  applying  skills  in  foreign  languages. 
The  major  prepares  students  for  graduate 
study  in  either  of  the  two  literatures 
studied  or  in  comparative  literature. 

The  major  requires  at  least  six  litera- 
ture courses,  equally  divided  between 
the  two  literatures  concerned.  The  six 
must  be  at  the  advanced  level  as  deter- 
mined in  consultation  with  advisers  (nor- 
mally courses  numbered  20  and  above  in 
English  and  40  and  above  in  foreign 
languages).  In  general,  two  of  the 
advanced  courses  in  each  literature 
should  be  period  courses.  The  third 
course,  taken  either  as  a  regular  course  or 
an  independent  study,  may  have  as  its 
subject  another  period,  a  particular 
author,  genre,  or  literary  theme,  or  some 
other  unifying  approach  or  idea.  Beyond 
these  six,  the  major  must  include  at  least 
two  additional  courses  from  among  those 
counting  toward  a  major  in  the  depart- 
ments  involved.    Any  prerequisite 


courses  in  the  respective  departments 
(for  example:  English  6,  French  2 1-22  or 
28,  German  21-22,  Spanish  21-22) 
should  be  taken  during  the  freshman 
year.  Students  should  design  their  prog- 
rams in  consultation  with  a  faculty  mem- 
ber from  each  of  the  literatures  con- 
cerned. Programs  for  the  major  must  be 
approved  by  the  departments  involved. 


MASS  COMMUNICATION 


Instructor:  Nason  (Chairperson) 

The  major  in  mass  communication 
combines  a  liberal  arts  foundation  with  a 
professional  sequence  through  a  selec- 
tion of  courses  from  the  Departments  of 
Art,  Business  Administration,  English, 
Political  Science,  Psychology,  Sociolo- 
gy and  Anthropology,  and  Mass  Com- 
munication. It  also  draws  upon  special- 
ized courses  from  the  graphic  arts 
department  of  the  Williamsport  Area 
Community  College.  Students  complet- 
ing the  program  are  qualified  to  pursue 
either  career  options  or  graduate  study  in 
mass  communication,  advertising, 
broadcasting,  journalism,  or  public  rela- 
tions. 

Students  majoring  in  mass  communi- 
cation must  complete  the  Core  Curricu- 
lum and  one  sequence,  as  well  as  the 
College  distribution  requirements. 

A  minor  in  Mass  Communication  con- 
sists of  Mass  Comm  10  and  any  four  of 
the  following  courses:  Mass  Comm  1 1 , 
24,  27.  28,  30,  31. 

I.      THE  CORE  CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  STUDENTS 

Two  Theory  Courses 

Mass  Comm  10         Introduction  to  Mass 

Communication 

Mass  Comm  30  Theories  of  Mass 

Communication 

A  Media  Regulation  Course 

Mass  Comm  31        Mass  Media  Law  and 
Regulation 

A  Production  Course  (Choice  of  one.  Certain 
of  these  courses  are  required  in  specific 
sequences.) 


GCO  51 1  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Mass  Comm  24        Television  Production 

A  Writing  Course  (Choice  of  one.  Certain 
of  these  courses  are  required  in  specific 
sequences.) 

Eng  16  Writing  for  Special  Audiences 
Eng  18  Newswnting  for  the  Print  Media 
Mass  Comm  19  Newswriting  for  the 

Broadcast  Media 
Pol  Sci  34  Political  Newswriting 

Mass  Comm  27      Scriptwnting  for  Radio 
and  Television 

A  Research  Course  (Choice  of  one.  Certain 
of  these  courses  are  required  in  specific 
sequences.) 

Pol  Sci  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 
Soc  47  Research  Methods  in  Sociology 
Psy  32  Sensory  Experimental  Psychology 
Psy  24  Social  Psychology 

Bus  45  Marketing  Research 

An  applied  Media  Experience  Course 
(Choice  of  one.) 

Mass  Comm  48-49  Practicum 

Mass  Comm  70-79  Internship 

Mass  Comm  80-89        Independent  Study 

NOTE:  Mass  Communication  core  courses 
may  be  utilized  both  to  meet  the  core  require- 
ments and  to  complete  sequence  require- 
ments. Since  some  core  courses  must  be  used 
to  meet  sequence  requirements  students 
should  review  carefully  sequence  require- 
ments in  selecting  courses. 


SEQUENCE  REQUIREMENTS 
Mass  Communication  majors  must  complete 
at  least  one  sequence.  All  sequence  require- 
ments are  in  addition  to  the  core  curriculum 
but  the  same  course  may  be  used  to  meet  the 
core  requirements  as  well  as  the  requirements 
of  sequences. 

Advertising  Sequence: 

Bus  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Bus  32  Advertising 

Pol  Sci  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 
Bus  45  Marketing  Research  or 

Soc  47      Research  Methods  in  Sociology 
GCO  5 1 1  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Mass  Comm  1 1  Oral  Communication 

Art  27  Photography  I  or 

Art  15  Two-dimensional  Design 

Bus  47  Creative  Advertising  is 

strongly  recommended,  though 
not  required,  for  this  sequence. 


Broadcasting  Sequence: 
Mass  Comm  19 


Pol  Sci  34 
Mass  Comm  1 1 


Newswriting  for 

Broadcast  Media 

Political  Newswriting 

Oral  Communication 


43 


Mass  Comm  31        Mass  Media  Law  and 

Regulation 

Mass  Comm  28  Radio  Programming 

and  Production 
Mass  Comm  24  Television  Production 
Mass  Comm  27      Sciiptwriting  for  Radio 

and  Television 
Eng  26  Film  and  Literature  or 

Thea  1 1  Introduction  to  Film 

Journalism  Sequence: 

Eng  16  Writing  for  Special  Audiences 

Eng  17  Critical  Wnting 

Eng  18  Newswriting  for  Print  Media 

Pol  Sci  34  Political  Newswriting 

Pol  Sci  1 1  State  and  Local  Government 

Soc  34  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 

Pol  Sci  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Art  27  Photography  I 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Public  Relations  Sequence: 

Eng  16  Writing  for  Special  Audiences 
Eng  18  Newswriting  for  Print  Media 

Eng  37  Public  Relations  and  Publicity 
Bus  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Pol  Sci  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 
Soc  47  Research  Methods  in  Sociology 
An  27  Photography  I 

Mass  Comm  24  Television  Production 
Mass  Comm  1 1  Oral  Communication 


10  INTRODUCTION  TO 
MASS  COMMUNICATION 

Theories  of  the  process  of  mass  communica- 
tion and  introduction  to  the  mass  media; 
attention  will  be  given  to  problems  of  censor- 
ship and  media  ethics.  Analysis  of  the  mass 
media's  impact  on  society;  emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  social,  psychological,  and 
political  implications  of  the  media's  shaping 
mfluence  on  man  and  institutions. 

1 1  FUNDAMENTALS  OF 
ORAL  COMMUNICATION 

The  dynamics  of  oral  communication.  The 
development  of  elementary  principles  of 
simple  oral  communication  through  lectures, 
prepared  assignments  in  speaking,  and  infor- 
mal class  exercises.  Utilizes  video-tape  sequ- 
ences for  feedback  to  students. 

19     NEWSWRITING  FOR 

THE  BROADCAST  MEDIA 
Analysis  of  and  practice  in  newswriting  for 
broadcast:  the  news  story,  the  newscast,  and 
the  interview.  Frequent  workshop  sessions  for 
critiques  of  student  writing  and  oral  presenta- 
tions. Alternate  years. 

24    TELEVISION  PRODUCTION 

Technical,  aesthetic,  organizational,  and 
business  aspects  of  video  programs.  Study  and 
use  of  basic  equipment  to  produce  standard 
formats  on  videotape 


27  SCRIPTWRITING  FOR 
RADIO  AND  TELEVISION 

Analysis  of  differences  between  radio  and 
television  writing  requirements,  station  for- 
mats, standard  program  forms,  script  stan- 
dards, writing  and  criticism.  Alternate  years. 

28  RADIO  PROGRAMMING 
AND  PRODUCTION 

Contemporary  broadcast  programming  tech- 
niques including  station  scheduling,  program 
development  and  analysis,  and  implementa- 
tion in  real  and  hypothetical  situations. 
Emphasis  on  management  functions.  Alter- 
nate years. 

30  THEORIES  AND  ISSUES  IN 
MASS  COMMUNICATION 

An  analysis  of  current  theories  dealing  with 
mass  communication  systems  and  the  beha- 
vior and  attitudes  of,  and  effects  on,  their 
audiences.  The  course  also  examines  contem- 
porary mass  media  issues  with  an  emphasis  on 
developing  critical  thinking  skills.  Prere- 
quisite: Mass  Comm  10. 

31  MASS  MEDIA  LAW  AND  REGULATION 
An  examination  of  the  legal  structure  and  the 
system  by  which  mass  communication  is  con- 
trolled in  this  society.  The  forces  which  shape, 
influence,  and  make  policy  will  be  consid- 
ered. Cross-listed  as  Political  Science  36. 
Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN 

MASS  COMMUNICATION 
Utilization  of  mass  communication  princi- 
ples, techniques,  and  skills  in  an  applied  set- 
ting through  work  experience  in  a  communi- 
cation agency  or  organization.  This 
experience  is  coordinated  with  regular  class 
meetings  to  analyze  and  evaluate  relationships 
between  theory  and  practice.  Prerequisite: 
upper  division  status  and  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  usually  work  off  campus  in  a  field 
related  to  their  communication  sequence; 
some  may  work  with  the  campus  radio  station. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Studies  involve  research  related  to  the  com- 
munication sequence  of  the  student. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


Graphic  Arts 

Through  special  arrangements,  the 


following  courses  offered  at  the  Wil- 
liamsport  Area  Community  College  are 
available  only  to  students  in  the  Mass 
Communication  major  and  in  the  Art 
Track  III  major  in  Commercial  Design. 
The  WACC  courses  are  taken  as  part  of 
the  student's  schedule  and  are  listed  with 
Lycoming  offerings  during  registration 
periods. 

5 1 1  LAYOUT  AND  DESIGN 

Analysis  of  materials,  tools,  and  techniques 
used  in  preparation  of  copy  for  reproduction; 
paste-up  and  color  separation  overlays.  4  cr. 

5 1 2  TYPOGRAPHIC  COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals  of  typesetting.  Theory  and 
practice  in  the  care  and  use  of  composing 
machines,  both  hot  (mechanical)  and  cold 
(photo).  4  cr. 

521     PROCESS  CAMERA 

Concepts  and  techniques  of  darkroom  proce- 
dure for  reproduction  of  line  and  halftone  copy 
on  process  camera.  4  cr. 


MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 


Associate  Professors:  Getchell,  Haley 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professors:  Bucki,  DeSilva, 

Sprechini,  Wallace 
Part-time  Instructor:  Dotzel 

The  Department  of  Mathematical  Sci- 
ences offers  major  programs  in  computer 
science  and  mathematics. 

Computer  Science 

A  major  in  computer  science  consists 
of  1 1  courses:  Mathematics  16,  18,  and 
19,  and  Computer  Science  15,  26,  27, 
44,  45,  and  three  other  computer  science 
courses  numbered  30  or  above,  one  of 
which  must  be  31  or  37.  Recommended 
extradepartmental  courses:  Physics  27, 
Philosophy  25,  and  Psychology  37. 

A  minor  in  Computer  Science  consists 
of  Computer  Science  26,  27,  and  two 
other  computer  science  courses  num- 
bered 20  or  above. 

15     INTRODUCTION  TO 
COMPUTER  SCIENCE 
Introduction  to  programming  and  software 
utilities.  Topics  include  algorithms,  program 


44 


structure,  computer  configuration,  memory 
allocation,  and  an  exposure  to  application 
packages.  Laboratory  experience  is  included, 
most  recently  using  OMSI  Pascal,  the  Mini- 
Calc  spreadsheet,  and  RUNOFF,  a  text  for- 
matting package.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or 
exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

26  PRINCIPLES  OF 
ADVANCED  PROGRAMMING 
Principles  of  effective  programming,  includ- 
ing structured  programming,  stepwise  refine- 
ment, assertion  proving,  style,  debugging, 
control  structure,  decision  tables,  finite  state 
machines,  recursion,  and  encoding.  Utilities 
most  recently  used  include  SVS  Pascal,  the 
UNIX  operating  systems.  C.  and  Shell  pro- 
gramming. Prerequisite:  a  grade  ofC  or  bet- 
ter in  Computer  Science  15  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

27  DATA  STRUCTURES 
Representation  of  data  and  algorithms  asso- 
ciated with  data  structures.  Topics  include 
representation  of  lists,  trees,  graphs  and 
strings,  algorithms  for  searching  and  sorting. 
Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  Com- 
puter Science  26  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Corequisite:  Mathematics  16. 

.M     INTRODUCTION  TO 

NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS 
Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data  leading  to 
interpolation,  numerical  integration,  numeri- 
cal solutions  of  differential  equations,  and 
systems  of  equations.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  15  and  Mathematics  19.  Alternate 
years.  Cross-listed  as  Mathematics  31 . 

35  INTRODUCTION  TO 
COMPUTER  GRAPHICS 
An  introduction  to  graphics  hardware  and 
software  with  emphasis  on  the  mathematics 
necessary  to  represent,  transform,  and  display 
images  of  two  and  three  dimensional  objects. 
Laboratory  exercises  will  be  designed  to 
explore  the  capabilities  of  the  graphics  system 
and  to  test  the  students'  understanding  of  the 
principles  discussed  in  class.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  26  and  either  Computer 
Science  27  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

37  COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 
An  introduction  to  some  of  the  algorithms 
which  have  been  developed  for  producing 
numerical  solutions  to  such  linear  algebraic 
problems  as  solving  systems  of  linear  equa- 
tions, inverting  matrices,  computing  the 
eigenvalues  of  a  matrix .  and  solving  the  linear 
least-squares  problem.  Prerequisites:  Com- 
puter Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Mathematics  37. 


39     DATABASE  SYSTEMS 

External  storage  structures,  hashed  files, 
indexed  files;  relational,  network,  and  hierar- 
chical data  models;  relational  algebra  and  the 
relational  calculus;  design  theory  for  relation- 
al databases;  query  optimization;  concurrent 
operations;  database  protection.  Prerequisite: 
Computer  Science  27.  Alternate  years. 

44  MACHINE  LANGUAGE 

Principles  of  machine  language  programming; 
computer  organization  and  representation  of 
numbers,  strings,  arrays,  and  list  structures  at 
the  machine  level;  interrupt  programming, 
relocatable  code,  linking  loaders;  interfacing 
with  operating  systems.  Prerequisite:  a  grade 
of  C  or  better  in  Computer  Science  26  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

45  SYSTEMS  PROGRAMMING 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the  algor- 
ithms used  in  programming  the  various  parts 
of  a  computer  system.  These  parts  include 
assemblers,  loaders,  editors,  interrupt  proces- 
sors, input/output  schedulers,  processor  and 
job  schedulers,  and  memory  managers.  Pre- 
requisite: Computer  Science  27  and  44. 

46  COMPILER  CONSTRUCTION 

The  emphasis  in  this  course  is  on  the  con- 
struction of  translators  for  programming  lan- 
guages. Topics  include  lexical  analysis,  block 
structure,  grammars,  parsing,  program  rep- 
resentation, and  run-time  organization.  Pre- 
requisite: Computer  Science  27.  Alternate 
years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

(See  index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 

Mathematics 

A  major  in  mathematics  consists  of  10 
units  of  courses  in  the  mathematical  sci- 
ences: Computer  Science  15,  Mathema- 
tics 18.  19,  20,  24,  34,  42,  and  three 
other  mathematics  courses  numbered 
above  20,  one  of  which  may  be  replaced 
by  Mathematics  12,  14,  or  16.  Students 
seeking  secondary  certification  in  mathe- 
matics are  required  to  complete  Mathe- 
matics 30  and  36  and  are  advised  to 
enroll  in  Philosophy  17.  In  addition,  all 
majors  are  advised  to  elect  Philosophy  25 
and  33,  Physics  25  and  26. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  courses  listed 
below,  special  courses  are  occasionally 


available.  Recent  topics  include  compu- 
ter graphics  and  discrete  probability. 

A  minor  in  Mathematics  consists  of 
Mathematics  20,  24,  and  two  other 
mathematics  courses  numbered  above 
20. 


5  INDIVIDUALIZED  LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION  IN  BASIC  ALGEBRA 
A  self-paced  study  of  arithmetic  and  decimal 
numerals,  fractions,  the  real  number  line, 
factoring,  solutions  to  linear  and  quadratic 
equations,  graphs  of  linear  and  quadratic 
functions,  expressions  with  rational  expo- 
nents, algebraic  functions,  exponential  func- 
tions, and  inequalities.  THIS  COURSE  IS 
LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  PLACED 
THEREIN  BY  THE  MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

7       MATHEMATICS  IN 

ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 
This  course  is  intended  for  prospective 
elementary  school  teachers  and  is  required  of 
all  those  seeking  elementary  certification. 
Topics  include  systems  of  numbers  and  of 
numeration,  computational  algorithms,  envir- 
onmental and  transformation  geometry  mea- 
surement, and  mathematical  concept  forma- 
tion. Observation  and  participation  in  Greater 
Williamsport  elementary  schools.  Corequis- 
ite: any  education  course  numbered  40  or 
above  which  is  specifically  required  for 
elementary  certification  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

9       INTRODUCTION  TO  CALCULUS 

An  intuitive  approach  to  the  calculus  concepts 
with  applications  to  business,  biology,  and 
social-science  problems.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  completed  Mathematics  18.  Prere- 
quisite: credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathe- 
matics 5.  Alternate  years. 

12  FINITE  MATHEMATICS 
FOR  DECISION  MAKING 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  principal 
mathematical  models,  not  involving  calculus, 
which  are  used  in  business  administration, 
social  sciences,  and  operations  research.  The 
course  will  include  both  deterministic  models 
such  as  graphs,  networks,  linear  programming 
and  voting  models,  and  probabilistic  models 
such  as  Markov  chains  and  games.  Prerequis- 
ite: credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathematics 
5. 

13  INTRODUCTION  TO  STATISTICS 
Empirical  distributions  of  measurements, 
probability  and  random  variables,  discrete  and 
continuous  probability  distributions,  statisti- 
cal inference  from  small  samples,  linear 
regression  and  correlation,  analysis  of 


45 


enumerative  data.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or 
exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

14     MULTIVARIATE  STATISTICS 

The  study  of  statistical  techniques  used  in 
experimental  designs  where  more  than  one 
random  variable  is  involved.  Techniques 
include  analysis  of  variance,  analysis  of 
covariance.  multiple  regression  and  correla- 
tion, factor  anaylsis  and  canonical  correla- 
tions, contingency  tables,  discriminative  anal- 
ysis, and  non-parametric  techniques.  Further 
topics  will  be  chosen  from  cluster  analysis, 
time  series  analysis,  and  repealed  measure 
analysis.  Extensive  use  of  a  statistical  package 
is  made  (currently  BMDP).  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  13  or  its  equivalent.  Alternate 
years. 

16  DISCRETE  MATHEMATICS 

An  introduction  to  discrete  structures.  Topics 
include  equivalence  relations,  partitions  and 
quotient  sets,  mathematical  induction,  recur- 
sive functions,  elementary  logic,  discrete 
number  systems,  elementary  combinatorial 
theory,  and  general  algebraic  structures 
emphasizing  semi-groups,  groups,  lattices. 
Boolean  algebras,  graphs  and  trees.  Prere- 
quisite: Computer  Science  15  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

17  PRECALCULUS  MATHEMATICS 

The  study  of  logarithmic,  exponential,  trigo- 
nometric, polynomial,  and  rational  functions, 
their  graphs,  and  elementary  properties.  Pre- 
requisite: credit  for  or  cxemptionfrom  Mathe- 
matics 5. 


18.     CALCULUS  WITH 

ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  I 
Differentiation  of  algebraic  functions,  graph- 
ing plane  curves,  applications  to  related  rate 
and  extremal  problems,  integration  of  alge- 
braic functions,  areas  of  plane  regions,  vol- 
umes of  solids  or  revolution,  and  other  appli- 
cations. Prerequisite:  a  grade  ofC  or  better  in 
Mathematics  17  or  consent  of  instructor. 

19  CALCULUS  WITH 
ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  II 
Differentiation  and  integration  of  transcen- 
dental functions,  parametric  equations,  polar 
coordinates,  the  conic  sections  and  their  appli- 
cations, infinite  sequences,  and  series  expan- 
sions. Prereauisile:  a  grade  ofC  or  better  in 
Mathematics  IS  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20  MULTIVARIATE  CALCULUS 
WITH  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

Vectors,  linear  transformations  and  their  mat- 
rix representations,  determinants,  matrix 
inversion,  solutions  to  systems  of  linear  equa- 
tions, differentiation  and  integration  of  multi- 
variate functions,  vector  field  theory  and 
applications.  Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or 


belter  in  Mathematics  J  9  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

21     DIFFERENTIAL  EQUATIONS 

A  study  of  ordinary  differential  equations  and 
their  applications:  first-order  linear  differen- 
tial equations,  the  Picard  Existence  Theorem, 
solution  by  separation  of  variables,  solution 
by  numerical  methods;  second-order  linear 
differential  equations,  solution  by  variation  of 
parameters,  solution  by  power  series,  solution 
by  Laplace  transforms;  systems  of  first-order 
equation,  solutions  by  eigenvalues;  qualita- 
tive theory,  stability  theory  asymptotic  beha- 
vior, and  the  Poincare-Bendixon  theorem. 
Besides  the  usual  applications  in  physics  and 
engineering,  considerable  attention  will  be 
given  to  modem  applications  in  the  social  and 
life  sciences.  Prerequisite:  a  grade  of  C  or 
better  in  Mathematics  19  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

23  COMPLEX  VARIABLES 

Complex  numbers,  analytic  functions,  com- 
plex integration.  Cauchy's  theorems  and  their 
applications.  Corequisile:  Mathematics  20. 
Alternate  years. 

24  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS 
Topics  regularly  included  are  the  nature  of 
mathematical  systems,  essentials  of  logical 
reasoning,  and  axiomatic  foundations  of  set 
theory.  Other  topics  frequently  included  are 
approaches  to  the  concepts  of  infinity  and 
continuity,  and  the  construction  of  the  real 
number  system.  The  course  serves  as  a  bridge 
from  the  elementary  calculus  to  advanced 
courses  in  algebra  and  analysis.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  19  or  consent  of  instructor. 

30     TOPICS  IN  GEOMETRY 

An  axiomatic  treatment  of  Euclidean  geomet- 
ry, and  an  introduction  to  related  geometries. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  18.  Alternate 


31     INTRODUCTION  TO 

NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS 
Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data  leading  to 
interpolation,  numerical  integration,  numen- 
cal  solutions  of  differential  equations,  and 
systems  of  equations.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  15  and  Mathematics  19.  Alternate 
years.  Cross-listed  as  Computer  Science  31 . 

32-33  MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  III 
A  study  of  probability,  discrete  and  continu- 
ous random  variables,  expected  values  and 
moments,  sampling,  point  estimation,  sam- 
pling distributions,  interval  estimation,  test  of 
hypotheses,  regression  and  linear  hypotheses, 
experimental  design  models.  Corequisite: 
Mathematics  20.  Alternate  years. 

34     MODERN  ALGEBRA 

An  integrated  approach  to  groups,  rings. 


fields,  and  vector  spaces  and  functions  which 
preserve  their  structure.  Prerequisite:  Mathe- 
matics 24. 

36  CONCEPTS  OF  MATHEMATICS 
IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

A  course  designed  for  mathematics  majors 
who  are  planning  to  teach  at  the  secondary 
level.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  mathe- 
matics that  form  the  foundation  of  secondary 
mathematics.  Ideas  will  be  presented  to 
familiarize  the  student  with  various  curricu- 
lum proposals,  to  provide  for  innovation 
within  the  existing  curriculum,  and  to  expand 
the  boundaries  of  the  existing  curriculum. 
Open  only  to  junior  and  senior  mathematics 
majors  enrolled  in  the  secondary-education 
program.  Alternate  years. 

37  COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 
An  introduction  to  some  of  the  algorithms 
which  have  been  developed  for  producing 
numerical  solutions  to  such  linear  algebraic 
problems  as  solving  systems  of  linear  equa- 
tions, inverting  matrices,  computing  the 
eigenvalues  of  a  matrix,  and  solving  the  linear 
least-squares  problem.  Prerequisites:  Com- 
puter Science  15  and  Mathematics  19  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  Alternate  years.  Cross- 
listed  as  Computer  Science  37. 

38  OPERATIONS  RESEARCH 

Queuing  theory,  including  simulation  tech- 
niques; optimization  theory,  including  linear 
programming,  integer  programming,  and 
dynamic  programming;  game  theory,  includ- 
ing two-person  zero-sum  games,  cooperative 
games,  and  multiperson  games.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  12  or  Mathematics  20.  Alternate 


42     REAL  ANALYSIS 

A  rigorous  analysis  of  the  basic  concepts  of 
real  variable  calculus;  the  real  number  system 
as  a  complete,  ordered  field;  the  topology  of 
Euclidean  space,  compact  sets,  the  Heine- 
Borel  Theorem;  continuity;  the  Intermediate 
Value  Theorem;  derivatives,  the  Mean  Value 
Theorem;  Reimann  integrals,  the  Fundamen- 
tal Theorem  of  Calculus;  infinite  series,  and 
Taylor's  theorem.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics 
24. 

48     SEMINAR 

Topics  in  modem  mathematics  of  current 
interest  to  the  instructor.  A  different  topic  is 
selected  each  semester.  This  semester  is 
designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior  mathe- 
matics majors  and  other  qualified  students 
with  more  than  the  usual  opportunity  for  con- 
centrated and  cooperative  inquiry.  Prerequis- 
ite: consent  of  instructor.  One-half  unit  of 
credit.  This  course  may  be  repealedfor  credit. 

10-19     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 


46 


80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


MUSIC 

Assistant  Professors:  Boerckel 
(Chairperson).  Jeffers,  Thayer 

Part-time  Instructors:  Freed, 
Gallup,  Guth,  Lakey, 
Nacinovich,  Payn,  Russell 

The  music  major  is  required  to  take  a 
balanced  program  of  theory,  applied 
music,  music  history,  and  music  ensem- 
ble. A  minimum  of  eight  courses  (exclu- 
sive of  all  ensemble  and  applied  music 
courses  except  Music  46)  is  required, 
and  these  must  include  Music  10,  1 1 ,  20, 
21 ,  35  and  36.  Each  major  must  partici- 
pate in  an  ensemble  (Music  67,  68  and/or 
69)  and  take  one  hour  of  applied  music 
per  week  for  a  minimum  of  four  semes- 
ters. (See  Music  60-66).  The  major  must 
include  at  least  one-half  hour  of  piano  in 
the  applied  program  Unless  a  piano  profi- 
ciency test  is  requested  and  passed.  Any- 
one declaring  music  as  a  second  major 
must  do  so  by  the  beginning  of  the  junior 
year. 

The  Music  Department  recommends 
that  non-majors  select  courses  from  the 
following  list  to  meet  distribution 
requirements:  Music  16,  17;  Music  18, 
1 9;  Music  1 3  or  Music  24  in  combination 
with  16,  17,  18  or  19. 

Student  recitals  offer  opportunities  to 
gain  experience  in  public  performance. 
Music  majors  and  other  students  quali- 
fied in  performance  may  present  formal 
recitals. 


10-11     MUSIC  THEORY  I  AND  II 

A  two-semester  course  open  to  all  students. 
An  examination  of  the  fundamental  compo- 
nents and  theoretical  concepts  of  music.  The 
student  will  develop  musicianship  through 
application  of  applied  skills.  iMusic  10  is 
prerequisite  to  Music  II). 

13     MUSIC  OF  TODAY 

Non-technical  survey  of  styles,  techniques 
and  contents  of  music  produced  since  1930. 


with  emphasis  on  developments  in  electronic 
music.  Leading  figures  of  major  contempor- 
ary movements  in  music,  literature  and  the 
visual  arts  and  their  works  will  be  presented 
and  discussed  in  relation  to  musical  culture. 
The  course  will  include  some  practical  expo- 
sure to  the  electronic  music  studio  and  record- 
ing techniques. 

16  INTRODUCTION  TO  MUSIC 

A  basic  course  in  the  materials  and  techniques 
of  music.  Examples  drawn  from  vanous  per- 
iods and  styles  are  designed  to  enhance  per- 
ception and  appreciation  through  careful  and 
informed  listening. 

17  SURVEY  OF  WESTERN  MUSIC 

A  chronological  survey  of  music  in  Western 
civilization  from  Middle  Ages  to  the  present. 
Composers  and  musical  styles  are  considered 
in  the  context  of  the  broader  culture  of  each 
major  era. 

18  AMERICAN  MUSIC  I 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in 
studying  all  types  of  American  music,  from 
pre-Revolutionary  days  through  Worid  War  1. 
Areas  explored  will  include  Indian.  African, 
and  European  roots  influencing  the  serious 
music  for  small  and  large  ensembles,  the 
development  of  show  music  from  minstrels  to 
Broadway  musicals,  the  evolution  of  "Tin 
Pan  Alley,"  and  the  beginnings  of  jazz.  Aller- 


19     AMERICAN  MUSIC  II 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in 
studying  all  types  of  American  music.  Ameri- 
can Music  II  will  cover  post-world  War  I  days 
to  the  present.  Areas  explored  will  include 
indigenous  serious  music  for  small  and  large 
ensembles,  the  mature  Broadway  musical,  the 
evolution  of  jazz,  the  development  of  rock, 
and  the  fusion  of  musical  styles  in  the  1970's. 
Alternate  years. 

20-21      MUSIC  THEORY  III  AND  IV 

A  continuation  of  the  integrated  theory  course 
moving  toward  newer  uses  of  music  malenals. 
Prerequisite:  Music  II.  Alternate  years. 

24  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  I 

Technical  introduction  to  synthesizer  studio 
techniques.  Topics  will  include  musical 
acoustics,  basic  recording,  sound  generation 
and  modification  devices  and  the  analysis  of 
relevant  examples  in  popular  and  avant-garde 
styles.  Students  will  produce  synthesized  tape 
projects  dunng  assigned  studio  hours.  Alter- 
nate  years. 

25  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  II 

Further  consideration  of  recording  tech- 
niques. Use  of  microphones,  multi-track 
recording,  mixing,  special  effects  devices  and 


synchronization  will  be  introduced.  Students 
will  take  part  in  live  recording  of  concerts  and 
rehearsals  of  a  variety  of  ensembles.  Student 
projects  will  include  complete  recording  ses- 
sions and  the  production  of  electronic  music 
compositions  utilizing  classical  studio  tech- 
niques and  real-time  networks.  Prerequisite: 
Music  24  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 

30  COMPOSITION  I 

Creative  writing  in  smaller  vocal  and  instru- 
mental forms.  Students  identify  and  use  the 
techniques  employed  by  major  composers  of 
the  20th  century.  Prerequisite:  Music  II  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

31  CONDUCTING 

A  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  conducting 
with  frequent  opportunity  for  practical  experi- 
ence. The  College  music  organizations  serve 
to  make  performance  experience  possible. 
Prerequisite:  Music  10-11  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

35  HISTORY  OF  WESTERN  MUSIC  I 

The  development  of  musical  styles  and  forms 
from  Gregorian  chant  through  Mozart, 
including  composers  from  the  medieval. 
Renaissance,  baroque  and  early  classical  eras. 
Prerequisite:  Music  10.  16.  or  17  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

36  HISTORY  OF  WESTERN  MUSIC  II 

The  development  of  musical  styles  and  forms 
from  Beethoven  to  the  present,  including 
composers  from  the  late  classical,  romantic 
and  modem  eras.  Prerequisite:  Music  35  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

39  ORCHESTRATION 

A  study  of  modem  orchestral  instruments  and 
examination  of  their  use  by  the  great  masters 
with  practical  problems  in  instrumentation. 
The  College  music  organizations  serve  to 
make  performance  experience  possible.  Pre- 
requisite: Music  10-11  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Alternate  years. 

40  COMPOSITION  II 

Creative  writing  in  larger  vocal  and  instru- 
mental forms.  Students  write  more  extended 
works  in  order  to  develop  an  individual  style 
of  composition.  Prerequsite:  Music  30  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

42     PROJECTS  IN  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC 

Digital  techniques  of  Electronic  Music  pro- 
duction. Notation  systems  for  electronic  mus- 
ic. Aesthetics  of  electronic  music.  Students 
will  use  the  full  resources  of  the  studio  to 
complete  original  compositions  and  will 
study,  prepare  and  present  works  by  major 
composers  of  electronic  music.  Prerequisite: 
Music  25  or  consent  of  instructor. 


47 


45  SPECIAL  TOPICS  IN  MUSIC 

The  intensive  study  of  a  selected  area  of  music 
literature,  designed  to  develop  research  tech- 
niques in  music.  The  topic  is  announced  at  the 
Spring  pre-registration.  Sample  topics 
include:  Beethoven.  Impressionism,  Vienna 
1900-1914.  Prerequisite.  Music  16.  17  or  21 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

46  RECITAL 

The  preparation  and  presentation  of  a  full- 
lenglh  public  recital,  normally  during  the  stu- 
dent's senior  year.  Prerequisite:  approval  hy 
the  department. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 

Applied  Music  and  Ensemble 

The  study  of  petformance  in  piano, 
voice,  organ,  strings,  woodwinds,  and 
percussion  is  designed  to  develop  sound 
technique  and  a  knowledge  of  the  appro- 
priate literature  for  the  instrument.  Stu- 
dent recitals  offer  opportunities  to  gain 
experience  in  public  performance. 

Credit  for  applied  music  courses  (pri- 
vate lessons)  and  ensemble  (choir, 
orchestra  and  band)  is  earned  on  a  frac- 
tional basis.  For  a  description  of  this,  see 
page  6.  An  applied  course  or  ensemble 
should  NOT  be  substituted  for  an 
academic  course,  but  should  in  every 
case  be  in  addition  to  the  normal  four 
academic  courses. 

Extra  fees  apply  for  private  lessons 
(Music  60-66)  as  follows: 
$110  per  semester  for  a  half-hour  lesson 
per  week.  $220  per  semester  for  an  hour 
lesson  per  week.  Private  lessons  are 
given  for  13  weeks. 
60  Piano,  6 1  Voice ,  62  Strings  or  Guitar, 
63  Organ,  64  Brass,  65  Woodwinds,  66 
Percussion. 

67     ORCHESTRAL  ENSEMBLE 

The  Williamsport  Symphony  Orchestra 
allows  students  with  significant  instrumental 
expenence  to  become  members  of  this  region- 
al ensemble  Participation  in  the  W.S.O.  is 
contingent  upon  audition  and  the  availability 
of  openings.  Students  are  allowed  a  maximum 
of  one  hour  of  Ensemble  credit  per  semester. 
A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  orchestra  onlv 


should  register  for  Music  67B  (one  hour  cred- 
it). A  student  may  belong  to  two  ensembles, 
choosing  either  Choir  or  Wind  Ensemble  as 
the  second  group.  Such  a  student  will  then 
register  for  Music  67A  ('/;  hour  credit)  plus 
either  Music  68A  ('/:  hour  credit)  or  Music 
69A  (V2  hour  credit). 

68  CHORAL  ENSEMBLE  (CHOIR) 
Participation  in  the  College  choir  is  designed 
to  enable  any  student  possessing  at  least  aver- 
age talent  an  opportunity  to  study  choral  tech- 
nique. Emphasis  is  placed  upon  acquaintance 
with  choral  literature,  tone  production,  dic- 
tion, and  phrasing.  Students  are  allowed  a 
maximum  of  one  hour  of  Ensemble  credit  per 
semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  Choir 
only  should  register  for  Music  68B  (one  hour 
credit).  A  student  may  belong  to  two  ensem- 
bles, choosing  either  Orchestra  or  Wind 
Ensemble  as  the  second  group.  Such  a  student 
will  then  register  for  Music  68A  iVz  hour 
credit)  plus  either  Music  67A  ('/:  hour  credit) 
or  Music  69A  {'A  hour  credit). 

69  WIND  ENSEMBLE  (BAND) 

The  College  Wind  Ensemble  allows  students 
with  some  instrumental  experience  to  become 
acquainted  with  good  band  literature  and 
develop  personal  musicianship  through  parti- 
cipation in  group  instrumental  activity.  Stu- 
dents are  allowed  a  maximum  of  one  hour  of 
Ensemble  credit  per  semester.  A  student  who 
is  enrolled  in  Band  only  should  register  for 
Music  69B  (one  hour  credit).  A  student  may 
belong  to  two  ensembles,  choosing  either 
Orchestra  or  Choir  as  the  second  group.  Such 
a  student  will  then  register  for  Music  69A  ( '/: 
hour  credit)  plus  either  Music  67A  ('/;  hour 
credit)  or  Music  68A  ('/;;  hour  credit). 


NEAR  EAST  CULTURE 

AND  ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor:  Guerra  (Coordinator) 

The  Near  East  culture  and  archaeology 
interdisciplinary  major  is  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  "cradle  of 
Western  civilization,"  both  in  its  ancient 
and  modem  aspects.  Majors  will  com- 
plete a  minimum  of  eight  to  10  courses 
related  to  the  Near  East. 

Required  courses  are  described  in  their 
departmental  sections  and  include: 
1.   Four  courses  (semesters)  in  lan- 
guage and  culture  from: 
History  and  Culture  of  the  Ancient 
Near  East  (Religion  28) 


History  of  Art  (Art  22) 
Ancient  History  (History  20) 
Old  Testament  Faith  and  History 
(Religion  13) 

Judaism  and  Islam  (Religion  24) 
Two  semesters  of  foreign  language 
(Hebrew  1,  2  or  Greek  1,  2) 

2.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  archaeol- 
ogy from: 

Biblical  Archaeology  (Religion  26) 
Special  Archaeology  courses,  such  as 
independent  studies  or  in  May  or 
summer  terms  in  the  Near  East. 

3.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  the 
cooperating  departments  (art,  his- 
tory, political  science,  religion  and 
sociology-anthropology)  or  related 
departments.  These  two  courses,  usu- 
ally taken  in  the  junior  or  senior 
years,  can  be  independent  study. 
Topics  should  be  related  either  to  the 
ancient  or  the  modem  Near  East  and 
must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the 
committee  supervising  the  interdis- 
ciplinary program.  The  study  of  mod- 
em Arabic  or  Hebrew  is  encouraged. 

Other  courses  may  be  suggested  by  the 
supervisory  committee  within  the  limits 
of  a  10-course  major.  The  number  of 
courses  taken  within  this  program  appli- 
cable toward  fulfilling  the  College  distri- 
bution requirements  will  vary  according 
to  the  selection  of  courses. 


NURSING 

Professor:  Rodgers,  (Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professors:  Jacoby, 

Parrish,  Boroch 
Instructors:  Atkinson 

Pagana  (on  leave) 

Students  wishing  to  major  in  nursing 
will  be  admitted  to  the  College  under  the 
usual  admission  procedures.  Freshmen 
should  follow  the  nursing  curriculum 
plan  for  the  freshman  year  in  the  sequ- 
ence designated.  To  be  considered  for 
continuation  in  nursing,  a  minimum 
G.P.A.  of  2.5  is  required  at  completion 
of  the  freshman  year.  A  supplementary 


48 


application  should  be  submitted  to  the 
Department  of  Nursing  by  January  15  of 
the  freshman  year. 

Clinical  Learning  Resources 

In  addition  to  the  College's  new  well- 
equipped  Nursing  Skills  Lab.  opportun- 
ity for  self-learning  is  provided  in  the 
adjacent  Learning  Center  which  is 
equipped  with  electronic  study  carrels 
and  audio-visual  materials. 

A  wide  variety  of  health-care  agencies 
in  the  surrounding  area  are  utilized  for 
clinical  experiences.  Cooperating  hos- 
pitals and  agencies  include:  Divine 
Providence  Hospital,  Williamsport  Hos- 
pital, Evangelical  Hospital,  Geisinger 
Medical  Center,  Leader  Nursing  Home 
and  Rehabilitation  Center,  Danville 
State  Hospital,  Pennsylvania  Depart- 
ment of  Health.  Regional  Home  Health 
Services  and  the  County  Health 
Improvement  Plan  (CHIP). 

Expenses  of  the  Nursing  Program 

Students  are  responsible  for  their  own 
transportation  to  assigned  clinical  areas. 
The  student  of  nursing  assumes  all  finan- 
cial obligations  listed  in  the  section  on 
fees  in  this  bulletin  including  a  $40  lab 
fee  for  each  of  the  clinical  nursing 
courses  (Nursing  21,  30,  31,  32,33,36, 
40  and  41 ).  Additional  expenses  include 
uniforms,  name  pin,  watch  with  second 
hand,  bandage  scissors,  stethoscope, 
blood  pressure  cuff,  malpractice  insur- 
ance, annual  health  examinations,  and 
standardized  achievement  tests. 

Major  in  Nursing 

The  major  in  nursing  consists  of: 
Nursing  20,  21,  30,  31,  32,  33,  34,  35, 
36,  40";  41,  42,  and  43  or  80-89.  In 
addition,  the  following  are  prerequisites 
for  specific  nursing  courses:  Chemistry 
8,  15;  Biology  O^-M,  26;  Psychology 
10,  17;  Mathematics  13,  and  Computer 
Science  15.  The  religion/philosophy 
distribution  requirement  is  met  by  the 
required  courses:  Philosophy  19  and 
Religion  20.  The  history/social  science 
distribution  requirement  is  met  by  the 
required  courses:  Psychology  10  and  17. 
In  addition,  the  student  is  required  to  take 
one  course  from  amona  Socioloav/ 


Anthropology  10,  14,  20,  28,  or  29.  The 
fine  arts/foreign  language  distribution 
requirement  can  be  met  by  two  courses  in 
one  department  from  among  art,  litera- 
ture, music,  or  theatre;  or  by  two  courses 
in  foreign  language  on  the  intennediate 
or  higher  course  level. 

Unless  otherwise  indicated,  nursing 
courses  are  open  only  to  nursing  majors. 

Policies  Specific  to  Nursing 

In  addition  to  the  Lycoming  College 
continuance  policies,  the  following  poli- 
cies are  specific  to  all  declared  majors  in 
the  Department  of  Nursing: 

1 .  A  grade  of  C  or  better  is  required  in 
all  clinical  nursing  courses  to  con- 
tinue in  the  nursing  program.  These 
courses  are  Nursing  21,  30,  31,  32, 
33 ,  36,  40  and  4 1 .  Students  who  earn 
a  grade  of  less  than  70  percent  or  C  in 
either  the  theoretical  or  clinical  com- 
ponent of  a  nursing  course  will 
receive  a  course  grade  of  F  and  will  be 
required  to  repeat  both  components  of 
the  course.  Students  who  receive  a 
nursing  grade  of  F  will  not  be  permit- 
ted to  continue  in  the  nursing  sequ- 
ence until  the  deficiency  has  been 
made  up. 

2.  Policies  regarding  absence  from  clas- 
ses or  from  the  clinical  portion  of 
nursing  courses  are  determined  by  the 
instructor(s)  responsible  for  the 
course.  No  absence  from  the  clinical 
portion  of  the  course  will  be  excused 
except  for  illness  or  a  family 
emergency.  Excessive  absences  for 
any  reason  will  necessitate  repeating 
the  entire  course. 


Typical  Plan  of  Study  for  B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN  YEAR 

Fall 

Chem.  8*  (Inorganic  Chemistry)..  1 

Eng.  6  (Composition) 1 

Psych.  10*  (Intro  to  Psych.) 1 

Fine  Arts/Lang 1 

Physical  Education 0 

4 


Spring 

Chem.  15*  (Brief  Organic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng.  Elective  1 

Psych.  17*  (Developmental 

Psych.) 1 

Fine  Arts/Lang 1 

Physical  Education 0 

4 

SOPHOMORE  YEAR 

Fall 

Bio.  13  (Anatomy  and 

Physiology) 1 

Math.  15  (Intro  to  Statistics) 1 

Nur.  20  (Concepts  of  Nutrition 

in  Family  Health) 75 

Rel.  20  (Death  and  Dying) I 

3.75 

Spring 

Bio.  14  (Anatomy  and 

Physiology) 1 

Math  13  (Intro,  to 

Computer  Sci. )    1 

Bio.  26  (Microbiology  for 

Health  Sciences) 1 

Nur.  21  (Foundations  of 

Professional  Practice) 1.25 

4.25 


JUNIOR  YEAR 


Fall 
Nur. 

Nur. 

Nur. 


30  (Nursing  Care  of  the 

Developing  Family  I) 1.5 

32  (Nursing  Care  of  the 

Adult  i)  1.5 

34  (Basic  Concepts  of 

Pharmacology  and 

Therapeutics) 1 


Spring 

Nur.  31  (Nursing  Care  of  the 

Developing  Family  II). 
Nur.  33  (Nursing  Care  of 

the  Adult  II) 

Nur.  35  (Research  in  Nursing)  . 


1.5 

1.5 
1 


49 


May  Term 

Nur.  36  (The  Nurse  in  the 
Social  System) .... 


SENIOR  YEAR 

Fall 

Nur.  40  (Nursing  Care  of  the 
Emotionally  Troubled 
Individual  and  Family) ...  1.5 

Elective 1 

Guided  Elective**  1 

Nur.  43  (Topics  in  Nursing) 5 

4 

Spring 

Nur.  41  (Comprehensive 

Nursing  Care) 1.5 

Nur.  42  (Professional 

Issues) 5 

Phil.  19  (Ethical  Issues  in 

Biology  and  Medicine) ...  1 


♦Prerequisite  to  Sophomore  year. 
**Student  must  select  one  course  from 
Sociology/Anthropology  which  may  be 
taken  at  any  point  in  the  program. 
Recommended  courses  at  this  time  are 
Soc.  10.  soc.  20,  Soc.  28,  Anth.  14  and 
Anth.  29. 

Requirement  for  Graduation:  32  Units 
(128  Credits). 

The  student  may  take  additional  units 
for  electives,  independent  study 
and/or  honors. 


20  CONCEPTS  OF  NUTRITION 
IN  FAMILY  HEALTH 

Essentials  ol  normal  nutrition  and  their  rela- 
tionship to  the  health  of  individuals  and  fami- 
lies. These  concepts  serve  as  a  basis  for  the 
development  of  an  understanding  of  thera- 
peutic application  of  dietary  principles  and  the 
health  professional's  role  and  responsibility  in 
this  facet  of  client  care.  Three  hours  of  lec- 
ture, '/j  unit.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  S,  15. 
or  consent  of  instructor.  Open  to  non-nursing 
majors. 

21  FOUNDATIONS  OF 
PROFESSIONAL  NURSING  PRACTICE 
Introduction  of  major  theoretical  elements 
underlying  professional  nursing  practice. 
Focus  on  the  concept  of  health  and  common 
health   problems  recognizing  the   multi- 


directional intluence  of  the  individual,  family, 
and  environment.  In  this  first  clinical  course 
the  student  will  utilize  the  nursing  process  in 
assisting  clients  to  attain  a  maximum  level  of 
functioning.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  five 
hours  clinical  laboratory.  I 'A  units.  Prere- 
quisites: Chemistry  8,  15,  Nursing  20.  and 
Biology  13. 

30-3 1  NURSING  CARE  OF  THE 
DEVELOPING  FAMILY 
Examination  of  health  and  nursing  needs  of 
beginning  and  developing  families.  Emphasis 
on  nursing  needs  of  mothers  and  infants  within 
the  family  unit  as  well  as  the  common  health 
problems  of  children  through  adolescence. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  Th  hours  clinical 
laboratory.  J'/:  units.  Prerequisite  for  Nurs- 
ing JO:  Nursing  21 ,  Biology  14  and  26.  Prere- 
quisite for  Nursing  31:  Nursing  30  and  34. 

32-33     NURSING  CARE  OF  THE  ADULT 

Identification  of  adult  health  care  needs  and 
implementation  of  nursing  activities  based  on 
an  understanding  of  growth  and  development, 
pathophysiology,  communication  skills, 
interpersonal  dynamics,  and  psychosocial 
interventions.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  Th 
hours  clinical  laboratory  /'/:■  units.  Prere- 
quisiteforNursing32: Nursing21 .  Biology  14 
and  26.  Prerequisite  for  Nursing  33:  Nursing 
32  and  34. 

34  BASIC  CONCEPTS  OF 
PHARMACOLOGY  AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals  of  pharmacology  and  thera- 
peutics are  presented  for  the  various  classes  of 
drugs.  Relationships  of  pharmacological 
mechanisms  to  the  affected  biochemical  and 
physiological  processes.  Interactions  and 
toxicologica  aspects  of  drug  therapy  are 
reviewed.  Four  hours  of  lecture.  I  unit.  Co- 
requisite:  Nursing  30,  32.  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Open  to  non-nursing  majors. 

35  RESEARCH  IN  NURSING 

Expansion  of  theoretical  basis  of  research 
methodology  with  emphasis  on  analyzing, 
criticizing,  and  interpreting  nursing  research. 
Development  of  a  research  proposal  focusing 
on  a  nursing  problem.  Fmir  hours  of  lecture.  I 
unit.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  13.  Compu- 
ter Science  15.  and  Nursing  30  and  32  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Open  to  non-majors. 

36  THE  NURSE  IN  THE  SOCIAL  SYSTEM 
Seminar  discussions  and  clinical  laboratory 
using  (he  hospital  as  a  prototype.  Theories  of 
social  systems.  Examination  of  induction  into 
the  hospital  system  Evaluation  of  standards 
of  care.  Focus  on  utilization  of  change  theory. 
Twelve  hours  of  lecture  and  96  hours  of  clini- 
cal laboratory.  I  unit  Prerequisites:  Nursing 
31.  33.  34  and  35.  Required  for  the  nursing 
major  and  offered  only  in  May  term 


40  NURSING  CARE  OF  THE 
EMOTIONALLY  TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL  AND  FAMILY 
Examination  of  disturbed  human  relationships 
with  focus  on  intrapsychic,  interpersonal,  and 
physiologic  etiology.  Emphasis  on  advanced 
therapeutic  nurse-patient  relationships  within 
context  of  family .  community .  and  health  care 
systems.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  7'/-  hours 
clinical  laboratory,  /'/r  units.  Prerequisites: 
Nursing  31.  33.  36. 

41  COMPREHENSIVE  NURSING  CARE 
Culminating  nursing  course  with  focus  on 
utilizing  nursing  theory  in  a  choice  of  clinical 
settings.  Seminars  will  provide  opportunities 
for  students  to  share  commonalities  and 
unique  aspects  of  professional  practice.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  7'/;  hours  of  clinical 
laboratory  I'/:  units.  Prerequisites:  Nursmg 
36.  40. 

42  PROFESSIONAL  ISSUES 

An  analysis  of  nursing  issues  in  the  context  of 
the  historical  background  of  the  profession, 
the  social  forces  which  influence  nursing,  and 
nursing's  impact  upon  society.  Two-hour 
seminar.  '/:  unit.  Prerequisite:  Senior  stand- 
ing. 

43  TOPICS  IN  NURSING 

Selected  topic  courses  in  nursing  designed  to 
permit  students  to  pursue  subjects  which, 
because  of  their  specialized  nature,  may  not  be 
offered  on  a  regular  basis,  '/r  unit.  Prerequis- 
ite: Senior  standing. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
IN  NURSING 
An  opportunity  to  develop  and  implement  an 
individual  plan  of  study  under  faculty  guid- 
ance. '/."  unit.  Prerequisite:  Senior  standing  or 
consent  of  chairperson. 

PHILOSOPHY 


Associate  Professor:  Griffith 

(Chairperson).  Whelan 
Assistant  Professor:  Herring 

The  study  of  philosophy  develops  a 
critical  understanding  of  the  basic  con- 
cepts and  presuppositions  around  which 
we  organize  our  thought  in  science, 
religion,  education,  morality,  the  arts, 
and  other  human  enterprises.  A  major  in 
philosophy,  together  with  appropriate 
other  courses,  can  provide  an  excellent 
preparation  for  policy-making  positions 
of  many  kinds,  for  graduate  study  in 
several  fields,  and  for  careers  in  educa- 


50 


tion.  law.  and  the  ministry.  The  major  in 
philosophy  consists  of  eight  courses 
numbered  10  or  above,  including  38.  39, 
49  and  at  least  three  other  courses  num- 
bered 25  or  above. 

A  minor  in  Philosophy  consists  of  any 
four  philosophy  courses  numbered  20  or 
above.  Three  more  specialized  minors 
are  also  available.  A  minor  in  Philosophy 
and  Law  consists  of  four  courses  from 
Philosophy  21,  22,  25,  34.  35.  49  or 
Studies;  a  minor  in  Philosophy  and  Sci- 
ence requires  completion  of  four  courses 
from  Philosophy  21.  22,  25,  33,  49  or 
Studies;  a  minor  in  the  History  of  Philo- 
sophy may  be  completed  by  selecting 
four  courses  from  Philosophy  21 ,  22,  38, 
39.  49  or  Studies.  Any  courses  selected 
from  Philosophy  49.  80,  81,  90  and  91 
must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the 
department,  and  only  one  unit  may  be 
used  from  among  80.  81.  90.  and  91  to 
complete  the  requirements  of  any  of 
these  three  minors: 

5       PRACTICAL  REASONING 

A  general  introduction  to  topics  in  logic  and 
their  application  to  practical  reasoning,  with 
primary  emphasis  on  detecing  fallacies,  eva- 
luating inductive  reasoning,  and  understand- 
ing the  rudiments  of  scientific  method. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL  PROBLEMS 

An  mtroduclory  course  designed  to  show  the 
nature  of  philosophy  by  examination  of  sever- 
al examples  of  problems  which  have  received 
extended  attention  in  philosophical  literature. 
These  topics  often  include  the  relation  of  the 
mind  to  the  body,  the  possibility  of  human 
freedom,  arguments  about  the  existence  of 
God.  the  conditions  of  knowledge,  and  the 
relation  of  language  to  thought.  Some  atten- 
tion is  also  given  to  the  principles  of  accept- 
able reasoning. 

14  PHILOSOPHY  AND 
PERSONAL  CHOICE 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of 
a  number  of  contemporary  moral  issues  which 
call  for  personal  decision.  Topics  often  inves- 
tigated include:  the  "good"  life,  obligation  to 
others,  sexual  ethics,  abortion,  suicide  and 
death .  violence  and  pacifism .  obedience  to  the 
law,  the  relevance  of  personal  beliefs  to  mor- 
ality. Discussion  centers  on  some  of  the  sug- 
gestions philosophers  have  made  about  how  to 
make  such  decisions. 

15  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PUBLIC  POLICY 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of 


the  moral  and  conceptual  dimension  of  vari- 
ous contemporary  public  issues,  such  as  the 
relation  of  ethics  to  politics  and  the  law,  the 
enforcement  of  morals,  the  problems  of  fair 
distribution  of  goods  and  opportunities,  the 
legitimacy  of  restricing  the  use  of  natural 
resources,  and  the  application  of  ethics  to 
business  practice.  Discussion  centers  on  some 
of  the  suggestions  philosophers  have  made 
about  how  to  deal  with  these  issues. 

16  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN  BUSINESS 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of 
a  variety  of  moral  problems  that  arise  con- 
cerning the  American  business  system. 
Included  are  a  systematic  consideration  of 
typical  moral  problems  faced  by  individuals 
and  an  examination  of  common  moral  critic- 
isms of  the  business  system  itself. 

17  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES 
IN  EDUCATION 

An  examination  of  the  basic  concepts 
involved  in  thought  about  education,  and  a 
consideration  of  the  various  methods  for  jus- 
tifying educational  proposals.  Typical  of  the 
issues  discussed  are:  Are  education  and 
indoctrination  different?  What  is  a  liberal  edu- 
cation? Are  education  and  schooling  compati- 
ble? What  do  we  need  to  leam?  Alternate 


18  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES 
IN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

An  introductory  examination  of  various  philo- 
sophical issues  and  concepts  which  are  of 
special  importance  in  legal  contexts.  Discus- 
sion includes  both  general  topics,  such  as  the 
justification  of  punishment,  and  more  specific 
topics,  such  as  the  insanity  defense  and  the 
nghts  of  the  accused.  Readings  are  arranged 
topically  and  include  both  classical  and  con- 
temporary sources. 

19  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN 
BIOLOGY  AND  MEDICINE 

A  philosophical  investigation  of  some  of  the 
ethical  issues  which  arise  as  a  result  of  con- 
temporary medical  and  biological  technology. 
Typical  of  these  issues  are  euthanasia,  beha- 
vior control,  patient  rights,  experimentation 
on  humans,  fetal  research,  abortion,  genetic 
engineering,  population  control,  and  distribu- 
tion of  health  resources. 

2 1  -22     INTRODUCTION  TO  THE 
HISTORY  OF  PHILOSOPHY 

An  introductory  survey  of  the  history  of  philo- 
sophy from  the  ancient  Greeks  through  the 
early  modem  period.  Particular  attention  will 
be  paid  to  the  common  origins  of  philosophy 
and  science  and  their  subsequent  relationship 
and  to  the  role  which  philosophy  has  played  in 
the  evolution  of  social  and  political  thought. 
Philosophy  21  is  not  a  prerequisite  for  Philo- 
sophy 22. 


25     SYMBOLIC  LOGIC 

A  study  of  modem  symbolic  logic  and  its 
application  to  the  analysis  of  arguments. 
Included  are  tmth-functional  relations,  the 
logic  of  prepositional  functions,  and  deduc- 
tive systems.  Attention  is  also  given  to  various 
topics  in  the  philosophy  of  logic. 

31  PHILOSOPHY  AND  HUMAN  NATURE 
An  examination  of  a  variety  of  classical  and 
contemporary  philosophical  questions  about 
human  nature.  Among  the  questions  typically 
considered  are  these:  Is  there  such  a  thing  as 
human  nature?  Are  human  beings  different,  in 
any  fundamental  way.  from  other  animals? 
Are  human  beings  free?  Is  human  conscious- 
ness just  a  brain  process?  Are  human  beings 
inherently  predisposed  to  evil?  Are  human 
beings  biologically  determined  to  be  selfish  or 
aggressive?  Are  the  differences  in  achieve- 
ment between  men  and  women  biologically 
based?  Prerequisite:  Students  without  previ- 
ous study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor' s 
permission. 

32  PHILOSOPHY  OF  RELIGION 

A  philosophical  examination  of  religion. 
Included  are  such  topics  as  the  nature  of  reli- 
gious discourse,  arguments  for  and  against  the 
existence  of  God,  and  the  relation  between 
religion  and  science.  Readings  from  classical 
and  contemporary  sources.  Prerequisite:  stu- 
dents without  previous  study  in  philosophy 
must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate 


33  PHILOSOPHY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCE 
A  consideration  of  philosophically  important 
conceptual  problems  arising  from  reflection 
about  natural  science,  including  such  topics  as 
the  nature  of  scientific  laws  and  theories,  the 
character  of  explanation,  the  import  of  pre- 
diction, the  existence  of  "non-observable" 
theoretical  entities  such  as  electrons  and 
genes,  the  problem  of  justifying  induction, 
and  various  puzzles  associated  with  probabil- 
ity. Prerequisite:  students  without  previous 
study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's 
permission.  Alternate  years. 

34  SOCIAL  AND 
POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

A  systematic  philosophical  investigation  of 
the  relation  between  human  nature  and  the 
proper  social  and  political  order.  Topics  stud- 
ied include  the  purpose  of  govemment.  the 
nature  of  legitimate  authority,  the  foundation 
of  human  nghts.  and  the  limits  of  human 
freedom.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  logic  of 
social  and  political  thought  and  on  the  analysis 
of  basic  principles  and  concepts.  Prerequisite: 
students  without  previous  philosophy  must 
have  instructor's  permission. 

35  ETHICAL  THEORY 

An  inquiry  concerning  the  grounds  which 


51 


distinguish  morally  right  from  morally  wrong 
actions.  Central  to  the  course  is  critical  con- 
sideration of  the  proposals  and  the  rationale  of 
relativists,  egoists,  utilitarians,  and  other  ethi- 
cal theorists.  Various  topics  in  metaethics  are 
also  included.  Prerequisite:  students  without 
previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have 
instructor's  permission. 

38  ANCIENT  GREEK  PHILOSOPHY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  ancient  Greek 
philosophers,  with  particular  emphasis  on 
Plato  and  Aristotle.  Prerequisite:  two  courses 
in  philosophy  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alter- 
nate years. 

39  EARLY  MODERN  PHILOSOPHY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  Continental 
Rationalists  (Descartes.  Spinoza.  Leibniz), 
the  British  Empiricists  (Locke.  Berkeley. 
Hume)  and  Kant.  Prerequisite:  fvio  courses  in 
philosophy  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 

49     DEPARTMENTAL  SEMINAR 

An  investigation  carried  on  by  discussions  and 
papers,  into  one  philosophical  problem,  text, 
philosopher,  or  movement.  A  different  topic 
is  selected  each  semester.  Recent  topics 
include  Sidgwick's  ethics,  religious  language. 
Kierkegaard,  legal  punishment.  Wittgenstein, 
personal  identity  and  human  rights  This  semi- 
nar is  designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior 
philosophy  majors  and  other  qualified  stu- 
dents with  more  than  the  usual  opportunity  for 
concentrated  and  cooperative  inquiry.  Prere- 
quisite: consent  of  instructor.  This  seminar 
may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Recent  independent  studies  in  philosophy 
include  Nietzsche,  moral  education.  Rawls" 
theory  of  justice,  existentialism,  euthanasia. 
Plato's  ethics,  and  philosophical  aesthetics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Burch 

Assistant  Professor:  Whitehill 
Instructors:  Hair,  Holmes 

I       PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Coeducational  physical  education  classes. 
Basic  instructions  in  fundamentals,  know- 
ledge, and  appreciation  of  sports  that  include 


swimming,  tennis,  bowling,  volleyball, 
archery,  lield  hockey,  soccer,  golf,  badmin- 
ton, modem  dance,  skiing,  elementary  games 
(for  elementary  teachers),  toneastics.  physical 
fitness,  and  other  activities.  Backpacking, 
cross-country  and  alpine  skiing,  jogging,  and 
cyling  are  offered  on  a  contract  basis.  Begin- 
ning swimming  is  required  for  all  non- 
swimmers.  Students  may  select  any  activity 
offered.  A  reasonable  degree  of  proficiency  is 
required  in  the  activities.  Emphasis  is  on  the 
potential  use  of  activities  as  recreational  and 
leisure-time  interests.  Two  semesters  of 
physical  education  (two  hours  per  week)  are 
required.  All  physical  education  classes  are 
open  to  men  and  women. 

Athletic  Training 

Lycoming  College  established  an 
apprenticeship  program  in  athletic  train- 
ing in  1979  after  recognizing  two  condi- 
tions: the  importance  of  the  care  and 
prevention  of  athletic  injuries  by  trained 
professionals,  and  the  career's  promising 
growth  potential. 

To  complete  this  non-credit  program 
students  participate  in  practical  as  well  as 
classroom  work  under  the  supervision  of 
Lycoming's  certified  athletic  trainer. 
Students  become  eligible  to  participate  in 
the  National  Athletic  Trainers  Associa- 
tion (N.A.T.A.)  Certification  examina- 
tion to  earn  the  status  of  an  N.A.T.A. 
certified  trainer. 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Professor:  Giglio  (Chairperson) 
Associate  Professor:  Roskin 
Assistant  Professor:  Grogan 

The  major  is  designed  to  provide  a 
systematic  understanding  of  government 
and  politics  at  the  international,  national, 
state,  and  local  levels.  Majors  are 
encouraged  to  develop  their  faculties  to 
make  independent,  objective  analyses 
which  can  be  applied  to  the  broad  spec- 
trum of  the  social  sciences. 

Although  the  political  science  major, 
is  not  designed  as  a  vocational  major, 
students  with  such  training  may  go 
directly  into  government  service,  jour- 
nalism, teaching,  or  private  administra- 
tive agencies.  A  political  science  major 
can  provide  the  base  for  the  study  of  law. 


or  for  graduate  studies  leading  to  admin- 
strative  work  in  federal,  state,  or  local 
governments,  international  organiza- 
tions, or  college  teaching.  Students  seek- 
ing certification  to  teach  secondary 
school  social  studies  may  major  in  politi- 
cal science  but  should  consult  their 
advisers  and  the  education  department. 

A  major  consists  of  eight  political  .sci- 
ence courses,  including  Political  Science 
I6B.  Prospective  majors  are  encouraged 
to  register  for  this  course  during  their 
freshman  year.  An  exemption  will  be 
granted  only  if  it  strengthens  the  stu- 
dent's program.  In  addition  to  168,  stu- 
dents must  take  at  least  one  course  in 
each  of  five  areas  (A  to  E).  Students  are 
encouraged,  also,  to  select  a  minor  in 
another  department  in  accordance  with 
their  academic  and  career  interests  and  in 
consultation  with  their  departmental 
advisor. 

For  non-majors,  the  department  offers 
three  minors:  a  minor  in  Political  Science 
consists  of  any  four  courses  numbered  20 
or  above  from  areas  A  to  E;  a  minor  in 
Foreign  Affairs  consists  of  four  courses 
selected  from  Political  Science  20,  25, 
26,  27,  38  and  39;  and  a  minor  in  Legal 
Studies  consists  of  Political  Science  31 , 
35,  36  and  one  other  course  numbered  20 
or  above.  Students  are  encouraged  to 
consult  with  department  members  on  the 
selection  of  a  minor. 

16  INTRODUCTION  TO  POLITICS 
AND  PUBLIC  POLICY 
An  examination  of  public  policy  within  the 
context  of  American  politics.  Includes  identi- 
fication and  analysis  of  contemporary  policy 
issues,  alternative  solutions,  factors  in  for- 
mulation, and  evaluation  of  impact.  May  be 
taken  for  either  one-half  unit  (section  16A)  or 
full  unit  (section  I6B);  declared  majors  and 
prospective  majors  should  take  the  full-unit 
course.  I6B. 

A.  American  Politics 

10  GOVERNMENT  AND  POLITICS 
IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 
An  introduction  to  American  national  govern- 
ment which  emphasizes  both  structural- 
functional  analysis  and  policy-making  proces- 
ses. In  addition  to  the  legislative,  executive, 
and  judicial  branches  of  government,  atten- 
tion will  be  given  to  political  parties  and 
interest  groups,  elections  and  voting  behavior. 


52 


and  constitutional  rights.  Recommended  to  all 
social  science-education  majors  and  to  those 
students  who  have  had  inadequate  or  msuffi- 
cient  preparation  in  American  government 

1 1     STATE  AND  LOCAL  GOVERNMENT 
An  examination  of  the  general  prmciples. 
major  problems,  and  political  processes  ot  the 
states  and  their  subdivisions,  together  with 
their  role  in  a  federal  type  of  government. 

23     AMERICAN  PRESIDENCY 

A  study  of  the  office  and  powers  of  the  presi- 
dent with  analysis  of  his  major  roles  as  chief 
administrator,  legislator,  political  leader, 
foreign  policy  maker,  and  commander-in- 
chief.  Special  attention  is  given  to  those  presi- 
dents who  led  the  nation  boldly.  Subject  to 
sludenl  demand,  but  offered  al  least  once 
during  a  four-year  cycle. 


B.  Legal  Studies 

31     CIVIL  RIGHTS  AND  LIBERTIES 

What  are  our  rights  and  liberties  as  Ameri- 
cans.' What  should  they  be?  A  frank  discus- 
sion of  the  nature  and  scope  of  the  constitu- 
tional guarantees.  First  Amendment  rights, 
the  rights  of  criminal  suspects  and  defendants, 
racial  and  sexual  equality,  and  equal  protec- 
tion of  the  laws.  Students  will  read  and  brief 
the  more  important  Supreme  Court  decisions. 
Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

35  LAW  AND  SOCIETY 

An  examination  of  the  nature,  sources,  func- 
tions, and  limits  of  law  as  an  instrument  of 
political  and  social  control.  Included  for  dis- 
cussion are  legal  problems  pertaining  to  the 
family,  crime,  deviant  behavior,  poverty,  and 
minority  groups.  Prerequisite:  junior  or 
senior  standing  or  consent  of  instructor. 

36  MASS  MEDIA  LAW  AND  REGULATION 
An  examination  of  the  legal  structure  and  the 
system  by  which  mass  communication  is  con- 
trolled in  this  society.  The  forces  which  shape, 
infiuence.  and  make  policy  will  be  consid- 
ered. Cross-listed  as  Mass  Communication 
31 .  Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

C.  Applied  Politics 

33     BUREAUCRACY  AND 

PUBLIC  ADMINISTRATION 
What  is  bureaucracy?  Why  and  how  do 
bureaucracies  arise?  What  has  been  the  politi- 
cal impact  of  growth  of  bureaucracy  in  gov- 
ernment? These  questions,  among  others,  will 
be  considered  in  this  examination  of  public 
bureaucracies.  This  course  is  highly  recom- 
mended to  students  planning  to  take  an  intern- 


ship in  city  or  county  government  through  the 
political  science  department.  Subject  to  stu- 
dent demand,  but  offered  at  least  once  during 
a  four-year  cycle. 

34     POLITICAL  NEWSWRITING 

A  workshop  course  in  the  reporting  and 
rewriting  of  public  affairs  at  the  local,  nation- 
al, and  international  levels.  There  will  be 
neither  texts  nor  examinations,  but  short  wnt- 
ten  assignments  will  be  due  every  class  meet- 
ing. Prerequisite:  English  18  or  Mass  Comm 
19  or  consent  of  instructor .  Alternate  years. 

48     PUBLIC  OPINION  AND  POLLING 

A  course  dealing  with  the  general  topic  and 
methodology  of  polling.  Content  includes 
exploration  of  the  processes  by  which  peo- 
ple's political  opinions  are  formed,  the  man- 
ipulation of  public  opinion  through  the  uses  of 
propaganda,  and  the  American  response  to 
politics  and  political  issues. 

D.  Comparative  Politics 

20     EUROPEAN  POLITICS 

A  study  of  the  political  systems  of  East  and 
West  Europe  with  emphasis  on  comparison 
and  patterns  of  government.  The  course  will 
review  politics  in  Northern  (Britain.  West 
Germany.  Sweden).  Latin  (France.  Italy. 
Spain),  and  Eastern  (Soviet  Union.  East  Ger- 
many. Yugoslavia)  Europe  and  attempt  to  find 
underlying  similarities  and  differences. 

26  POLITICAL  CULTURES 

An  exploration  of  the  "people"  aspects  of 
political  life  in  several  countries.  The  way 
people  interact  with  each  other  and  with  gov- 
ernment, what  they  expect  from  the  system, 
how  they  acquire  their  political  attitudes  and 
styles,  and  how  these  contribute  to  the  type  of 
government.  Alternate  years. 

38  POLITICS  OF  DEVELOPING  AREAS 
The  causes  and  possible  cures  for  socio- 
political backwardness  in  Asia,  Africa,  and 
Latin  America   Alternate  years. 

E.  International  Relations 

25     WORLD  POLITICS 

Why  is  there  war?  An  introduction  to  interna- 
tional relations  with  emphasis  on  the  varieties 
of  conflicts  which  may  grow  into  war. 

27  CRISIS  AREAS  IN  WORLD  POLITICS 

The  study  of  several  current  areas  of  interna- 
tional tension  and  confiicl.  including  relations 
among  the  United  States.  Soviet  Union,  and 
China,  plus  the  Middle  East  and  whatever  new 
danger  spots  arise  over  lime.  Alternate  years. 

39  AMERICAN  FOREIGN  POLICY 

The  U.S.  role  in  the  world  in  geographic. 


strategic,  historical,  and  ideological  [lerspec- 
tives.  plus  an  examination  of  the  domestic 
forces  shaping  U.S.  policy.  Alternate  years. 

F.  Special  Programs 

70-79     INTERNSHIPS  (See  index) 

Students  may  receive  academic  credit  for 
serving  as  interns  in  structured  learning  situa- 
tions with  a  wide  variety  of  public  and  private 
agencies  and  organizations.  Students  have 
served  as  interns  with  the  Public  Defender's 
Office,  the  Lycoming  County  Court  Admin- 
strator.  and  the  Williamsport  City  govern- 
ment. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Current  studies  relate  to  elections  —  local, 
state,  and  federal  —  while  past  studies  have 
included  Soviet  and  world  politics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

(See  index) 


PSYCHOLOGY 


Professor:  Hancock 
Associate  Professor:  Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant  Professor:  Ryan 

The  major  provides  training  in  both 
theoretical  and  applied  psychology.  It  is 
designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  students 
seeking  careers  in  psychology  or  other 
natural  or  social  sciences.  It  also  meets 
the  needs  of  students  seeking  a  better 
understanding  of  human  behavior  as  a 
means  of  furthering  individual  and  career 
goals  in  other  areas.  Psychology  majors 
and  others  are  urged  to  discuss  course 
selections  in  psychology  with  members 
of  the  department  to  help  insure  appro- 
priate course  selection. 

A  major  consists  of  Psychology  10, 
31,  32,  36  and  four  other  psychology 
courses.  Statistics  also  is  required. 

A  minor  in  Psychology  consists  of 
Psychology  10  and  four  other  psycholo- 
gy courses  (three  of  which  must  be  num- 
bered 20  or  above)  which  must  be 
approved  by  the  department. 

10     INTRODUCTORY  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of 


53 


human  and  other  animal  behavior.  Areas  con- 
sidered may  mclude:  learning,  personality, 
social,  physiological,  sensory,  cognition,  and 
developmental. 

12     GROUP  PROCESSES  AND 

INTERPERSONAL  COMMUNICATION 
The  introduction  to  the  research  and  theory 
from  social  psychology  related  to  small-group 
dynamics  and  interpersonal  communication. 
Topics  covered  will  include  communication 
processes,  interpretation  of  motivation,  con- 
ceptualization of  individual  personalities, 
problem  solving  and  leadership.  The  first 
stage  of  the  course  will  focus  on  research  and 
theory;  the  second  half  will  emphasize  the 
development  of  skills  and  techniques  where 
.students  become  members  of  a  self-analytic 
—  practicing  the  skills  and  making  a  case 
study  of  the  processes  involved.  Ma\  term 
only. 

16  ABNORMAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

.An  introduction  to  the  patterns  of  deviant 
behavior  with  emphasis  on  cause,  function, 
and  treatment.  The  various  models  for  the 
conceptualization  of  abnormal  behavior  are 
critically  examined.  Prerequisite:  Pswhologv 
10. 

17  DEVELOPMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  principles  of  human 
growth  and  development  throughout  the  life 
span.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

18  ADOLESCENT  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  study  areas  will  include  theories  of 
adolescence;  current  issues  raised  by  as  well 
as  about  the  "generation  of  youth";  research 
findings  bearing  on  theones  and  issues  of 
growth  beyond  childhood,  and  self- 
exploration.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

24  SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  scientific  exploration  of  interpersonal 
communication  and  behavior.  Topics  include 
attitudes  and  altitude  change,  attraction  and 
communication,  social  perception  and  social 
influence,  prosocial  and  antisocial  behavior, 
and  group  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psvcholo- 
S.v  10. 

25  INDUSTRIAL  AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 
The  application  of  the  pnnciples  and  methods 
of  psychology  to  selected  industrial  and  or- 
ganizational  situations.   Prerequisite:  Psy- 
chology 10  or  consent  of  instructor. 


32  SENSORY 
EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  examination  of  psychophysical  metho- 
dology and  basic  neurophysiological  methods 
as  they  are  applied  to  the  understanding  of 
sensor  processes.  Prerequisites:  Psychology 
JO  and  statistics. 

33  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physiological  psycho- 
logist's method  of  approach  to  the  under- 
standing of  behavior  as  well  as  the  set  of 
principles  that  relate  the  function  and  organi- 
zation of  the  nervous  system  to  the  phenomena 
of  behavior.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

34  PRINCIPLES  OF  MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric  methods  and  theory,  including 
scale  transformation,  norms,  standardization, 
validation  procedures,  and  estimation  of  relia- 
bility. Prerequisites:  Psychology  10  and  sta- 
tistics. 


35  HISTORY  AND 
SYSTEMS  OF  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  growth  of  scientific  psychology  and  the 
theories  and  systems  that  have  accompanied 
its  development.  Prerequisite:  four  courses  in 
psychology. 

36  PERSONALITY  THEORY 

A  review  of  the  major  theories  of  personality 
development  and  personality  functioning.  In 
addition  to  covering  the  details  of  each  theory, 
the  implications  and  applications  of  each 
theory  will  be  considered.  Prerequisite:  Psy- 
chology 10. 

37  COGNITION 

An  investigation  of  human  mental  processes 
along  the  two  major  dimensions  directed  and 
undirected  thought.  Topic  areas  include  rec- 
ognition, attention,  conceptualization, 
problem-solving,  fantasy,  language,  dream- 
ing, and  creativitv.  Prerequisite:  Psychology 
10. 

38  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of  the 
teaching-learning  process.  Areas  considered 
may  mclude  educational  objectives,  pupil  and 
teacher  characteristics,  concept  learning, 
problem  solving  and  creativity,  attitudes  and 
values,  motivation,  retention  and  transfer, 
evaluation  and  measurement.  Prerequisite: 
Psychology  lU  or  consent  of  instructor. 


3 1     LEARNING 

EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 
Learning  processes.  The  examination  of  the 
basic  methods  and  pnnciples  of  animal  and 
human   learning.   Prerequisites:  Psychology 
10  and  statistics. 


39     BEHAVIOR  MODIFICATION 

A  detailed  examination  of  the  applied  analysis 
of  behavior.  Focus  will  be  on  the  application 
of  experimental  method  to  the  individual  clini- 
cal case.  The  course  will  cover  targeting. 
behavior,  base-rating,  intervention  strategies. 


and  outcome  evaluation  Learning-based 
modification  techniques  such  as  contingency 
management,  counter-conditioning,  extinc- 
tion, discrimination  training,  aversive  condi- 
tioning, and  negative  practice  will  be  exa- 
mined. Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

41     PSYCHOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  review  of  contemporary  theory  and  research 
on  the  psychology  of  gender  differences.  The 
major  theories  and  basic  research  on  gender 
differences  will  be  covered.  Special  topics 
include  sex  differences  in  achievement,  pow- 
er, and  communication;  sex-role  stereotypes; 
beliefs  about  masculinity  and  feminity;  and 
gender  influences  on  mental  health.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  off-campus  experience  in  a  community 
setting  offenng  psychological  services,  sup- 
plemented with  classroom  instruction  and  dis- 
cussion. Psychology  48  covers  the  basic 
counseling  skills,  while  Psychology  49  covers 
the  major  theoretical  approaches  to  counsel- 
ing. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Internships  give  students  an  opportunity  to 
relate  on-campus  academic  experiences  to 
society  in  general  and  to  their  post- 
baccalaureate  objectives  in  particular.  Stu- 
dents have,  for  example,  worked  in  pnsons, 
public  and  private  school,  county  govern- 
ment, and  for  the  American  Red  Cross. 

80-89  INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Independent  study  is  an  opponunily  for  stu- 
dents to  pursue  special  interests  in  areas  for 
which  courses  are  not  offered.  In  addition, 
students  have  an  opportunity  to  study  a  topic 
in  more  depth  than  is  possible  in  the  regular 
classroom  situation.  Studies  in  the  past  have 
included  child  abuse,  counseling  of  hospital 
patients,  and  research  in  the  psychology  of 
natural  disasters. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

(See  index) 

Honors  in  psychology  requires  original  contri- 
butions to  the  literature  of  psychology  through 
independent  study.  The  most  recent  honors 
project  was  a  study  of  the  relationship  between 
socio-economic  status  and  visual  versus  audit- 
ory learning. 


RELIGION 

Professor:  Guerra 
Associate  Professor:  Hughes 


54 


Assistant  Professor:  Robinson 
(Chairperson) 

A  major  consists  of  10  courses, 
including  Religion  13,  14,  and  20.  At 
least  seven  courses  must  be  taken  in  the 
department.  The  following  courses  may 
be  counted  toward  fulfilling  the  major 
requirements:  Greek  1 1  and  12,  Hebrew 
1 1  and  12.  History  39  and  41,  Philoso- 
phy 32,  and  Sociology  33. 

A  minor  in  Religion  consists  of  one 
course  from  Religion  10,  13,  14  and  four 
religion  courses  numbered  20  or  above. 

An  interdisciplinary  minor  in  Biblical 
Languages  requires  the  completion  of 
Greek  21,  22  and  Hebrew  21  and  22. 


10     INTRODUCTION  TO  RELIGION 

Designed  for  the  beginning  student,  this 
course  examines  what  it  means  to  be  religious. 
Some  of  the  issues  are  the  definition  of  relig- 
ion, the  meanmg  of  symbolism,  concepts  of 
God.  ecstatic  phenomena.  Specific  attention 
will  be  devoted  to  the  current  problem  of  cults 
and  religious  liberty. 

13  OLD  TESTAMENT 
FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within 
its  historical  setting  and  in  the  light  of 
archaeological  findings  to  show  the  faith  and 
religious  life  of  the  Hebrew-Jewish  commu- 
nity in  the  Biblical  period,  and  an  introduction 
to  the  history  of  interpretation  with  an  empha- 
sis on  contemporary  Old  Testament  cnticism 
and  theology. 

14  NEW  TESTAMENT 
FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within 
its  historical  setting  to  show  the  faith  and 
religious  life  of  the  Christian  community  in 
the  Biblical  period,  and  an  introduction  to  the 
history  of  interpretation  with  an  emphasis  on 
contemporary  New  Testament  criticism  and 
theology. 

17     INTRODUCTION  TO 

SUPERNATURAL  PHENOMENA 
An  examination  of  claims  for  supernatural  or 
paranormal  phenomena  with  an  emphasis  on 
critical  methodology  and  the  evaluation  of 
evidence.  The  course  is  designed  to  teach 
students  the  difference  between  the  scientific 
and  religious  methodologies,  the  proper  role 
of  each,  and  the  hazards  of  mixing  the  two. 
Subjects  covered  include  ESP.  Spiritualism, 
the  Bermuda  Triangle,  witchcraft,  faith  heal- 
ing. Noah's  Ark.  ghosts,  monsters,  and 
others.  Offered  May  and  summer  terms  only. 


20  DEATH  AND  DYING 

A  study  of  death  from  personal,  social,  and 
universal  standpoints  with  emphasis  upon 
what  the  dying  may  teach  the  living.  Principal 
issues  are  the  stages  of  dying,  bereavement, 
suicide,  funeral  conduct,  and  the  religious 
doctrines  of  death  and  immortality.  Course 
includes,  as  optional,  practical  projects  with 
terminal  patients  under  professional  supervi- 
sion. Only  one  course  from  the  combination 
20-21  may  be  used  for  distribution. 

21  AFTER  DEATH  AND  DYING 

An  examination  of  the  question  of  life  after 
death  in  terms  of  contemporary  clinical  stud- 
ies, the  New  Testament  resurrection  narra- 
tives, the  Asian  doclnne  of  reincarnation,  and 
the  classical  theological  beliefs  of  providence 
and  predestination  Religion  20  is  recom- 
mended but  not  required.  Only  one  course 
from  the  combination  20-21  may  be  used  for 
distribution. 

22  PROTESTANTISM  IN 
THE  MODERN  WORLD 

An  examination  of  Protestant  thought  and  life 
from  Luther  to  the  present  against  the  back- 
drop of  a  culture  rapidly  changing  from  the 
1 7th  century  scientific  revolution  to  Marxism, 
Darwinism,  and  depth  psychology.  Special 
attention  will  be  paid  to  the  constant  interac- 
tion between  Protestantism  and  the  world  in 
which  it  finds  itself. 

2.^     CHRISTIAN  ORIGINS 

A  study  of  the  historical,  cultural,  and  reli- 
gious background  of  the  formation  of  Christ- 
ianity and  the  antecedents  of  Christian  belief 
and  practice  in  post-exilic  Judaism  and  in 
Hellenism. 

24  JUDAISM  AND  ISLAM 

An  examination  of  the  rise,  growth,  and 
expansion  of  Judaism  and  Islam  with  special 
attention  given  to  the  theological  contents  of 
the  literatures  of  these  religions  as  far  as  they 
are  normative  in  matters  of  faith,  practice,  and 
organization.  Also,  a  review  of  their  contn- 
butions  to  the  spiritual  heritage  of  mankind. 

25  ORIENTAL  RELIGION 

A  phenomenological  study  of  the  basic  con- 
tent of  Hinduism.  Buddhism,  and  Chinese 
Taoism  with  special  attention  to  social  and 
political  relations,  mythical  and  aesthetic 
forms,  and  the  East- West  dialogue. 

26  BIBLICAL  ARCHAEOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  role  of  archaeology  in  recon- 
structing the  worid  in  which  the  Biblical  liter- 
ature originated  with  special  attention  given  to 
archaeological  results  that  throw  light  on  the 
clarification  of  the  Biblical  text.  Also,  an 
introduction  to  basic  archaeological  method 
and  a  study  in  depth  of  several  representative 


excavations  along  with  the  artifacts  and 
material  culture  recovered  from  different  his- 
torical periods. 

28  HISTORY  AND  CULTURE  OF 
THE  ANCIENT  NEAR  EAST 
A  study  of  the  history  and  culture  of  Mesopo- 
tamia. Anatolia.  Syria-Palestine,  and  Egypt 
from  the  rise  of  the  Sumerian  culture  to  Ale- 
xander the  Great.  Careful  attention  will  be 
given  to  the  religious  views  prevalent  in  the 
ancient  Near  East  as  far  as  these  views  inter- 
acted with  the  culture  and  faith  of  Biblical 
man. 

30  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

A  study  into  the  broad  insights  of  psychology 
in  relation  to  the  phenomena  of  religion  and 
religious  behavior.  The  course  concentrates 
on  religious  experience  or  manifestations 
rather  than  concepts.  Tentative  solutions  will 
be  sought  to  questions  such  as:  What  does  it 
feel  like  to  be  religious  or  to  have  a  religious 
experience'  What  is  the  religious  function  in 
human  develoment?  How  does  one  think  psy- 
chologically about  theological  problems? 

31  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

A  study  of  Christian  ethics  as  a  normative 
perspective  for  contemporary  moral  problems 
with  emphasis  upon  the  interaction  of  law  and 
religion,  decision  making  in  the  field  of 
biomedical  practice,  and  the  reconstruction  of 
society  in  a  planetary  civilization. 

32  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  IN 
CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

An  examination  of  the  approach  of  religion 
and  other  disciplines  to  an  issue  of  current 
concern:  current  topics  include  the  theological 
significance  of  law,  the  ethics  of  love,  and  the 
Holocaust.  The  course  may  be  repeated  for 
credit  if  the  topic  is  different  from  one  previ- 
ously studied. 

37     BIBLICAL  TOPICS 

An  in-depth  study  of  Biblical  topics  related  to 
the  Old  and  New  Testaments.  Topics  include 
prophecy,  wisdom  literature,  the  Dead  Sea 
Scrolls,  the  teachings  of  Jesus,  Pauline  theolo- 
gy, Judaism  and  Christian  origins,  reaction 
criticism  —  the  way  the  Synoptic  Gospels  and 
John  give  final  form  to  their  message.  Course 
will  vary  from  year  to  year  and  may  be  taken 
for  credit  a  second  time  if  the  topic  is  different 
from  one  previously  studied. 

41  CONTEMPORARY  RELIGIOUS  ISSUES 
A  study  of  the  theological  significance  of 
some  contemporary  intellectual  developments 
in  Western  culture.  The  content  of  this  course 
will  vary  from  year  to  year.  Subjects  studied  in 
recent  years  include  the  theological  signifi- 
cance of  Freud.  Marx,  and  Nietzsche:  Christ- 
ianity and  existentialism;  theology  and  depth 


55 


psychology;  the  religious  dimension  of  con- 
temporary literature. 

42     THE  NATURE  AND  MISSION 
OF  THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  the  nature  of  the  Church  as  "The 
People  of  God"  with  reference  to  the  Biblical, 
Protestant.  Orthodox,  and  Roman  Catholic 
traditions. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  mdex) 

Interns  in  religion  usually  work  in  local  chur- 
ches under  the  super\ision  of  the  pastor  and  a 
member  of  the  faculty. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Current  study  areas  are  in  the  Biblical  lan- 
guages. New  Testament  theology,  compara- 
tive religions,  and  the  ethics  of  technology 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
A  recent  project  was  on  the  theology  of  hope 
with  reference  to  the  thought  of  Ernst  Bloch 
and  Alfred  North  Whitehead. 


SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor:  McCrary 
Associate  Professors:  Jo 

(Chairperson).  Wilk 
Assistant  Professor:  Strauser 

The  Sociology/ Anthropology  Depart- 
ment offers  two  tracks  in  the  major.  Both 
tracks  introduce  the  students  to  the  fun- 
damental concepts  of  the  discipline,  and 
both  tracks  prepare  the  student  for 
graduate  school. 

Track  I  emphasizes  the  theoretical 
aspects  of  sociology  and  anthropology. 
Track  II  emphasizes  the  application  of 
sociology  and  anthropology  to  human 
services. 

Track  I  —  Sociology-Anthropology 
requires  the  core  course  sequence  10,  14, 
29.  44.  and  47  and  three  other  courses 
within  the  department  with  the  exception 
of  15,  22,  23,  25,  40.  and  43.  Religion 
26  may  also  be  counted  toward  the 
major. 

Track  II  —  Human  Services  in  a 
Socio-Cultural  Perspective  requires: 
Sociology-Anthropology  10,  22,  29, 43, 
44,  and  47.  In  addition,  students  must 


select  two  courses  from  among  the  fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology  20, 
21,  27,  28,  30,  34,  and  35.  Students  are 
also  required  to  choose  two  units  from 
the  following  courses:  Psychology  10. 
Psychology  24,  Economics  24,  and 
Political  Science  33.  Recommended 
courses:  Accounting  10.  Accounting  26. 
Spanish  10.  Spanish  1 1.  History  13,  and 
Philosophy  34. 

Majors  in  both  tracks  are  encouraged 
to  participate  in  the  internship  program. 

A  minor  in  Sociological  and  Anthro- 
pological Views  of  Religion  for  those 
interested  in  theology  or  a  ministerial 
career  consists  of  four  sociology- 
anthropology  courses  from  among  26, 
32,  33.  36.  and  46. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  problems,  concepts, 
and  methods  in  sociology  today,  including 
analysis  of  stratification,  organization  of 
groups  and  institutions,  social  movements, 
and  deviants  in  social  structure. 

14  INTRODUCTION  TO  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  subfields  of  anthropolo- 
gy; its  subject  matter,  methodology,  and 
goals.  Examination  of  biological  and  cultural 
evolution,  the  fossil  evidence  for  human  evo- 
lution, and  questions  raised  in  relation  to 
human  evolution.  Other  topics  include  race, 
human  nature,  primate  behavior,  and  prehis- 
toric cultural  development. 

15  INTRODUCTION  TO  AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL  JUSTICE  SYSTEM 

An  introduction  to  the  role  of  law  enforce- 
ment, courts,  and  corrections  in  the  adminis- 
tration of  justice;  the  historical  development 
of  police,  courts,  and  corrections;  jurisdiction 
and  procedures  of  courts;  an  introduction  to 
the  studies,  literature,  and  research  in  criminal 
justice;  careers  in  criminal  justice. 

20  MARRIGE  AND  THE  FAMILY 

The  history,  structure,  and  functions  of  mod- 
em American  family  life,  emphasizing  dating, 
courtship,  factors  in  marital  adjustment,  and 
the  changing  status  of  family  members.  Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  con- 
sent of  instructor 

21  JUVENILE  DELINQUENCY 

A  multidisciplinary  approach  to  the  study  of 
the  constellation  of  factors  that  relate  to  juve- 
nile delinquency  causation,  handling  the  juve- 
nile delinquent  in  the  cnminal  justice  system, 
treatment  strategies,  prevention,  and  commu- 
nity responsibility.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 


22  INTRODUCTION  TO 
HUMAN  SERVICES 

The  course  is  designed  for  students  interested 
in  learning  about,  or  entering,  the  human 
services  profession.  It  will  review  the  history . 
the  range,  and  the  goals  of  human  services 
together  with  a  survey  of  vanous  strategies 
and  approaches  to  human  problems.  It  will 
include  practical  discussions  of  social  beha- 
vioral differences  as  they  relate  to  stress  and 
conflict  in  people's  lives.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  10  andlor  Psycholo- 
gy 10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

23  INTRODUCTION  TO 
LAW  ENFORCEMENT 

Principles,  theories,  and  doctrines  of  the  law 
of  crimes,  elements  in  crime,  analysis  of 
criminal  investigation,  important  case  law. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  15  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

24  RURAL  AND  URBAN  COMMUNITIES 
The  concept  of  community  is  treated  as  it 
operates  and  affects  individual  and  group 
behavior  in  rural,  suburban,  and  urban  set- 
tings. Emphasis  is  placed  upon  characteristic 
institutions  and  problems  of  modem  city  life. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

25  INTRODUCTION  TO 
CRIMINAL  INVESTIGATION 

This  course  is  designed  for  advanced  criminal 
justice  majors.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  an  in- 
depth  study  of  detection  and  investigation  of 
major  crimes.  Particular  attention  is  placed  on 
the  use  of  cnminalistics.  legal  parameters  of 
evidence  and  interrogation,  and  prosecutory 
procedures.  Prerequisite :  Sociology- 
Anthropology  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Will 
not  he  counted  toward  the  sociologyl 
anthropology  major. 

26  SOCIAL  MOVEMENTS 

An  analysis  of  the  dynamics,  structure,  and 
reactions  to  social  movements  with  focus  on 
contemporary  social  movements.  Prerequis- 
ite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

27  SOCIAL  PROBLEMS 

The  course  examines  the  causes,  characteris- 
tics, and  consequences  of  social  problems  in 
America  from  diverse  socio-cultural  perspec- 
tives. Topics  discussed  typically  include 
crime,  urban  cnses.  family  disorganization, 
poverty,  race  problems,  drug  abuse,  and  other 
related  issues.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

28  AGING  AND  SOCIETY 

Analysis  of  cross-cultural  characteristics  of 
the  aged  as  individuals  and  as  members  of 
groups.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  variables: 


56 


health,  housing,  socio-ecnomic  status,  per- 
sonal adjustment,  retirement,  and  social  parti- 
cipation. Sociological,  social  psychological, 
and  anthropological  frames  of  reference  util- 
ized in  analysis  and  description  of  aging  and 
its  relationship  to  society,  culture,  and  person- 
ality. 

29     CULTURAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  examination  of  cultural  and  social  anthro- 
pology designed  to  familiarize  the  student 
with  the  analytical  approaches  to  the  diverse 
cultures  of  the  worid.  The  relevancy  of  cultur- 
al anthropology  for  an  understanding  of  the 
human  condition  will  be  stressed.  Topics  to  he 
covered  include  the  nature  of  primitive 
societies  in  contrast  to  civilizations,  the  con- 
cept of  culture  and  cultural  relativism,  the 
individual  and  culture,  the  social  patterning  of 
behavior  and  social  control,  an  anthropologi- 
cal perspective  on  the  culture  of  the  United 
States. 

}0    CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis  of  the  sociology  of  law;  conditions 
under  which  criminal  laws  develop;  etiology 
of  crime;  epidemiology  of  crime,  including 
explanation  of  statistical  distribution  of  cnmi- 
nal  behavior  in  terms  of  time,  space,  and 
social  location.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

3 1  SOCIOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  sociological  examination  of  the  role  of 
women  in  American  society  through  an  analy- 
sis of  the  social  institutions  which  affect  their 
development.  Role-analysis  theory  will  be 
applied  to  the  past,  present,  and  future  expen- 
ence  of  women  as  It  relates  to  the  role  options 
of  society  as  a  whole.  Students  will  do  an 
original  research  project  on  the  role  of 
women.  Prerequisite:  Sociology - 
Anthropology  10.  Alternate  years. 

32  INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces  the  student  to  the  sociological  con- 
cept of  social  institution,  the  types  of  social 
institutions  to  be  found  in  all  societies,  and  the 
interrelationships  between  the  social  institu- 
tions within  a  society.  The  course  is  divided 
into  two  basic  pans;  I.  That  apsect  which 
deals  with  the  systematic  organization  of  soci- 
ety in  general,  and  2.  The  concentration  on  a 
particular  social  institution:  economic,  politi- 
cal, educational,  or  social  welfare.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

33  SOCIOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

An  examination  of  the  major  theories  of  the 
relationship  of  religion  to  society  and  a  survey 
of  sociological  studies  of  religious  behavior. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 


34     RACIAL  AND 

CULTURAL  MINORITIES 
Study  of  racial,  cultural,  and  national  groups 
within  the  framework  of  Amencan  cultural 
values.  An  analysis  will  include  historical, 
cultural,  and  social  factors  underiying  ethnic 
and  racial  conflict.  Field  tnps  and  individual 
reports  are  part  of  the  requirements  for  the 
course.  Prerequisite:  Sociology - 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

3.1     CULTURE  AND  PERSONALITY 

Introduction  to  psychological  anthropology. 
Its  theories  and  methodologies  Emphasis  will 
be  placed  on  the  relationship  between  indivi- 
dual and  culture,  national  character,  cognition 
and  culture,  culture  and  mental  disorders,  and 
cross-cultural  considerations  of  the  concept  of 
self.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology 
29  or  consent  of  instructor.  Offered  at  least 
once  every  three  years. 

36  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF 
PRIMITIVE  RELIGIONS 

The  course  will  familiarize  the  student  with 
the  wealth  of  anthropological  data  on  the 
religions  and  world  views  developed  by  prim- 
itive peoples.  The  functions  of  primitive 
religion  in  regard  to  the  individual,  society, 
and  vanous  cultural  institutions  will  be  exa- 
mined. Subjects  to  be  surveyed  include  myth, 
witchcraft,  vision  quests,  spirit  possession, 
the  cultural  use  of  dreams,  and  revitalization 
movements.  Particular  emphasis  will  be  given 
to  shamanism,  transcultural  religious  experi- 
ence, and  the  creation  of  cultural  realities 
through  religions.  Both  a  social  scientific  and 
existentialist  perspective  will  be  employed. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  29  or 
consent  of  instructor.  Alernate  years. 

37  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF  AMERICAN  INDIANS 

An  ethnographic  survey  of  native  North 
Amencan  Indian  and  Eskimo  cultures,  such  as 
the  Iroquois,  Plains  Indians.  Pueblos.  Kwa- 
kiutl.  and  Netsilik.  Changes  in  native  lifeways 
due  to  European  contacts  and  United  States 
expansion  will  be  considered.  Recent  cultural 
developments  among  American  Indians  will 
be  placed  in  an  anthropological  perspective. 
Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

38  LEGAL  AND  POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The  course  is  designed  to  familiarize  the  stu- 
dent with  the  techniques  of  conflict  resolution 
and  the  utilization  of  public  power  in  pnmitive 
society  as  well  as  the  various  theories  of  prim- 
itive law  and  government.  The  rise  of  the  state 
and  an  anthropological  perspective  on  modem 
law  and  government  will  be  included.  The 
concepts  of  self-regulation  and  social  control, 
legitimacy,  coercion,  and  exploitation  will  be 
the   organizing   focus.    Prerequisite : 


Sociology-Anthropology  29  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

39  THE  AMERICAN  PRISON  SYSTEM 

Nature  and  history  of  punishment,  evolution 
of  the  prison  and  prison  methods  with  empha- 
sis on  prison  community,  prison  architecture, 
institutional  programs,  inmate  rights,  and 
sentences.  Review  of  punishment  versus  treat- 
ment, detention  facilities,  jails,  reformatories, 
prison  organization  and  administration,  cus- 
tody, and  discipline.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  15. 

40  PROBATION  AND  PAROLE 

.A  course  designed  for  the  advanced  criminal 
justice  major.  While  the  course  concerns  the 
study  of  probation  and  parole  as  pans  of  the 
criminal  justice  system  and  their  impact  on  the 
system  as  a  whole,  the  pnmary  emphasis  is  the 
impact  on  the  offender.  Particular  attention  is 
given  to  diagnostic  report  wnting  on  offen- 
ders, pre-sentence  investigation,  offender 
classification,  and  parole  planning.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  15  and  39. 
Alternate  years. 

41  SOCIAL  STRATIFICATION 

An  analysis  of  stratification  systems  with  spe- 
cific reference  to  American  society.  The 
course  will  include  an  analysis  of  poverty, 
wealth,  and  power  in  the  United  States.  Parti- 
cular attention  will  be  given  to  factors  which 
generate  and  maintain  inequality,  along  with 
the  impacts  of  inequality  on  the  lives  of 
Americans.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  HUMAN  SERVICES 

IN  HELPING  INSTITUTIONS 
The  course  examines  the  organizational  and 
conceptual  context  within  which  human  ser- 
vices are  delivered  in  contemporary  society. 
Subjects  to  be  covered  include  ethnographic 
study  of  nursing  homes,  prisons,  therapeutic 
communities,  mental  hospitals,  and  other 
human  service  institutions.  The  methodology 
of  fieldwork  will  be  explored  so  as  to  sensitize 
the  student  to  the  socio-cultural  dismensions 
of  helping  environments  and  relationships. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
Sociology-Anthropology  29  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

44  SOCIAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  sociological 
thought  from  its  earliest  philosophical  begin- 
nmgs  is  treated  through  discussions  and 
reports.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  sociological 
thought  since  the  time  of  Comte.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

45  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  anthropo- 


57 


logical  thought  Irom  the  IXth  century  to  the 
present.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  anthropo- 
logical thought  since  1X50.  Topics  include 
esolutionism,  historical-particularism,  cultur- 
al idealism,  cultural  materialism,  lunctional- 
isni.  structuralism,  and  ethnoscience.  Prere- 
quisite: Socioloiiy-Anlhropology  29  or 
conseni  of  inslniclor.  Offered  at  least  once 
every  three  years. 

4(1  PEOPLE  AND  CULTURES  OF 
THE  AMERICAN  SOUTHWEST 
Field  experience  in  the  analysis  of  tricultural 
communities  ol  Northern  New  Mexico. 
Southern  Colorado,  and  Northeastern  Arizo- 
na, including  the  eastern  Pueblos  of  New 
Mexico;  Zuni.  Navajo,  and  Apache  reserva- 
tions; isolated  Spanish-American  mountain 
villages  of  Northern  New  Mexico;  religious 
ashrams  and  communes;  and  cities  of  the 
Southwest  and  Juarez.  Mexico.  Emphasis 
upon  Taos.  Rio  Arriba.  Sante  Fe.  and  Los 
Alamos  counties  of  New  Mexico.  Prerequis- 
ite: Sociology  10  or  conseni  of  instructor.  May 
or  summer  only. 

47     RESEARCH  METHODS  IN 

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study  of  the  research  process  in  sociology- 
anthropology.  Attention  is  given  to  the  pro- 
cess of  designing  and  administering  research 
and  the  application  of  research  Different 
methodological  skills  are  considered,  mclud- 
ing  field  work,  questionnaire  construction, 
and  other  methods  of  data  gathering  and  the 
analysis  of  data.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  and  Mathematical  I J  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN  SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces  the  student  to  a  practical  work 
experience  involving  community  agencies  in 
order  to  effect  a  synthesis  of  the  student's 
academic  course  work  and  its  practical  appli- 
cations in  a  community  agency.  Specifics  of 
the  course  to  be  worked  out  in  conjunction 
with  department,  student,  and  agency.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  con- 
sent of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  in  sociology-anthropology  typically 
work  off  campus  with  social  service  agencies 
under  the  supervision  of  administrators.  How- 
ever, other  internship  experiences,  such  as 
with  the  Lycoming  County  Historical 
Museum,  are  available  Interns  In  criminal 
justice  work  off  campus  in  criminal  justice 
agencies,  such  as  penal  institutions  and  prob- 
ation and  parole  departments,  under  the  super- 
vision of  administrative  personnel. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
An  opportunity  to  pursue  specific  interests  and 
topics  not  usually  covered  in  regular  courses. 


Through  a  program  of  readings  and  tutorials, 
the  student  will  have  the  opportunity  to  pursue 
these  interests  and  topics  in  greater  depth  than 
is  usually  possible  in  a  regular  course. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 


THEATRE 


Professor:  Falk  (Chairperson) 

Assistant  Professor;  Alien 

Assistant  Teclinicai  Director:  Huffman 

The  major  consists  of  eight  courses: 
Theatre  10  and  seven  others;  a  concen- 
tration in  acting,  directing,  or  design  is 
possible.  In  addition  to  the  course 
requirements,  majors  are  expected  to 
participate  actively  in  Arena  Theatre  pro- 
ductions. Majors  are  urged  to  include 
courses  in  art,  music,  psychology,  and 
English,  or  other  areas  of  special  inter- 
est. 

Three  minors  are  available  in  the 
Theatre  department.  A  minor  in  Theatre 
History  and  Literature  consists  of  Theat- 
re 10,  32,  33,  35,  and  40.  The  following 
courses  are  required  to  complete  a  minor 
in  Performance:  Theatre  10,  14,  26,  34, 
36,  and  either  32  or  33.  To  obtain  a  minor 
in  Technical  Theatre,  a  student  must 
complete  Theatre  10,  18,  28,  38,  and  42 
or  43. 

The  fine  arts  distribution  requirement 
may  be  satisfied  by  selecting  any  two  of 
the  following  recommended  courses: 
Theatre  10,  11,  14,  18,  32,  33  or  other 
courses  with  the  consent  of  the  instruc- 
tor. 

10  INTRODUCTION  TO  THEATRE 
Designed  as  a  comprehensive  introduction  to 
the  aesthetics  of  theatre.  From  the  spectator's 
point  of  view,  the  nature  of  theatre  will  be 
explored,  including  dramatic  literature  and  the 
integral  functioning  of  acting,  directing,  and 
all  production  aspects. 

1 1  INTRODUCTION  TO  FILM 

A  basic  course  in  understanding  the  film 
medium  The  class  will  investigate  film  tech- 
nique through  lectures  and  by  viewing  regular 
weekly  films  chosen  from  classic,  contempor- 
ary, and  experimental  short  films. 


14     INTRODUCTION  TO  ACTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  actor's  prepara- 
tion with  emphasis  on  developing  the  actor's 
creative  imagination  through  improvisations 
and  scene  study. 

18     INTRODUCTION  TO 
PLAY  PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft  and  the  various  other  aspects  of 
play  production  are  introduced.  Through 
material  presented  in  the  course  and  laborato- 
ry work  on  the  Arena  Theatre  stage,  the  stu- 
dent will  acquire  experience  to  produce  theat- 
rical scenery. 

26     INTRODUCTION  TO  DIRECTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  function  of  the 
director  in  preparation,  rehearsal,  and  perfor- 
mance. Emphasis  is  placed  on  developing  the 
student's  ability  to  analyze  scripts,  and  on  the 
development  of  the  student's  imagination 
Prerequisite:  Theatre  14. 

28  INTRODUCTION  TO  SCENE 
DESIGN  AND  STAGECRAFT 
An  introduction  to  the  theatre  with  an  empha- 
sis on  stagecraft.  Productions  each  semester 
serve  as  the  laboratory  to  provide  the  practical 
experience  necessary  to  understand  the 
material  presented  in  the  classroom.  Prere- 
quisite: Theatre  Iff  or  conseni  of  instructor. 

31     ADVANCED  TECHNIQUES 
OF  PLAY  PRODUCTION 
A  detailed  consideration  of  the  interrelated 
problems  and  techniques  of  play  analysis, 
production  styles,  and  design.  Offered  sum- 
mer only. 

yi     HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  I 

A  detailed  study  of  the  development  of  theatre 
from  the  Greeks  to  the  Restoration.  Alternate 


33  HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  II 

The  history  of  the  theatre  from  1660.  Alter- 
nate years. 

34  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  ACTING 
Instruction  and  practice  in  character  analaysis 
and  projection  with  emphasis  on  vocal  and 
body  techniques.  Prerequisite:  Theatre  14. 

35  THEORIES  OF  THE 
MODERN  THEATRE 

An  advanced  course  exploring  the  philosophi- 
cal roots  of  the  modem  theatre  from  the  birth 
of  realism  to  the  present  and  the  influences  on 
modem  theatre  practice.  Selected  readings 
from  Nietzsche.  Marx.  Jung.  Freud.  White- 
head. Kierkegaard.  Sartre.  Camus.  Antoine. 
Copeau.  Stanislavski.  Shaw.  Meyerhold. 
Artaud.  Brecht.  Brook.  Grotowski.  Alternate 


58 


36  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  student's  ability  to 
function  in  preparation  and  rehearsal.  Practi- 
cal experience  involves  the  directing  of  two 
one-act  plays  from  the  contemporao'  theatre. 
Prerequisite:  Theatre  26. 

37  PLAYWRITING  AND 
DRAMATIC  CRITICISM 

An  investigation  of  the  techniques  of  play- 
wntmg  with  an  emphasis  on  creative  writing, 
culminating  in  a  written  one-act  play,  plus  an 
historical  survey  of  dramatic  criticism  from 
Aristotle  to  the  present  with  emphasis  upon 
developing  the  student's  ability  to  write 
review  s  and  criticism  of  theatncal  productions 
and  films.  Alternate  years. 

38  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO: 
LIGHTING  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  stage  and  lighting  design  with 
emphasis  on  their  practical  application  to  the 
theatre.  Prerequisite:  Theatre  18  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40     MASTERS  OF  WORLD  DRAMA 

An  intensive  and  detailed  analysis  of  the  plays 
and  related  works,  including  cnticism  of  great 
authors,  that  have  shaped  world  theatre. 
Authors  to  be  selected  on  the  basis  of  interest 


of  students  and  faculty.  At  times,  more  than 
one  author  will  be  treated  in  a  term.  Ibsen. 
Brecht.  Moliere.  Williams.  Albee.  Alternate 
years.  May  be  accepted  toward  English  major 
with  consent  of  English  Department. 

42  ADVANCED  STUDIO: 
COSTUME  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  costuming  for  the  stage,  ele- 
ments of  design,  planning,  production,  and 
construction  of  costumes  for  the  theatre.  Stu- 
dents will  participate  in  the  design  of  a  pro- 
duction. Prerequisite:  Theatre  18  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

43  ADVANCED  STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  properties  design  for  the  stage, 
including  the  production  of  specific  properties 
for  staging  use.  Elements  of  design,  fabrica- 
tion, and  the  construction  of  properties 
employing  a  vanety  of  materials  and  the  appli- 
cation of  new  theatrical  technology.  Prere- 
quisite: Theatre  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  ACTING 
Preparation  of  monologues  and  two-character 
scenes,  contemporary  and  classical.  The  stu- 
dent will  appear  in  major  campus  productions. 
Prerequisite:  Theatre  34. 


46     ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 

Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  student's  abil- 
ity to  produce  a  major  three-act  play  from  the 
scnpt  to  the  stage  for  public  pert'ormance. 
Prerequisite:  Theatre  36. 

48     ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DESIGN 

Independent  work  in  conceptual  and  practical 
design.  The  student  will  design  one  full  pro- 
duction as  his  major  project.  Prerequisites: 
Theatre  28  or  38  and  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  index) 

Interns  in  theatre  work  off  campus  in  theatres 
such  as  the  Guthne  Theatre.  Minneapolis,  and 
at  the  New  Jersey  Shakespeare  Festival. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 
(See  index) 
Some  recent  independent  studies  have  been 
the  roles  of  women  as  characters  in  drama, 
scene  design,  and  lighting  design  for  an  Arena 
production. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 
(See  index) 
A  typical  study  could  be  the  writing  and  pro- 
duction of  an  original  play. 


59 


Student  Services 


ADMINISTRATION 

The  program  of  student  services  at 
Lycoming  is  administered  by  the  Office 
of  Student  Services.  It  is  designed  to 
respond  to  a  diversity  of  student  needs. 
Professional  staff  members  are  assigned 
the  specific  responsibilities  of: 

—  career  counseling  and  place- 
ment; 

—  residence  life; 

—  student  activities; 

—  religious  life; 

—  health  services; 

—  study  improvement  services; 

—  student  orientation; 

—  judiciary-student  conduct 

All  members  of  the  staff  are  available 
to  counsel  and  advise  individual  stu- 
dents. 


career  trends.   Services  offered  by  the 
center  include: 

—  individual  counseling; 

—  SHARE  (Students  Having  a  Real 
Experience),  a  program  in  which 
students  observe  and  work  with  a 
professional  in  the  field); 

—  placement  services  to  aid  seniors  in 
implementing  their  career  plans; 

—  assistance  to  students  in  securing 
internships,  summer  employment, 
and  part-time  employment; 

—  speaker's  program  which  brings 
professionals  from  a  variety  of 
careers  to  campus  seminars; 

—  video-cassette  programs  relating  to 
job  skills  and  career  information; 

—  microfiche  copies  of  graduate-  and 
professional-school  catalogs  for 
the  United  States  and  abroad. 


responsibility  of  students  occupying  the 
room.  Hall  and  bathroom  damage  will  be 
the  responsibility  of  the  section  where 
damage  occurs. 

Residence  halls  are  not  available  for 
occupancy  during  the  vacation  periods. 
Quiet  hours  for  study  purposes,  which 
are  established  by  residence  hall  councils 
or  the  Office  of  Student  Services,  are 
published  in  the  student  handbook  and 
posted  on  bulletin  boards. 

Room  visitation  by  members  of  the 
opposite  sex  is  permitted  in  the  halls 
under  conditions  established  by  the  Col- 
lege in  cooperation  with  the  various  resi- 
dence hall  councils,  which  share  respon- 
sibility for  developing  and  monitoring 
regulations,  and  which  are  organized 
each  fall  semester  before  visitation  sche- 
dules are  established. 


PERSONAL  COUNSELING 

All  members  of  the  staff  of  the  Office 
of  Student  Services  are  qualified  and 
available  to  provide  non-therapeutic 
assistance  to  students  with  adjustment 
problems.  A  part-time  clinical  psycholo- 
gist provides  short-term  therapy  for  stu- 
dents needing  assistance.  Continuing 
therapy  is  available  through  referral  to 
public  agencies  and  private  clinicians  in 
the  Williamsport  community.  Financial 
arrangements  for  these  referral  services 
are  made  directly  by  the  student  with  the 
agency  and/or  individual  clinician 
involved. 


CAREER  DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The  Career  Development  Center  pro- 
vides services  which  are  designed  to  help 
students  identify  their  abilities  and  inter- 
ests, set  realistic  career  goals,  and  plan 
academic  programs  to  meet  these  goals. 
Counseling  for  Lycoming  students 
begins  in  the  freshman  year. 

In  addition  to  individual  guidance,  the 
center  maintains  a  library  on  specific 
careers,  employment  outlooks,   and 


RESIDENCE  AND 
RESIDENCE  HALLS 

Single  students  who  do  not  live  at  home 
are  required  to  live  in  residence  halls  and 
eat  in  the  dining  room.  All  new  resident 
students  are  forwarded  a  room- 
agreement  form  to  sign  after  confirma- 
tion of  their  admission  to  Lycoming. 
This  agreement  is  renewed  each  spring. 
Exceptions  to  the  residence  policy  may 
be  granted  to  those  students  who  wish  to 
live  with  relatives,  and  students  who  are 
23  years  of  age  or  older.  Requests  for 
such  exemptions  must  be  submitted  to 
the  Residence  Life  Office  before  the  first 
day  of  the  term  to  which  the  student  has 
been  admitted. 

Residence  students  assume  responsi- 
bility for  their  rooms  and  furnishings. 
The  College  reserves  the  right  to  enter 
and  inspect  any  room  for  reasons  of  dam- 
age, health,  or  safety,  and  to  search  any 
room  when  there  is  reason  to  believe  a 
violation  of  College  rules  or  the  law  is 
occurring  or  has  occurred.  Charges  are 
assessed  for  damage  to  rooms,  doors, 
furniture  and  common  areas.  Wherever 
possible,  damage  to  dormitory  property 
will  be  charged  to  the  person  or  persons 
directly  responsible.  Damage  and  break- 
age occurring   in  a  room  will  be  the 


STUDENT  ACTIVITIES 

Student  Activities  offers  assistance 
and  advice  for  all  campus  programs  and 
student  organizations.  Through  the 
efforts  of  the  Campus  Activities  Board 
(C.A.B.)  programming  is  provided  for 
all  facets  of  the  student  population.  The 
newly  established  Union  Governing 
Council  (U.G.C.)  oversees  the  function- 
al aspecs  of  the  Wertz  Student  Center  and 
works  to  create  an  atmosphere  which 
best  serves  the  social  and  recreational 
needs  of  the  students.  Student  Activities 
is  also  responsible  for  Leadership  Train- 
ing and  the  Student  Orientation  Staff;  in 
addition,  it  provides  support  and  direc- 
tion for  student  government,  the  Inter- 
fraternity  and  Panhellenic  councils  and 
the  retention  program. 


RELIGIOUS  LIFE 

The  United  Campus  Ministry,  staffed 
by  a  Protestant  Minister  and  a  Roman 
Catholic  Priest  provide  a  wide  range  of 
activities  in  support  of  the  religious  lives 
of  students.  Ecumenical  and  inclusive  in 
nature,  campus  ministry  at  Lycoming 
provides  worship  services,  service  pro- 
jects, social  occasions,  retreats,  study 
opportunities  and  personal  counseling 


60 


The  chaplains  Hve  on  campus  and  are 
available  to  students  for  a  variety  of 
situations  in  which  they  might  need  sup- 
port, counsel  or  direction. 

HEALTH  SERVICES 

Normal  medical  treatment  by  the 
health  service  staff  at  the  College  is  pro- 
vided without  cost  to  the  student.  During 
the  fall  and  spring  semesters,  the  College 
maintains  an  outpatient  service  in  Rich 
Hall.  It  is  staffed  with  a  registered  nurse 
five  days  a  week  from  8:30  a.m.  to  4 
p.m.  The  College  physician  is  available 
from  II  a.m.  to  12  noon,  Monday 
through  Friday.  At  other  times, 
emergency  care  is  available  at  the 
emergency  rooms  of  Williamsport  and 
Divine  Providence  Hospitals,  located  a 
short  distance  from  the  campus. 

Medical  service  charges  paid  by  the 
student  are:  emergency  room  and 
emergency  room  physician's  charges, 
special  medications.  X-rays,  surgery 
care  for  major  accidents,  immunizations, 
examinations  for  glasses,  physician's 
visits  other  than  in  the  health  service, 
referrals  for  treatment  by  specialists, 
special  nursing  services  and  special  ser- 
vices. 

Entering  students  must  provide  basic 
health  information  to  the  College 
between  the  time  of  admission  and  the 
beginning  of  classes  of  the  term  to  which 
they  are  admitted.  This  information  is 
secured  through  participation  in  the  com- 
puterized health-information  service 
provided  by  Medical  Datamation.  Inc. 
New  students  complete  the  DASH  Medi- 
cal Information  Questionnaire  that  is 
mailed  to  students  shortly  after  they  have 
confirmed  their  admission  to  Lycoming. 
The  completed  form  is  returned  by  the 
student  to  the  admission's  office  together 
w  ith  a  check  for  $  1 3 .50.  Both  the  student 
and  the  College  receive  reports  based  on 
the  questionnaire  responses.  The  student 
report  consists  of  a  Medical  Database 
Report,  a  Hazards  Risk  Index  and  a 
health  information  brochure  as 
requested.  Information  provided  by  the 
student  is  confidential  and  is  available 
only  to  qualified  health  service  and 
student-services  personnel. 


A  student  accident  and  health  insur- 
ance program  is  provided  through  the 
College.  Students  who  do  not  have  their 
own  coverage  or  are  not  included  in 
family  coverage  are  required  to  purchase 
this  plan.  Information  on  the  plan  is 
mailed  to  every  student. 

STUDY  IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills  Seminars  —  The  seminars  con- 
sist of  three  one-hour  sessions  on  sche- 
duling of  time,  test-taking  and  study 
methods.  They  are  scheduled  on  demand 
for  six  to  10  students. 

Reading  Course  —  Designed  to 
improve  reading  speed  and  comprehen- 
sion, this  three- week  course  is  offered  at 
various  times  during  the  academic  year 
for  a  fee  of  $15. 


STUDENT  ORIENTATION 

New  students  at  Lycoming  are 
required  to  attend  one  of  three  summer 
orientation  sessions  with  at  least  one 
parent  before  they  enroll  in  the  fall.  The 
purpose  of  the  program  is  to  acquaint 
new  students  and  their  parents  with  the 
College  more  fully  so  that  new  students 
begin  their  Lycoming  experience  under 
the  most  favorable  circumstances.  Infor- 
mation on  orientation  is  mailed  to  new 
students  after  they  confirm  their  admis- 
sion. 


STANDARDS  OF  CONDUCT 

Lycoming  students  are  expected  to 
accept  responsibilities  required  of  adults. 
The  rights  of  every  member  of  the  Col- 
lege community  are  protected  by  estab- 
lished regulations.  Although  the  accep- 
tance of  the  College's  standards  of 
behavior  is  an  individual  responsibility, 
it  also  calls  for  group  responsibility.  Stu- 
dents should  influence  their  peers  to  con- 
duct themselves  responsibly  for  the  col- 
lective good. 

Students  who  are  unable  to  demon- 
strate that  they  have  accepted  these 


responsibilities  or  who  fail  to  abide  by 
established  policies  may  be  dismissed  at 
any  time  or  denied  readmission  for  a  sub- 
sequent term  or  semester.  Further,  after 
the  conclusion  of  any  term  or  semester, 
the  College  may  deny  a  student  the  pri- 
vilege of  attending  any  subsequent  term 
or  semester  when  the  administration 
deems  this  to  be  in  the  best  interest  of  the 
College. 

Lycoming  College  does  not  approve 
of  the  use  or  misuse  of  alcoholic  bever- 
ages and  encourages  students  to  abstain 
from  their  use  and  to  abide  by  the  legal 
restrictions  on  alcohol  use  established  by 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
Observance  of  the  law  is  the  individual 
responsibility  of  each  student,  and  fai- 
lure to  obey  the  law  may  subject  the 
student  to  prosecution  by  civil  authori- 
ties, either  on  or  off  campus. 

Students  also  are  expected  to  be  aware 
of  the  College's  attitude  toward  the  use 
and  misues  of  alcohol  and  to  acknow- 
ledge the  College's  right  to  its  position. 
The  College  will  not  tolerate  any  public 
use  of  alcohol.  Officials  of  the  College 
will  prescribe  penalties  for  the  public  use 
or  private  misuse  of  alcohol.  These 
penalties  will  be  applied  in  a  consistent 
manner. 

Lycoming  recognizes  its  responsibili- 
ty, however,  for  providing  students  with 
reliable  information  about  the  social  and 
medical  implications  of  the  use  of  alco- 
hol. Lycoming  makes  every  effort  to 
create  and  maintain  a  community  in 
which  individual  choice  is  coupled  with 
responsible  behavior  and  respect  for  the 
rights  of  others. 

Upon  enrolling,  students  are  given  a 
handbook  which  contains  the  College's 
official  policies,  rules  and  regulations. 
These  policies,  rules  and  regulations  are 
part  of  the  contractual  agreement  stu- 
dents enter  into  when  they  register  at 
Lycoming. 


61 


Admission  to  Lycoming 


POLICY  AND  STANDARDS 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applica- 
tions from  prospective  students  regard- 
less of  age,  sex.  race,  religion,  financial 
resources,  color,  national  or  ethnic  ori- 
gin, or  handicap.  Admission  is  based  on 
the  following  standards: 

—  Graduation  from  an  accre- 
dited secondary  school 

—  Completion  of  16  units  of  college 
preparatory  courses  including  (4) 
English.  (3)  Math.  (2)  Foreign 
Language,  (2)  Natural  Science,  (2) 
Social  Science  and  (3)  Elective. 
The  admissions  committee,  recog- 
nizing that  high  school  curricula 
vary,  is  always  willing  to  consider 
the  application  of  an  able  student 
whose  preparation  while  differing 
from  the  plan  suggested,  neverthe- 
less gives  evidence  of  continuity  in 
the  study  of  fundamental  subjects. 

—  Satisfactory  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  Scholastic 
Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  or  American 
College  Test  (ACT)  scores. 

Applicants  with  significant  academic 
preparation  and  exceptional  maturity 
may  apply  to  Lycoming  as  a  candidate 
for  early  admission.  A  recommendation 
from  a  school  counselor  is  required,  indi- 
cating the  student's  intentions  to  attend 
Lycoming  in  lieu  of  the  12th  grade.  If 
admitted,  the  student  enters  the  College 
after  completing  the  junior  year  in  high 
school. 

Students  who  are  not  enrolled  in  a 
degree  program  and  who  wish  to  register 
for  courses  in  any  semester  are  welcome 
to  apply.  A  Special  Student  Application 
is  available  for  this  purpose. 

Lycoming  is  fully  approved  for  the 
educational  program  for  veterans. 


APPLICATION  AND 
SELECTION  PROCESS 

For  students  considering  a  fall  semes- 
ter admission,  applications  should  be 
filed  by  April  1 .  The  application  should 
be  accompanied  by  a  $20  application  fee, 
an  official  secondary  school  transcript 
forwarded  by  the  school  guidance  office. 


and  the  results  of  either  the  Scholastic 
Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  or  the  American 
College  Test  (ACT).  Applications  are 
considered  after  April  I  on  a  space- 
available  basis. 

The  completed  application  is  eva- 
luated individually  by  identifying  each 
applicant's  academic  achievement, 
talents,  qualities,  and  interests.  Lycom- 
ing notifies  applicants  of  their  accep- 
tance as  soon  as  possible  after  all  creden- 
tials have  been  received  and  evaluated. 
In  some  instances,  additional  informa- 
tion may  be  needed  to  complete  the  eva- 
luation. The  review  process  normally 
begins  after  January  1 . 

Admitted  applicants  must  notify  the 
Collegeof  their  intent  to  enroll  by  May  1. 
the  national  candidates'  reply  date.  This 
notification  must  be  accompanied  by  a 
$100  (attendance)  deposit  for  commut- 
ing students,  or  a  $200  (attendance  and 
room)  deposit  for  resident  students. 
After  May  1 ,  the  deposits  are  not  refund- 
able. 


ADVANCED  STANDING 
BY  TRANSFER 

The  College  welcomes  transfer  stu- 
dents from  other  accredited  colleges  and 
universities  according  to  the  following 
standards  and  procedures: 

—  applicants  should  be  in  good 
academic  standing  and  should  have 
a  cumulative  grade  point  average 
of  2.0  in  transferable  courses  at 
their  former  institutions: 

—  courses  that  are  reasonably  com- 
parable to  those  offered  at  Lycom- 
ing will  be  accepted  for  transfer  if 
the  grade  C  or  better  is  earned; 

—  grades  earned  at  previous  institu- 
tions will  not  be  included  in  the 
computation  of  the  grade  point 
average; 

—  each  transfer  applicant  will  be 
evaluated  individually  in  relation 
to  unsuccessfully  attempted  course 
credits  within  our  permitted 
24-credit  maximum.  The  number 
of  unsuccessful  attempts  remaining 
will  be  recorded  on  the  transcript 


evaluation  prior  to  required  confir- 
mation; 

—  class  standing  at  Lycoming  will  be 
based  on  the  number  of  credits 
accepted  for  transfer; 

—  no  more  than  64  credits  can  be 
accepted  for  transfer  from  a  junior 
or  community  college: 

—  tranfer  students  will  be  eligible  to 
earn  appointments  to  the  Dean's 
List,  but  to  be  considered  for  hon- 
ors at  commencement  at  least  64 
credits  must  be  earned  at  Lycom- 
ing; 

—  students  will  be  eligible  for  class 
rank  after  completing  eight  courses 
at  Lycoming: 

—  official  copies  of  transcripts  from 
all  institutions  attended  must  be 
submitted  as  a  part  of  the  admis- 
sions application; 

—  the  residency  requirement  for  a 
degree  is  eight  unit  courses  or  32 
credits.  The  final  eight  units  must 
be  taken  at  Lycoming. 


EARLY  DECISION 

Lycoming's  Early  Decision  Plan  is 
designed  for  qualified  high  school 
seniors  who  have  examined  their  college 
choices  thoroughly  and  have  decided  that 
Lycoming  College  is  their  first  choice. 
Candidates  for  Early  Decision  may  apply 
elsewhere  with  the  understanding  that 
other  applications  will  be  withdrawn  if 
the  candidates  are  accepted  at  Lycoming. 
It  is  further  understood  that  students 
select  only  one  college  to  which  they  will 
apply  as  Early  Decision  applicants. 

Applications  for  Early  Decision  may 
be  submitted  any  time  until  December  1 . 
Candidates  will  be  notified  of  the  Admis- 
sions Committee's  decision  by  Decem- 
ber 15  providing  that  the  credential  files 
are  complete. 

It  is  understood  that  the  candidates 
admitted  under  the  Early  Decision  Plan 
will  subsequently  enroll  at  Lycoming 
responding  with  a  deposit  by  January  1 . 

The  Admissions  Committee  may  defer 
candidates  for  a  second  review  in  the 
spring.   In  such  ca.ses,  the  Committee 


62 


considers  additional  academic  informa- 
tion such  as  senior  year  grades  and  test 
scores. 


ADMISSIONS  OFFICE 
LOCATION  AND  HOURS 

Prospective  students  and  their  families 
are  encouraged  to  visit  the  campus  for  a 
student-conducted  tour  and  an  interview 
with  an  admissions  officer,  who  will 
provide  additional  information  about  the 
College  and  answer  questions. 

The  Admissions  Office  is  located  on 
the  first  floor  of  Long  Hall.  For  an 
appointment,  telephone  (717)  326-1951. 
or  write  Office  of  Admissions,  Lycom- 
ing College,  Williamsport,  PA  17701. 
Office  hours  are: 

Weekdays  —  September  through  April 

8  a.m.  to  4:30  p.m. 

—  May  through  August 

9  a.m.  to  4  p.m. 
Saturdays  —  September  through  April 

8  a.m.  to  12  noon 

—  May  through  August 
No  Saturday  hours 


63 


Financial  Matters 


EXPENSES  FOR 

THE  ACADEMIC  YEAR  1985-86 


ENTRY  FEES  AND  DEPOSITS 


Application  Fee  —  All  students  for 
admission  must  submit  a  $20  application 
fee.  This  charge  defrays  the  cost  of  pro- 
cessing the  application  and  is  non- 
refundable. 


The  following  expenses  are  effective 

for  the  regular  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

The  College  reserves  the  right  to  adjust 

fees  at  any  time.  The  fees  for  each 

semester  are  payable  not  later  than  the  »  .    .    .      rv        -^        » r          j 

,   .        f    ,          f     .1.             .  Admission  Deposit  —  After  students 

second  day  oi  classes  tor  the  semester.  ,         ,              ,-■   j    r-  ■    •      j        ■ 

^  have  been  notiried  of  their  admission  to 

Lycoming,  they  are  required  to  make  a 

Pggj                                     Semester   Year  $100  admissions  deposit  to  confirm  their 

Comprehensive S3.400    $6,800  intention  to  matriculate.  Students  seek- 

Board  and  Room  Rem                1.335     2.670  ing  residence  must  submit  an  additional 

T-""'                                        ■*"'^      '^■•^™  $  Too  room-reservation  deposit.   All 

One-Time  Student  Fees  deposits  are  applied  to  the  general 

charges  tor  the  tirst  semester  of  atten- 

.  PP  ication    "    ; -  dance.  After  May  1.  deposits  are  nonre- 

AdniisMons  Deposit 100  •'              ^ 

Contingency  Deposit 100  fundable. 

Room  Reservation  Deposit 1 00 

Contingency  Deposit  —  A  con- 
Part-Time  Student  Fees  tingency  deposit  of  SI 00  is  required 

Application  Fee $  20  .■     n   .-   ,i   .•            .    j      ^ 

r  V  1.   . /"                                           co=n  'J'  ^"  tu  1-time  students  as  a  guaran- 

Each  Unit  Course  $850  ,                                                        ^ 

tee  tor  payment  of  damage  to  or  loss 

Additional  Charges  »*'  College  property,  for  library  and 

Applied  Music  Fee  {halt-hour  per  ueek  parking   fines,   or  similar  penalties 

per  semester 120  imposed  by  the  College.  The  deposit 

Cap  and  Gown  Rental prevailing  cost  is  collected  alons  with  Other  chartzes 

Laboratory  Fee  per  Unit  Course 5  to  50  fyr  (^e  initial  semester.  The  balance 

Rereaistration  Fee 25  .-  ...       ,            .     .          .-       j    j      i»          n 

l>arkm.  Permit  (for  the  academic  year)  .  10  to  15  "*   '^IS  deposit   is   refunded  after  all 
Parking  Permit  with  Reserved  Space  debts  to  the  College  have  been  paid. 
(for  the  academic  year) 15  to  35  either  upon  graduation  or  upon  writ- 
Practice  Teaching  Fee  {Payable  in  ten  request  submitted  to  the  Registrar 

D  ^"T'J^^o""   r^ ,^' '***'  two  weeks  prior  to  voluntary  p'erma- 

R.O.T.C.  Basic  Course  Deposit  .'^     .                           ■:   ^ 

{Payable  at  Bucknell  Umversiiy) 60  "ent   termination  ot   enrollment   at 

R.O.T.C.  Advanced  Course  Deposit  Lycoming  College. 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University) 60 

Transcript  Fee  ( No  charge  to  PARTIAL  PAYMENTS 

(lull-time  students) 3 

Medical  Quf^slionnaire  Fee  (Payable  to 

Medical  Datamation.  Inc.) prevailing  cost  For  the  convenience  ofthose  who  find 

it  impossible  to  follow  the  regular  sched- 
The  comprehensive  fee  covers  the  reg-  ule  of  payments,  arrangements  may  be 
ular  course  load  of  three  to  four  courses  made  with  the  College  Treasurer  for  the 
each  semester.  Resident  students  must  monthly  payment  of  College  fees 
board  at  the  College  unless,  for  extraor-  through  various  educational   plans, 
dinary  reasons,  authorization  is  extended  Additional  information  concerning  par- 
lor other  eating  arrangements.  If  a  dou-  tial  payments  may  be  obtained  from  the 
ble  room  is  used  as  a  single  room,  there  is  Treasurer  or  Director  of  Admissions, 
an  additional  charge  of  $265  per  semes- 
ter. The  estimated  cost  for  books  and 
supplies  is  up  to  $250  per  year,  depend- 
ing on  the  course  of  study.  Special  ses- 
sion (May  term  and  summer  term) 
charges  for  tuition,  room,  and  board  are 
established  during  the  fall  semester. 


REFUNDS  FOR  STUDENTS 
WHO  WITHDRAW 


Refunds  of  tuition  and  board  are  made 
to  students  who  voluntarily  and  officially 


withdraw  from  the  College  while  in  good 
standing  according  to  the  following  sche- 
dule for  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  and 
the  comparable  period  for  the  May  and 
summer  terms: 

Refund    Charge 
Period  of  Withdrawal  %  % 

During  the  first  week 

of  the  semester 80  20 

During  the  second  and 

third  week 60  40 

During  the  fourth  and 

filth  week 40  60 

During  the  sixth  and 

seventh  week 20  80 

After  seven  weeks  0  100 


The  date  on  which  the  Dean  of  the 
College  approves  the  student's  with- 
drawal form  is  considered  the  official 
date  of  withdrawal.  Charges  are  levied 
for  services  provided  after  withdrawal. 

Lycoming  scholarships  and  grants  are 
applied  during  the  fall  and  spring  semes- 
ters on  the  same  basis  as  tuition  charges. 
If  a  withdrawing  student  is  charged  60% 
tuition,  he/she  will  receive  60%  of  the 
scholarship  or  grant.  Government  finan- 
cial aid  is  adjusted  according  to  federal 
and  state  guidelines. 

Room  charges  which  are  established 
on  a  .semester  basis,  and  special  charges, 
such  as  laboratory  fees,  are  not  refund- 
able if  a  student  leaves  the  College  prior 
to  the  end  of  the  semester. 

Full-time  students  who  after  reducing 
their  loads  continue  to  be  enrolled  for  1 2 
or  more  semester  hours  are  not  eligible 
for  a  refund  of  tuition  for  an  individual 
course.  Similarly,  students  who  register 
for  extra  hours  in  excess  of  16  hours  per 
semester  and  who  later  reduce  their  loads 
are  not  eligible  after  the  fifth  day  of  the 
semester  for  a  refund  of  the  fee  charged 
for  overloads.  Charges  will  be  recalcu- 
lated for  students  who  enroll  full  time 
and  subsequently  assume  part-time  sta- 
tus by  reducing  their  loads  below  12 
hours  during  the  drop-add  period.  The 
assumption  of  a  part-time  status  normal- 
ly involves  a  substantial  reduction  of 
financial  aid  since  most  financial  aid 
programs  do  not  extend  eligibility  to 
part-time  students. 


64 


NON-PAYMENT  OF 
FEES  PENALTY 

Students  will  not  be  registered  for 
courses  in  a  new  semester  if  their 
accounts  for  previous  attendance  have 
not  been  settled.  Diplomas,  transcripts, 
and  certifications  of  withdrawals  in  good 
standing  are  issued  only  when  a  satisfac- 
tory settlement  of  all  financial  obliga- 
tions has  been  made  in  the  Business 
Office. 


FINANCIAL  AID 

POLICY  AND  PROCEDURES 

The  dominant  factor  in  determining 
the  amount  of  financial  aid  awarded  to 
individual  students  is  the  establishment 
of  need.  Scholarships  may  be  awarded 
on  the  basis  of  financial  need  and 
academic  ability,  while  grants  are  pro- 
vided on  the  basis  of  financial  need. 
Long-term,  low-cost  educational  loans 
are  available  from  federal  and  state  sour- 
ces to  most  students  who  can  demon- 
strate need.  Part-time  employment  is 
available  to  students. 

To  apply  for  financial  assistance. 
obtain  Lycoming's  Financial  Aid  Appli- 
cation (FAA)  from  the  Financial  Aid 
Office  and  the  CSS  Financial  Aid  Form 
(FAF)  and  your  State  Grant  Application 
from  your  secondary  school  Guidance 
Office  or  Lycoming's  Financial  Aid 
Office.  Submit  the  FAA  to  Lycoming 
and  the  completed  FAF  to  the  College 
Scholarship  Service.  Box  2700.  Prince- 
ton. NJ  08541 .  as  early  as  possible  after 
January  I .  Renewal  applications  are 
required  annually. 


SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  GRANTS 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian  Scho- 
larship is  a  $2,400  award  honoring  gra- 
duates of  private  and  public  secondary 
schools  who  rank  either  first  or  second  in 
their  graduating  class  as  certified  by  their 
guidance  counselor.  These  awards  are 
based  upon  academic  achievement  and 


are  not  contingent  upon  demonstrated 
financial  need.  Renewal  cumulative 
average  is  3.00. 

Lycoming  Recognition  Scholarships 
for  $700  to  $  1 ,000  per  year  are  awarded 
to  freshmen  who  have  superior  academic 
qualifications,  have  filed  the  FAF  but  did 
not  demonstrate  financial  need  as  deter- 
mined by  the  College  Scholarship  Ser- 
vice and  were  not  eligible  for  another 
Lycoming  scholarship  program.  This 
scholarship  is  renewable  if  the  recipient 
maintains  a  3.25  cumulative  average. 

Lycoming  Directors'  Scholarships 
of  $400  to  full  tuition,  depending  upon 
financial  need,  are  awarded  to  students  in 
the  top  fifth  of  their  secondary  school 
class  with  CEEB  scores  totaling  1 100  or 
more.  Renewal  cumulative  average  is 
3.00. 

President's  Fellowships  in  Music  are 
awarded  annually  to  students  who  are 
skilled  in  singing  or  in  playing  the  piano 
and  wish  to  continue  performing, 
whether  or  not  they  intend  to  become 
music  majors.  To  be  eligible  for  consid- 
eration, a  candidate  must  apply  and  be 
accepted  by  Lycoming  College  and 
audition  with  the  Music  Department. 
The  amount  of  each  fellowship  is  $250 
per  semester,  renewable  to  a  maximum 
of  $2,000  per  student.  The  primary 
responsibility  of  each  Fellow  is  musical 
performance  as  assigned  by  the  Music 
Department.  Singing  in  a  chamber  choir, 
accompanying  in  a  voice  studio,  playing 
for  chapel  services,  or  rehearsing  a  musi- 
cal comedy  are  typical  opportunities. 

Lycoming  Grant-in-Aid  awards  of 
$400  to  full  tuition,  depending  upon 
financial  need,  are  made  to  full-time 
students  who  do  not  qualify  for  scholar- 
ships and  who  have  demonstrated  finan- 
cial need  and  the  prospect  of  contributing 
positively  to  the  College  community. 
Renewal  requires  continued  financial 
need  and  satisfactory  citizenship  stan- 
dards. 

Ministerial  Grants  are  awarded  to 
dependent  children  of  United  Methodist 
ministers  and  practicing  ordained  minis- 
ters of  other  denominations.  The  grants 
amount  to  one-third  of  tuition  for  chil- 
dren of  United  Methodist  Ministers  in  the 
Central  Pennsvlvania  Annual  Confer- 


ence and  one-fourth  of  tuition  for  all 
others.  If  a  student  completes  the  FAF. 
this  grant  will  be  part  of  the  total  aid 
award. 

Pre-Ministerial  Student  Grants  of 
one-fourth  of  tuition  are  awarded  to  stu- 
dents preparing  for  the  Christian  ministry 
who  are  enrolled  full  time  and  demon- 
strate financial  need.  Students  must  com- 
plete the  pre-ministerial  application 
available  through  the  Financial  Aid 
Office. 

Women  of  Lycoming  Scholarship  is 
an  aw  ard  available  to  a  currently  enrolled 
female  memberof  the  junior  class  having 
completed  80  credit  hours  with  at  least  a 
3.0  cumulative  average  and  who  demon- 
strates financial  need  of  at  least  the  regu- 
lar tuition  rate.  Applications  are  avail- 
able in  the  Financial  Aid  Office  in 
February  and  are  due  in  March.  The 
award  is  normally  $500  and  is  based  on 
current  earnings  of  the  scholarship 
endowment. 

Two-in-Family  Grants  are  awarded 
to  each  member  of  a  family  attending 
Lycoming  College  at  the  same  time.  The 
amount  is  10%  of  tuition,  room,  and/or 
board  paid.  Each  member  must  be 
enrolled  full  time  and  not  eligible  for  any 
other  financial  aid  program  of  the  Col- 
lege. If  a  student  is  eligible  for  other 
Lycoming  aid,  the  student  would  receive 
whichever  is  areater. 

United  Methodist  Scholarships  are 
awarded  to  applicants  who  are  in  the  top 
one-third  of  their  class,  active  in  Chris- 
tian activities,  and  have  demonstrated 
financial  need.  The  awards  are  normally 
$500  per  year  and  the  funds  are  provided 
by  the  United  Methodist  Church.  Annual 
application  is  required.  The  student  must 
complete  and  file  the  FAF  and  the  scho- 
larship forms  which  are  available  in  the 
Financial  Aid  Office. 

Wyoming  Conference  Scholarship 
of  $500  is  granted  by  Lycoming  to  a 
student  chosen  by  the  Scholarship  Com- 
mittee of  the  Wyoming  Conference. 
These  scholarships  are  renewable  for 
three  additional  years.  Good  academic 
performance  and  service  to  the  church 
are  the  criteria  for  this  award. 

C.  Luther  Culler  Scholarship  for 
$500  is  available  based  on  scholarship. 


65 


Dewitt-Bodine  Scholarships  are 

awarded  to  the  highest-ranked  student  in 
the  graduating  class  each  year  from 
Hughesville  High  School  who  attends 
Lycoming  College.  The  recipient  is 
designated  by  the  Hughesville  guidance 
director.  The  scholarship  amount  is 
$2,200  and  is  credited  at  $550  per  year 
over  four  years  of  attendance  at  Lycom- 
ing. If  the  student  is  in  a  three-year  pro- 
gram (such  as  Med-Tech),  the  student 
will  receive  the  award  divided  equally 
over  the  three  years  of  attendance  at 
Lycoming. 

Clara  Kramer  Eaton  Scholarships 
are  awarded  to  the  highest-ranked  stu- 
dent in  the  graduating  class  each  year 
from  Line  Mountain  High  School  who 
attends  Lycoming  College.  The  recipient 
is  designated  by  the  high  school's  gui- 
dance office.  The  scholarship  is  $400  per 
year  for  up  to  four  years'  attendance  at 
Lycoming. 

James  A.  Heether  Scholarship  for 
$300  is  available  based  on  financial 
need.  Priority  will  be  given  to  a  chemis- 
try major. 

George  W.  HuntleVi  Jr.  Scholar- 
ship for  $700  is  available  to  help  defray 
the  tuition  and  expenses  for  the  first  year 
only  of  any  graduate  of  Cameron  County 
High  School  (formerly  Emporium  High 
School).  The  selection  is  made  by  the 
superintendent  of  schools. 

Robert  F.  Rich  Scholarship  is 
awarded  periodically  to  an  academically 
outstanding  student  from  Central  Penn- 
sylvania. The  award  varies  from  $200  to 
$1,200  depending  upon  the  available 
scholarship  endowment  income.  Prefer- 
ence is  given  to  a  resident  of  the  Wool- 
rich  area  and  children  of  the  employees 
of  the  Woolrich  Company. 

Leonard  H.  Rothermel  Fund  pro- 
vides $1,200  in  financial  aid  to  needy 
students,  who  are  in  satisfactory 
academic  standing  with  primary  prefer- 
ence given  to  Trevorton  residents  and 
second  preference  given  to  Line  Moun- 
tain School  District  area  residents. 

Samuel  Willard  Memorial  Scholar- 
ships are  awarded  to  a  junior  or  senior 
student  at  Lycoming  who  is  in  need  of 
financial  assistance  to  complete  his/her 
decree.  Preference  is  given  to  a  religion 


major.  The  award  varies  between  $300 
and  $600  depending  upon  available 
scholarship  endowment  income. 


FEDERAL  AID 

Pell  Grant  —  This  federal  grant  pro- 
vides up  to  $2, 100  per  year  for  full-time 
students  who  can  demonstrate  financial 
need.  Application  can  be  made  when 
submitting  the  Financial  Aid  Form 
(FAF).  the"PHEAA  State  Grant  Appli- 
cation, or  by  separate  federal  application 
on  forms  which  are  available  in  secon- 
dary school  guidance  offices  or  the 
Financial  Aid  Office  at  Lycoming.  All 
students  are  urged  to  apply  for  this  pro- 
gram. 

Supplemental  Educational  Oppor- 
tunity Grants  (SEOG)  —  This  federal 
government  program  provides  additional 
assistance  to  those  students  with  finan- 
cial need.  Awards  can  be  made  in 
amounts  ranging  from  $200  to  $2,000 
and  are  usually  based  entirely  on  excep- 
tional financial  need.  Renewal  is  possi- 
ble if  the  applicant  has  no  reduction  in 
financial  need  in  succeeding  years. 

National  Direct  Student  Loan 
(NDSL)  —  This  federal  five  percent 
interest  loan  permits  a  total  of  $6,000  to 
be  borrowed  by  the  undergraduate  stu- 
dent at  a  rate  not  to  exceed  $3,000  the 
first  two  years.  Repayment  does  not 
begin  until  6  months  after  graduation  or 
withdrawal  from  college.  Loans  are  nor- 
mally renewed  annually  if  the  applicant 
files  a  renewal  application  by  May  1  and 
continues  to  demonstrate  financial  need. 

Federal  College  Work  Study  Grants 
(CWSP)  —  An  opportunity  is  provided 
through  this  program  for  students  to  earn 
part  of  their  college  expenses  and  to  gain 
some  practical  experience  by  working  on 
campus.  Federal  government  financial- 
need  guidelines  must  be  met  to  be  eligi- 
ble for  this  program.  Students  who  do  not 
meet  these  guidelines  should  consult 
with  the  Career  Development  Center  or 
Financial  Aid  Office  for  other  employ- 
ment opportunities. 


STATE  GRANTS 

State  Grants  —  All  applicants  for 
financial  aid  are  urged  to  investigate 
programs  sponsored  by  their  home  states 
and  to  learn  about  and  heed  application 
deadlines.  Pennsylvania  students  should 
apply  for  a  PHEAA  State  Grant  before 
April  30.  The  PHEAA  State  Grant  pro- 
vides up  to  $1 .500  to  eligible  Pennsylva- 
nia residents  who  are  in  need  of  financial 
aid.  Residents  of  other  states  may  be 
eligible  for  grant  assistance  through  their 
states.  A  few  of  these  states  are  Dela- 
ware. Maryland.  Ohio,  Rhode  Island, 
and  West  Virginia.  Applications  should 
be  available  through  your  high  school 
guidance  office. 

Scholars  in  Education  Awards 
(SEA)  were  developed  by  PHEAA  to 
help  remedy  the  need  for  teachers  of 
science  and  math  in  Pennsylvania  secon- 
dary schools.  If  you  are  a  highly  quali- 
fied high  school  senior  who  wishes  to 
teach  math  or  science  as  a  career,  and  if 
you  meet  the  qualifications  set  by 
PHEAA.  you  could  receive  an  award  of 
507f  of  your  annual  tuition.  You  must 
agree  to  teach  math  or  science  in  a  Penn- 
sylvania secondary  school  if  you  accept 
the  award,  and  if  you  fail  to  keep  this 
commitment,  repay  the  grant  as  a  loan 
plus  interest.  Check  with  your  high 
school  guidance  counselor. 


LOANS 

State  Guaranteed  Loans  —  Most 
states,  including  Pennsylvania.  New 
Jersey,  and  New  York,  provide  state 
guaranteed  loans  through  local  banks  and 
lending  institutions.  This  program  pro- 
vides 8  percent  interest  loans  of  up  to 
$2,500  per  academic  level  for  education- 
al expenses  with  repayment  extended 
over  a  long-term  schedule.  Applicants 
should  consult  local  banks  early  in  their 
senior  year. 

PLUS  Loans  —  PLUS  Loans  are 
meant  to  provide  additional  funds  for 
educational  expen.ses.  The  interest  rate  is 
12  percent.  Parents  of  dependent  under- 
graduate students  may  borrow  up  to 
$3,000  per  year.  Independent  undergra- 


66 


duates  may  borrow  up  to  $2,500  per 
year;  however,  for  independent  students, 
the  PLUS  loan,  combined  with  any  GSL 
the  undergraduate  may  have  for  that 
level,  cannot  exceed  $2,500.  Applica- 
tions and  information  are  available  from 
your  bank  or  other  lending  institution. 
PHEAA  Family  Partnership  Loans 
are  made  available  to  families  who  can- 
not borrow  sufficient  funds  through 
Guaranteed  Student  Loan  (GSL).  Loans 
range  from  $2,000  to  $5,500.  Pennsyl- 
vania residents  and  students  from  other 
states  attending  a  PA  college  are  eligible 
to  apply.  For  PA  residents  consideration 
is  automatically  given  when  you  file  a 
PHEAA  GSL  application.  Out-of-state 
students  should  contact  the  Financial  Aid 
Office  for  application  information. 


OTHER  SOURCES  OF  AID 

Community  Scholarships  —  In 

many  communities,  foundations,  organi- 


zations, and  in  some  cases  high  schools, 
provide  funds  for  worthy  students. 
Applicants  should  consult  with  their 
guidance  counselor  or  principal. 

Education  Financing  Plans  —  The 
Business  Office  at  Lycoming  provides 
information  about  plans  which  enable 
parents  to  pay  College  expenses  on  a 
monthly  basis  through  selected  compa- 
nies. 

Pennsylvania  National  Guard  — 
Students  participating  in  this  program 
may  be  eligible  for  scholarship,  credit 
programs,  educational  bonus,  or  loan 
repayment.  Contact  a  Guard  Unit  in  your 
area  for  more  information. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
(ROTO  Scholarships  —  Students  who 
participate  in  Army  ROTC  are  eligible 
for  three-,  two-,  and  one-year  ROTC 
scholarships  to  finance  tuition,  books, 
laboratory  fees,  and  other  charges  with 
the  exception  of  room  and  board.  ROTC 
Scholarship  students  also  receive  $100 
per  month  during  the  academic  year. 


Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps 
(ROTC)  Stipends  —  Students  who  par- 
ticipate in  the  Army  ROTC  program 
receive  an  annual  stipend  of  $1 .000  dur- 
ing their  junior  and  senior  years.  They 
also  receive  half  of  a  second  lieutenant's 
pay  plus  travel  expenses  for  a  six-week 
advanced  summer  camp  between  junior 
and  senior  years. 

Tuition  Exchange  Grants  — 
Lycoming  College  is  a  member  of  both 
the  Tuition  Exchange  Program  and  the 
CIC  Tuition  Exchange  Program.  These 
programs  are  for  dependent  students  of 
employees  at  participating  institutions  of 
higher  education.  You  should  contact  the 
Tuition  Exchange  Officer  at  your  host 
institution  for  information  regarding 
sponsorship. 


67 


The  Campus 


Eighteen  buildings  sit  on  Lycoming's 
20-acre  main  campus.  Most  buildings 
have  been  constructed  since  1950.  even 
though  Lycoming  —  one  of  America's 
50  oldest  colleges  and  universities  — 
dates  back  to  1812.  All  buildings  are 
easy  to  reach  from  anywhere  on  campus. 
A  12-acre  athletic  field  and  football  sta- 
dium lie  a  few  blocks  north  of  the  main 
campus. 

Modern  buildings  include  the  eight 
residence  halls,  which  contain  clean  and 
comfortable  single  and  double  rooms; 
the  library;  the  student  union;  and  the 
physical  education/recreation  center. 
Up-to-date  facilities  include  the  theatre, 
the  planetarium,  the  computer  center,  an 
electronic-music  studio,  a  photography 
laboratory,  and  an  art  gallery.  The  com- 
puter center  opened  in  1969;  the  art  gal- 
lery and  physical  education  center 
opened  in  1980.  An  arts  center  was  reno- 
vated and  opened  in  1983. 


RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury  Hall  (1962)  —  Sleeps  1 54  stu- 
dents. Named  in  honor  of  Bishop  Francis 
Asbury.  the  father  of  The  United 
Methodist  Church  in  America,  who 
made  the  circuit  through  the  upper  Sus- 
quehanna District  in  1812,  the  year 
Lycoming  (then  the  Williamsport 
Academy)  opened  its  doors. 
Crever  Hall  (1962)  —  Sleeps  126  stu- 
dents in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Hon- 
ors Lycoming's  founder  and  first  finan- 
cial agent,  the  Rev.  Benjamin  H.  Crever. 
who  helped  persuade  the  Baltimore  Con- 
ference to  purchase  the  school  from  the 
Williamsport  Town  Council  in  1848. 
East  Hall  (1962)  —  Houses  most  of  the 
chapters  of  Lycoming's  national  frater- 
nities and  other  students.  The  self- 
contained  fraternity  units  each  contain 
rooms,  a  lounge,  and  a  chapter  room.  All 
students  share  a  large  social  area. 
Forrest  Hall  (1968)  —  Sleeps  92  stu- 
dents in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Hon- 
ors Dr.  and  Mrs.  Fletcher  Bliss  Forrest 
and  Anna  Forrest  Burfiendt  '30,  the 
parents  and  sister  of  Katherine  Forrest 
Mathers  '28,  whose  generosity  estab- 
lished the  memorial. 


Rich  Hall  (1948)  —  Sleeps  105  students 
in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  the 
Rich  family  of  Woolrich,  Pennsylvania. 
Houses  the  health  service  and  the  Sara  J. 
Walter  Lounge  for  commuting  students. 
Skeath  Hall  (1965)  —  The  largest  resi- 
dence hall,  it  sleeps  212  students.  Hon- 
ors the  late  J.  Milton  Skeath.  professor  of 
psychology  and  four-time  Dean  of  the 
College  tYom  1921  to  1967. 
Wesley  Hall  (1956)  —  Sleeps  144  stu- 
dents. Honors  John  Welsey.  the  founder 
of  Methodism. 

Williams  Hall  (1965)  —  Sleeps  146  stu- 
dents in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Hon- 
ors Mary  Ellen  Whitehead  Williams, 
mother  of  Joseph  A.  Williams,  of  St. 
Marys.  Pennsylvania,  whose  bequest 
established  the  memorial. 


ACADEMIC 

Academic  Center  (1968)  —  Probably  the 
most  architecturally  impressive  building 
on  campus,  the  center  actually  is  com- 
posed of  four  buildings;  the  library. 
Wendle  Hall,  the  Arena  Theatre  and 
laboratories,  and  the  faculty  office 
building. 

Library:  Contains  more  than  150,000 
volumes  and  up  to  1 ,000  periodical 
titles,  the  Art  Gallery,  the  computer 
center,  a  nursing  skills  laboratory, 
and  a  comfortable  lounge  that  is  util- 
ized for  study  and  special  events.  It 
can  accommodate  700  students,  and 
serves  as  a  federal  repository. 
Art  Gallery  (1980:)  Located  in  the 
northwest  comer  of  the  first  floor  of 
the  library,  the  gallery  contains  exhi- 
bits year-round,  including  shows  of 
student  work. 

Computer  Center  (1979):  Located  in 
the  basement  of  the  library,  the  center 
hou.ses  a  DEC  PDPI 1/70  primary  unit 
and  Commodore,  Radio  Shack  and 
APPLE  micro-computers.  The  prim- 
ary unit  is  equipped  with  the  RSTS-E 
operating  system,  1 .25  Mega-bytes  of 
main  memory,  134  Mega-bytes  disk 
storage,  and  14  remote  terminals  for 
student  use.  The  center  has  computer 
graphics  capability. 


Nursing  Skills  Laboratory  (1983): 

Located  in  the  lower  level  of  the 
library,  it  is  a  replica  of  a  modem 
hospital  ward,  complete  with  10 
simulated  work  stations,  a  nurses' 
station,  and  all  the  medical  equipment 
used  by  nurses. 

Wendle  Hall:  Contains  20  class- 
rooms, the  psychology  laboratories, 
and  spacious  Pennington  Lounge,  an 
informal  meeting  place  for  students 
and  faculty. 

Arena  Theatre  and  Laboratories: 
The  204-seat  thrust-stage  theatre  is 
one  of  the  finest  in  the  region.  It 
includes  projection  facilities,  scene 
and  costume  shops,  a  make-up  room, 
and  a  multiple-use  area  known  as  the 
Down  Stage,  where  one-act  experi- 
mental plays  are  performed.  The  lan- 
guage, business,  mathematics,  and 
physics  laboratories  are  situated  on 
the  upper  floors.  The  Detwiler  Plane- 
tarium is  located  on  the  ground  floor. 
Faculty  Office  Building:  Contains 
faculty  offices,  seminar  rooms,  and  a 
735-seat  lecture  hall. 

Fine  Arts  Center  (1923,  renovated 
1983)  —  Contains  studios,  sculpture 
foundry,  woodshop,  printmaking  shop, 
classrooms,  lecture  hall,  offices. 

Photographic  Laboratory  (1984): 
Located  in  the  lower  level  of  the  Fine 
Arts  Center,  it  contains  all  the  mater- 
ials and  equipment  of  any  commercial 
laboratory . 

Science  Building  (1957)  —  Includes  the 
biology  and  chemistry  laboratories, 
classrooms,  faculty  offices,  a  lecture 
hall,  and  a  greenhouse. 
Clarke  Building  (1939)  —  Includes 
recital  hall,  music  classrooms,  practice 
studios,  an  electronic-music  studio, 
faculty  offices,  two  chapels,  and  the 
United  Campus  Ministry  Center. 


ADMINISTRATION 

John  W.  Long  Hall  (1951)  —  Opened 
originally  as  the  library,  it  now  houses 
the  administrative  offices,  including 
those  for  the  president,  dean,  treasurer. 


68 


registrar,  admissions,  alumni  affairs, 
public  relations,  institutional  advance- 
ment, career  development,  publications, 
and  financial  aid.  It  includes  a  reception 
area,  central  communications,  and  the 
printing  and  bulk  mail  office. 


RECREATION 

Physical  Education  and  Recreation 
Center  (1980)  —  Includes  the  George  R. 
Lamade  Gymnasium,  uhich  contains 
basketball  and  other  courts;  a  six-lane 
swimming  pool;  all-purpose  room;  sauna 
and  steam  room;  weight  room;  offices; 
classrooms,  and  Alumni  Lounge. 
Wertz  Student  Center  {1959}'—  Con- 
tains the  main  and  private  dining  rooms, 
Burchfield  Lounge,  a  recreation  area, 
game  rooms,  music  room,  theatre,  cafe 
with  stage,  bookstore,  post  office,  stu- 
dent organization  offices,  and  FM  radio 
station.  Honors  Bishop  D.  Frederick 
Wertz.  president  of  Lycoming  from  1955 
to  1968. 


RELIGIOUS 

Clarke  Building  (1939)  —  Lycoming's 
landmark,  the  building  contains  Clarke 
Chapel.  St.  John  Neumann  Chapel,  the 
United  Campus  Ministry  Center,  and 
music  department  studios  and  offices. 


69 


Academic  Calendar:  1985-86 


Fall  Semester 

Bills  are  due Ausust  22 

Orientation  of  new  faculty  August  23 

Residence  halls  open August  25 

Faculty  available  for  advising  August  26 

Classes  begin  first  period August  27 

Processing  of  drop/add  begins August  27 

Re-registration  fee  of  $25  applies  after  this  date September  2 

Last  day  for  drop/add September  2 

Last  day  to  elect  audit  and  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades September  2 

Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for  courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades 

were  recorded  in  Spring,  May.  and  summer  terms October  7 

Mid-semester  deficiency  reports  for  freshmen  due  in  Registrar's  Office  at  noon October  14 

Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for  courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades 

were  recorded  in  fall  semester 

Preregistration  for  students  who  have  completed  at  least  one  semester October  29-31 

Preregistration  for  sophomores  and  juniors 

Preregistration  for  freshmen November  8-9 

Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W.  WP.  WF  grades November  18 

Residence  halls  close  at  10  a.m.  for  Thanksgiving  recess November  27 

Residence  halls  open  at  noon  after  Thanksgiving December  1 

Classes  resume  first  period  after  Thanksgiving December  2 

Residence  halls  close  at  9  p.m.  for  spring  recess 

Residence  halls  open  at  noon  after  spring  recess 

Classes  resume  first  period  after  spring  recess 

Final  examinations  begin December  9 

Semester  ends  at  5  p.m December  13 

Residence  halls  close  at  9  p.m December  13 

May  term 

Residence  halls  open May  4 

Classes  begin May  5 

Last  day  for  drop/add May  6 

Last  day  to  elect  audit  and  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades May  6 

Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W,  WP,  WF  grades May  23 

Term  ends May  30 

Residence  halls  close  at  4  p.m May  30 


Spring  semester 

January  2 

January  5 

January  6 
January  6 
January  10 
January  10 
Januarv  10 


February  21 

February  14 

March  26,  27 
April  1-2 
April  4 


February  2 
March  9 
March  10 
April  21 
April  25 
April  25 

Summer  term 

June  I 
June  2 
June  4 
June  4 
June  27 
July  4 
July  II 


Special  dates  to  remember: 

Freshman  convocalion AuiiusI  27 

All-College  picnic August  31 

Labor  Day  (classes  In  session) September  2 

Honiecommg  Weekend September  27-29 

Parents  Weekend October  11-12 

Long  weekend  (classes  suspended) October  25 

Thanksgiving  recess November  27-December  2 

Spring  recess February  28-.March  4 

Good  Friday  (afternoon  classes  suspended) March  2X 

Honors  Day April  8 

Baccalaureate May  4 

Commencement May  4 

Memorial  Day  (no  classes) May  26 

Independence  Day  (no  classes) July  4 


70 


Directory 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold  H.  Shreckengast.  Jr Chairman 

Nathan  W .  Stuart.  i.D Vice  Chairman 

Paul  G.  Giimore Secretary 

William  L.  Baker Treasurer 

W.  Gibbs  McKenney.  LL.D.,  L.H.D Chairman  Emeritus 

Fred  A.  Pennington.  LL.D Chairman  Emeritus 

Honorary  Trustees 

Bishop  Hermann  W.  Kaebnick.  D.D..  L.H.D. ,  LL.D Hershey 

Ralph  E.  Kelchner Jersey  Shore 

Arnold  A.  Phipps.  II Williamsport 

George  L.  Steams,  II Williamsport 

W.  Russell  Zacharias Allentown 

Trustees 
Elected                                                                           Term  expires  1986 
1983     John  T.  Detwiler Williamsport 

1980  Richard  W.  DeWald Montoursville 

1974     Daniel  G.  Fultz Pittsford.  NY 

1965     James  G.  Law.  D.  Text.  Sci Bloomsburg 

1970  John  E.  Person.  Jr Williamsport 

1983     Marv  R.  Schweikle.  M.D.  (Alumni  Representative)  Montoursville 

1972     Donald  E.  Shearer.  M.D Montoursville 

1983  Hon.  Clinton  W.  Smith Williamsport 

1961     Nathan  W.  Stuart.  J.D Williamsport 

1971  Willis  W.  Willard.  III.  M.D Hershey 

Elected  Term  expires  1987 

1984  Hon.  Robert  W.  Edgar.  LL.D.  (Alumni  Representative)  Glen  Riddle 

1969     Samuel  H.  Evert... ^ Bloomsburg 

1972  The  Rev.  Brian  A.  Fetterman Williamsport 

1978     Harold  D.  Hershberger,  Jr Williamsport 

1978     JohnC.  Lundy Williamsport 

1984  D.  Stephen  Martz Duncansville 

1981  William  Pickelner Williamsport 

1978  John  Y.  Schreyer Little  Falls.  NJ 

1985  Robert  L.  Shangraw Williamsport 

1972  Harold  H.  Shreckengast.  Jr.     Jenkintown 

Elected  Term  expires  1988 

1979  David  Y.  Brouse Salem.  MA 

1951     Paul  G.  Gilmore Williamsport 

1985     Seth  D.  Keller  (Alumni  Representative) Williamsport 

1982  Margaret  D.  L'heureux Williamsport 

1973  Robert  G.  Little.  M.D Hamsburg 

1964  W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D..  L.H.D Baltimore.  MD 

1973  G.  Jackson  Miller Altoona 

1958  Fred  A.  Pennin2ton.  LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1982  Marguerite  G.  Rich Woolrich 

1961  The  Rev.  Wallace  F.  Stettler.  HH.D Kingston 

1982  The  Rev.  Stratford  C.  Tavlor Montoursville 


71 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

FREDERICK  E.  BLUMER  (1976) 

President 

B.A..  Mill  saps  College: 

B.D..  Ph.D..  Emory  Universit}' 
SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979) 

Dean  of  the  College 

B.A..  Mundelein  College:  M.A..  Northwestern  Universirs': 

M.A..  Ph.D..  Ulli^■ersiT^■  of  Chicago 
WILLIAM  L.  BAKER  (1965) 

Treasurer 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College 
JACK  C.  BUCKLE  (1957) 

Dean  of  Student  Services 

A.B..  Juniata  College:  M.S..  Syracuse  Universiry 
J.  BARTON  MEYER  (1984) 

Executive  Director  for 
College  Advancement 

B.A..  Ohio  Northern  Universitx; 

M.S..  University^  of  Dayton 
BETTY  S.  BECK  (1965) 

Bookstore  Manager 
DALE  V.  BOWER  (1968) 

Director  of  Planned  Giving 

B.S..  Lycoming  College: 

B.D.  United  Theological  Seminary 
GEORGE  W.  BRELSFORD  (1982) 

Assistant  to  the 

Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.S..  Davis  &  Elkins  College 
RITA  A,  CIURLINO  (1984) 

Admissions  Counselor 

A.B..  Lycoming  College 
ROBERT  L.  CURRY  (1969) 

Assistant  Director  of  Athletics 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 
JOANNE  B.  DAY  (1981) 

Associate  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A..  M.Ed..  Western  Maryland  College 
ROBERT  L.  EDDINGER  (1967) 

Director  of  Buildings  &  Grounds 
FRANK  L.  GIRARDM1984) 

Director  of  Athletics 

B.S..  West  Chester  State  College 
FRED  L.  GROGAN  (1977) 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

A.B..  Bates  College:  M.A..  Arizona  State 

Universitx:  Ph.D..  University  of  Missouri 
THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) 

Director  of  Computer  Services 

6.5..  Wake  Forest  College: 

M.A..  University  of  Kansas 


MARY  E.  HERRING  (1978) 

Director  of  Admissions 

B.A..  Albright  College 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) 

Chaplain  of  the  College 

B.A..  Indiana  Central  College: 

S.T.B..  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
BRUCE  M.  HURLBERT  (1982) 

Director  of  Library  Services 

B.A..  The  Citadel: 

M.S.L.S..  Florida  State  University 
HAROLD  H.  HUTSON  (1969) 

President  Emeritus 

B.A..  LL.D..  Wofford  College:  B.D..  Duke  Universitx. 

Ph.D..  University  of  Chicago: 

L.H.D..  Ohio  Wesley  an  University 
JOHN  G.  LAMADE  (1983) 

Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

B.A..  Susquehanna  University 
MARK  N.  LEVINE  (1985) 

Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.A..  The  American  University: 

M.S. J..  Northwestern  University 
MARIE  J.  LINDHORST  (1984) 

Campus  Minister 

A.B..  Vassar  College: 

M.Div..  Yale  Divinity  School 
BETTY  J.  PARIS  (1963) 

Registrar 

A.B..  Lycoming  College 
JULIANN  T.  PAWLAK  (1979) 

Director  of  Financial  Aid 

A.B..  Lycoming  College: 

M.A.,  Bucknell  University 
JEFFREY  L.  RICHARDS  (1982) 

Controller  and  Assistant  Treasurer 

A.B..  Lycoming  College 
GORDON  S.  STEARNS  (1982) 

Assistant  to  the  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A..  Bowdoin  College 
NED  E.  STRAUSER  (1984) 

Admissions  Counselor 

A.B..  Lycoming  College 
DEBORAH  E.  WEAVER  (1978) 

Administrative  Assistant  for  Residence  Life 
RALPH  E.  ZEIGLER,  JR.  (1980) 

Director  of  Alumni  and  Parent  Relations 

A.B..  Lycoming  College: 

M.A..  The  Penn.sylvania  State  University 
JEROME  M.  ZUFELT  (1984) 

Assistant  Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.S..  Boston  Universitx 


72 


FACULTY 


EMERITI 

MABEL  K.  BAUER 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

B.S..  Cornell  University: 

M.S..  University  of  Pennsylvania 
LEROY  F.  DERR 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B..  Ursinus  College:  M.A..  Biicknell  University: 

Ed.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
ROBERT  H.  EWING 

Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

A.B..  College  of  Wooster:  M. A..  University 

of  Michigan:  HH.D..  Lycoming  College 
JOHN  P.  GRAHAM 

Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

Ph.B..  Dickinson  College: 

M.Ed..  The  Pennsylvania  State  Universir\- 
HAROLD  W.  HAYDEN 

Librarian  Emeritus  and  Professor  Emeritus 
of  Library  Services 

A.B..  Nebraska  Slate  Teachers  College:  B.S..  University 

of  Illinois:  M.A.  in  L.S..  University  of  Michigan 
GEORGE  W.  HOWE 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 

A.B..  M.S..  Syracii.se  University: 

Ph.D..  Cornell  University 
M.  RAYMOND  JAMISON 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

B.S..  Ursinus  College:  M.S..  Bucknell  Universit}' 
GERTRUDE  B.  MADDEN 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

A.B..  University  of  Pennsylvania: 

M.A..  Bucknell  University 
WALTER  G.  McIVER 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.B..  Westminster  Choir  College:  A.B..  Bucknell 

University:  M.A..  New  York  University 
DONALD  G,  REMLEY 

Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of 
Mathematics  and  Physics 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College:  M.A..  Columbia  Universit}' 
MARY  LANDON  RUSSELL 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.  B..  Susquehanna  University  Conservatoiy  of 

Music:  M.A..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
LOUISE  R.  SCHAEFFER 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B..  Lycoming  College:  M.A..  Bucknell  Univer.sity: 

D.Ed..  The  Pennsxlvania  State  University 


JAMES  W.  SHEAFFER 

Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 
B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania: 
M.S.,  Universin-  of  Pennsylvania 

FRANCES  K.  SKEATH 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 
A.B..  M.A..  Bucknell  University: 
D.Ed..  The  Pennsylvania  State  Utiiversity 

JOHN  A.  STUART 

Professor  Emeritus  of  English 
B.A..  William  Jewell  College: 
M.A.,  Ph.D..  Northwestern  University 

HELEN  B.  WEIDMAN 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 
A.B..  M.A..  Bucknell  University: 
Ph.D..  Syracuse  University 


PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  F.  FALK  (1970)** 

Theatre 

Marshal  of  the  College 

B.A..  B.D..  Drew  University: 

M.A..  Ph.D..  Wayne  State  University 
MORTON  A.  FINEMAN  (1966)*** 

Physics 

A.B..  Indiana  University: 

Ph.D..  University  of  Pittsburgh 
ERNESTO.  GIGLIO  (1972) 

Political  Science 

B.A..  Queens  College:  M.A..  SUNY  at  Albany: 

Ph.D..  Syracuse  Universits- 
EDUARDO  GUERRA  (1960) 

Religion 

B.D..  Southern  Methodist  Universit}':  S.T.M.. 

Ph.D.,  Union  Theological  Seminary 
JOHN  G.  HANCOCK  (1967) 

Psychology 

B.S..  M.S..  Bucknell  University: 

Ph.D..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JOHN  G.  HOLLENBACK  (1952) 

Business  Administration 

B.S..  M.B.A..  University  of  Pennsylvania 
JAMES  K.  HUMMER  (1962) 

Chemistry 

B.N.S..  Tufts  University:  M.S..  Middlebuiy  College: 

Ph.D..  University  of  North  Carolina 
JACK  S.  McCRARY  (1969) 

Sociology 

B.A..  M.A..  Southern  Methodist  University: 

Ph.D..  Washington  University 


73 


ROGER  W.  OPDAHL  (1963) 

Economics 

A.B..  Hofstra  Universin:  M.A..  Columbia  Uni\ersit\-: 

D.Ed..  The  Pennsylvania  Stale  Univer.sin 
JOHN  F.  PIPER.  JR.  (1969) 

History 

A.B.,  Lafayette  College:  B.D..  Yale  University: 

Ph.D..  Duke  University 
ROBERT  W.  RABOLD  ( 1955) 

Economics 

B.A..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

M.A..  Ph.D..  University  of  Pittsburgh 
JOHN  A.  RADSPINNER  (1957) 

Chemistry 

B.S..  University  of  Richmond:  M.S..  Virginia 

Polytechnic  Institute:  D.Sc.  Carnegie-Mellon  University- 
LOGAN  A.  RICHMOND  ( 1954) 

Accounting 

B.S..  Lycoming  College:  M.B.A..  New  York  Universit^■: 

C.P.A.  t Pennsylvania) 
JANET  A.  RODGERS  (1981) 

Nursing 

B.S..  Wagner  College:  M.A..  Ph.D.. 

New  York  University' 
SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979) 

English 

Dean  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College:  M.A..  Northwestern 

University:  M.  A..  Ph.D..  University  of  Chicago 


**On  Sabatical  Spring  Semester  1986 
***0n  Leave  of  Absence  1985-86 


ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  B.  ANGSTADT  (1967) 

Biology 

B.S..  Ursinus  College: 

M.S..  Ph.D..  Cornell  Universit\- 
HOWARD  C.  BERTHOLD,  JR.  (1976) 

Psychology 

B.A..  Franklin  and  Marshall  College:  M.A.  University 

of  Iowa:  Ph.D..  The  University  of  Mas.sachusetts 
JON  R.  BOGLE  (1976) 

Art 

B.F.A..  B.S..  M.F.A..  Tvler  School  of  Art: 

Temple  Universir^- 
CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) 

Physical  Education 

B.S..  M.Ed..  University  of  Pittsburgh 
JACK  D.  DIEHL.  JR.  (1971)** 

Biology 

6.5..  M.A..  Sam  Houston  State  University: 

M.S.,  Ph.D..  University  of  Connecticut 


RICHARD  R.  ERICKSON  (1973) 

Astronomy  and  Physics 

B.A..  University  of  Minnesota: 

M.S..  Ph.D..  University  of  Chicago 
BERNARD  P.  FLAM  ( 1963) 

Spanish 

A.B.,  New  York  University:  M.A..  Harvard  Universirs-: 

Ph.D..  University  of  Wisconsin 
DAVID  A.  FRANZ  (1970) 

Chemistry 

A.B..  Princeton  University:  M.A.T..  The  Johns 

Hopkins  University:  Ph.D..  Universit^^  of  Virginia 
CHARLES  L.  GETCHELL  (1967) 

Mathematics 

B.S..  Universit}-  of  Massachusetts: 

M.A..  Ph.D..  Harvard  Universit}' 
STEPHEN  R.  GRIFFITH  (1970) 

Philosophy 

A.B..  Cornell  Universit}': 

M.A..  Ph.D..  University  of  Pittsburgh 
DAVID  K.  HALEY  (1980) 

Mathematics 

B.A..  Acadia  University:  M.S..  P.D..  Queen's 

University:  Hahil..  Universitat  Mannheim 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970)** 

Religion 

B.A..  Indiana  Central  College: 

S.T.B..  Ph.D..  Boston  University 
BRUCE  M.  HURLBERT  ( 1982) 

Director  of  Library  Services 

B.A..  The  Citadel:  M.S.L.S..  Florida  State  Universit^■ 
EMILY  R.  JENSEN  (1969) 

English 

B.A.,  Jamestown  College:  M.A..  Universit}-  of  Denver: 

Ph.D..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University- 
MOON  H.  JO  (1975) 

Sociology 

B.A..  Valparaiso  Universit}-:  M.A..  Howard  University: 

Ph.D.,  New  York  Universit}- 
FORREST  E.  KEESBURY  ( 1970) 

Education 

B.S..  Defiance  College:  M.A..  Bowling  Green  State 

Universin-:  E.D..  Lehigh  Universitx 
ROBERT  H.  LARSON  ( 1969) 

History 

B.A..  The  Citadel:  M.A..  Ph.D..  University  of  Virginia 
PAUL  A.  MacKENZIE  (1970) 

German 

A.B..  A.M..  Ph.D..  Boston  Universit}- 
ROBERT  J.B.  MAPLES  (1969) 

French 

A.B.,  Universit}-  of  Rochester:  Ph.D..  Yale  University 


74 


RICHARD  J.  MORRIS  (1976) 

GARY  M.  BOERCKEL  (1979) 

History 

Music 

B.A..  Boston  State  College:  M.A..  Ohio 

B.A..  B.M..  Oberlin  College:  M.M..  Ohio  University: 

Ulliversit^•:  Ph.D..  New  York  University 

D.M.A..  University  of  Iowa 

DAVID  J.  RIFE  (1970)** 

ROSE  MARIE  BOROCH  ( 1984) 

English 

Nursing 

B.A..  University  of  Florida:  M.A..  Ph.D.. 

B.S.N.^Ed.  Wilkes  College: 

Southern  Illinois  University 

M.A..  New  York  Universir}- 

STEVE  ROBINSON  (1979) 

ANDRZEJ  J.  BUCKI 

Religion 

Mathematics 

B.A..  M.A..  Brigham  Young  Universit}': 

B.S.  Maria  Curie-Sklodowska  University 

Ph.D..  Duke  University 

M.S.  Maria  Curie-Sklodowska  University 

MICHAEL  G.  ROSKIN  (1972) 

JOHN  H.  CONRAD  (1959) 

Political  Science 

Education 

A.B..  University  of  California  at  Berkeley:  M.A.. 

B.S..  Mansfield  Stale  College: 

Universit}-  of  California  at  Los  Angeles:  Ph.D.. 

M.A..  New  York  Universit}- 

The  American  University 

SANTHUSHT  S.  DeSILVA  ( 1983) 

ROGER  D.  SHIPLEY  (1967) 

Mathematics 

Art 

B.Sc.  Universit}-  of  Sri  Lanka: 

B.A..  Otterbein  College:  M.F.A., 

M.A..  Ph.D..  Universit}-  of  Pittsburgh 

Cranbrook  Academy  of  Art 

DAVID  FISHER 

H.  BRUCE  WEAVER  (1974) 

Physics 

Business  Administration 

B.S..  The  Pennsylvania  State  Universit}-: 

B.B.A..  Stetson  University:  J. D..  Vanderbilr  Universit}-: 

M.S..  Ph.D..  Universit}-  of  Delaware 

M.B.A..  Florida  Technological  University 

EDWARD  G.  GABRIEL  ( 1977) 

JOHN  M.  WHELAN.  JR.  (1971)* 

Biology 

Philosophy 

B.A..  M. A.. Alfred  Universit}-: 

B.A..  Universit}-  of  Notre  Dame:  Ph.D.. 

M.S..  Ph.D..  The  Ohio  State  Universit}- 

The  Universit}-  of  Texas  at  Austin 

ELSAGILMORE(1985) 

STANLEY  T.  WILK  (1973) 

Spanish 

Anthropology 

B.A...  M.A . .  Universit}-  of  Miami 

B.A..  Hunter  College:  Ph.D..  Universit}-  of  Pittsburgh 

ELSIE  M.  GOLD 

ROBERT  A.  ZACCARIA  (1973) 

English 

Biology 

B.A..  Herbert  Lehman  College: 

B.A..  Bridgewater  College: 

M.A..  Ph.D..  University  of  Rochester 

Ph.D..  University  of  Virginia 

GEOFFREY  L.  GORDON  (1981) 

Business  Administration 

*On  Sabbatical  Fall/Spring  Semester  1985-86 

6.5..  Lehigh  Universit}-: 

**0n  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1985-86 

M.B.A..  Duke  Universit}-:  C.P.LM. 

FREDL.  GROGAN(1977) 

Political  Science 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

A.B..  Bates  College:  M.A..  Arizona  State  Universit}-: 

JERRY  D.  ALLEN  (1984) 

Ph.D..  Universit}-  of  Missouri 

Theatre 

THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966) 

B.F.A..  M.F.A..  Utah  State  Universit}- 

Director  of  Computer  Services;  Mathematics 

RICHARD  J.  BARKER  (1982) 

B.S..  Wake  Forest  College:  M.A..  Universit}-  of  Kansas 

Spanish 

OWEN  F.  HERRING  (1965) 

B.A..  Hamilton  College:  M.A..  Universit}-  of  Iowa: 

Philosophy 

Ph.D..  Universir}-  of  Oregon 

B.A..  Wake  Forest  College 

SUSAN  K.  BEIDLER  (1975) 

JANET  HURLBERT  (1985) 

Collection  Management  Services  Librarian 

Instructional  Services  Librarian 

B.A..  Universit}-  of  Delaware: 

B.A..  M.A..  Universit}- of  Denver 

M.L.S..  Universit}-  of  Pittsburgh 

75 


MURIEL  K.  JACOBY  (1984) 

RICHARD  E.  WIENECKE  (1982) 

Nursing 

Accounting 

B.S.N.^.  Hood  College: 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College:  M.S..  Bucknell  Universiiv 

M.S.,  University  of  Delaware 

M.B.A..  Long  Lsland  University:  C.P.A. 

GRANT  L.  JEFFERS  (1983) 

(Pennsylvania  and  New  York) 

Music 

FREDRIC  M.  WILD,  JR.  (1978)** 

B.A..  Williams  College; 

English 

M.M.,  University  of  Cincinnati: 

B.A.,  Emory  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State 

Ph.D..  Universit}' of  California.  Los  Angeles 

University-;  M.Div.,  Yale  Divinity  School 

WILLIAM  E.  KEIG(1980) 

MELVIN  C.  ZIMMERMAN  (1979) 

Astronomy  and  Physics 

Biology 

A.B..  University'  of  California  at  Santa  Cruz: 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Cortkmd: 

M.S..  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 

M.S.,  Ph.D..  Miami  University- 

ELDON  F.  KUHNS,  II  (1979) 

Accounting 

**0n  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1986 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College:  M.  Accounting. 

Universit\-  of  Oklahoma:  C.P.A.  (Pennsylvania) 

CAROLE  MOSES  (1982) 

INSTRUCTORS 

English 

B.A.,  Adelphi  University:  M.A..  The  Pennsylvania 

SALLY  ANN  ATKINSON  (1983) 

State  University-;  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 

Nursing 

DORIS  P.  PARRISH  (1983) 

B.S.N.,  Te.uis  Woman's  University-;  M.S.N.,  University 

Nursing 

of  Texas,  Health  Science  Center  at  San  Antonio 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Plattshurgh;  M.S.,  Russell  Sage  College 

CHRIS  A.  CHERRINGTON  (1983) 

JUDITH  A.  POTTMEYER  (1984) 

Education 

Biology 

B.S.,  University  of  Oklahoma; 

B.S..  Clarion  State  College: 

M.Ed.,  University-  of  Virginia 

Ph.D.,  Washington  State  University 

DAVID  B.  HAIR  (1979) 

KATHRYN  M.  RYAN  (1981) 

Physical  Education 

Psychology 

B.S.,  East  Stroudshurg  State  College 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois; 

DANIEL  HARTSOCK  (1982) 

M.S.,  Ph.D..  University-  of  Pittsburgh 

Visiting  Instructor  in  English 

GENE  D.  SPRECHINI  (1981) 

B.A..  The  Pennsylvania  State  Universiry; 

Mathematics 

M.A..  Indiana  University-  of  Pennsylvania 

B.S.,  Wilkes  College; 

DEBORAH  J.  HOLMES  (1976) 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 

Physical  Education 

LARRY  R.  STRAUSER  (1973) 

B.S.,  M.S..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

Sociology 

BRADLEY  NASON 

A.B..  Lyctmiing  College; 

Mass  Communication 

MP.  A.,  Universit\-  of  Arizona 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M. A.  in  Communications, 

FRED  M.  THAYER.  JR.  (1976) 

The  American  University- 

Music 

KATHLEEN  D.  PAGANA  (1982)*** 

A.B.,  Syracu.w  University:  B.M..  Ithaca  College; 

Nursing 

M.M.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  DMA.. 

B.S.N. ,  University  of  Maryland; 

Cornell  University 

M.S.N.,  University  of  Penn.sylvcmia 

EDWARD  C.  WALLACE  (1985) 

Mathematics 

***On  Leave  of  Absence  1985-86 

B.S.,  Miami  University 

M.S.,  Rutgers  State  University 

Ph.D.,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

LECTURERS  &  SPECIAL  APPOINTMENTS 

BUDDF.  WHITEHILL(1957) 

Physical  Education 

NANCY  B.  COOLEY  (1981) 

6.5.,  Lock  Haven  University- :  M.Ed., 

Worksite  Health  Program  Coordinator  —  CHIP 

The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

A.B..  Lycoming  College 

76 


BARBARA  KEARNEY  (1985) 

Nursing 

B.S..  The  Pennsylvania  Slate  University: 

M.S..  Marywood  College 
DON  M.  LARRABEE  II  (1972) 

Lecturer  in  Law 

A.B..  Franklin  and  Marshall  College; 

LL.B..  Fordham  University 
GREGORY  SZYMANIAK  (1984) 

Nursing 

B.S..  Albany  College  of  Pharmacy:  Phorm.D.. 

Philadelphia  College  of  Pharmacy  and  Science 
JOHN  J.  TAMALIS  (1976) 

Chaplain  to  Roman  Catholic  Students 

B.S..  Universir\'  of  Scranion:  M.S..  Marywood  College 


PART-TIME  FACULTY 

MARY  P.  BAGGETT  (1977) 

Chemistry 

B. A.. Regis  College:  M.A..  Wellesley  College 
ADELLE  DOTZEL  (1981) 

Mathematics 

B.S..  King's  College:  M.A.. 

The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
ROME  A.  HANKS  (1982) 

Art 

B.A..  M.F.A..  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

NANCY  WOLF  (1985) 
Political  Science 
B.A..  St.  Mary's  College 
MP  A..  University  of  Michigan 


APPLIED  MUSIC  TEACHERS 

DONALD  FREED  (1983) 

Violin 

B.S..  West  Chester  State  College:  M.Ed., 

D.Ed.. The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
GARY  GUTH  (1983) 

Guitar 

B.S..  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 
RICHARD  J.  LAKEY  (1979) 

Organ  and  Piano 

A.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College:  M.A., 

Indiana  University  of  Penn.nivania 
ALBERT  NACINOVICH  (1972) 

Brass 

B.A.  in  Music  Education.  Mansfield  Univer.sity 

M.S.  in  Music  Education.  Ithaca  College 


CATHERINE  PAYN  (1983) 

Voice 

B.M..  B.  Church  M..  Westminster  Choir  College; 

M.M.,  Voice,  West  Virginia  University 
MARY  RUSSELL  (1936)' 

Piano 

M.B.,  Susquehanna  University :  M .A.. 

The  Pennsxlvania  State  Universitx 


ADJUNCT  FACULTY  &  STAFF 

BROOKE  BARRIE  (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson  Atelier  Technical  Institiae  of  Sculpture 
MICHAEL  R.  J.  FELIX  (1980) 

Director,  County  Health  Improvement  Program 

B.S..  Cortland  University 
JAMES  WALTER  HUFFMAN  (1984) 

Assistant  Technical  Director  of  Arena  Theatre 

B.A.,  in  Studio  Art,  B.A.,  in  Theatre, 

Bloomshurg  University' 
JON  LASH  (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson  Atelier  Technical  Institute  of  Sculpture 
ANDRZEJ  PITYNSKl  (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson  Atelier  Technical  Institute  of  Sculpture 
ALBERT  J.  STUNKARD  (1980) 

Director  of  institute  of  Community  Health 

B.S.,  Yale  University:  M.D.,  Columbia  University 
HERK  VAN  TONGEREN  (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson  Atelier  Technical  Institute  of  Sculpture 

MEDICAL  STAFF 

FREDERIC  C.  LECHNER.  M.D. 

College  Physician 

B.S..  Franklin  and  Marshall  College: 
M.D..  Jeffer.wn  Medical  College 
ROBERT  S.  YASUL  M.D. 

College  Surgeon 

M.D..  Temple  University 
EVELYNN  L.  SEAMAN,  R.N. 

College  Nurse 

Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 
MARY  J.  VESTERMARK  (1977) 

Counselor 

A.B.,  Oberlin:  M.A..  Stetson  University: 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 


77 


ATHLETICS  STAFF 

JANIS  ARP Field  Hockey  Coach 

RALPH  AUGUSTINE Equipment  Manager 

CLARENCE  W.  BURCH Men's  Basicetball  Coach 

ROBERT  L.  CURRY  Assistant  Athletic  Director 

REES  DANEKER Assistant  Basketball  Coach 

JOHN  ECK Men's  Basketball  Statistician 

DAVID  L.  FORTIN Assistant  Wrestling  Coach 

ROBERT  L.  GEORGE Assistant  Footbafl  Coach 

FRANK  L.  GIRARDI Athletic  Director. 

Head  Football  Coach 

C.  MICHAEL  GREEN Assistant  Track  Coach 

DENNIS  E.  HAMMOND Assistant  Football  Coach 

EUGENE  HENDERSCHED Golf  Coach 

DEBORAH  J.  HOLMES Women's  Tennis  Coach 

MICHAEL  J.  HUDOCK Assistant  Basketball  Coach 

TERRY  B.  MANTLE Assistant  Football  Coach 

JOSEPH  G.  MARK  Men's  Tennis  Coach 

SCOTT  R.  McLEAN Assistant  Football  Coach 

J.  SCOTT  McNeill Soccer  Coach 

ALAN  J.  MORGAN  JV  Basketball  Coach 

JOHN  F.  PIPER.  JR Cross  Country  Coach 

WADE  POTTER Assistant  Wrestling  Coach 

KEVIN  ROSENSTEEL Assistant  Diving  Coach 

W.  PATRICK  SCHEMERY Head  Track. 

Assistant  Football  Coach 

BUDD  WHITEHILL Wrestling  Coach 

DONALD  R.  WHITFORD.  JR Head  Trainer 

STEVEN  R.  WISER  Assistant  Football  Coach 


ADMINISTRATIVE  ASSISTANTS 

Vicki  B.  Atwood....  Secretary,  Office  of  Student  Activities 

Katherine  F.  Baker Accounting  Assistant 

Rebecca  Bastian Data  Entry  Clerk 

Robert  E.  Bay  Grounds  Foreman 

Emily  C.  Biichle Coordinator 

Facilities  Scheduling/Purchasing 

Joyce  A.  Billeck Faculty  Secretary 

Helen  J .  Boe Typist/Clerk  Admissions 

Barbara  Bowes Bookstore  Assistant 

Beth  A.  Brossman  Gift  Records  Clerk 

Debra  A.  Brown Secretary  to  Registrar 

Pauline  Brungard Student  Loan  Coordinator 

IB.S.,  Lycoming  College) 

Barbara  J.  Carlin Secretary  to 

Director  of  Admissions 

Kathy  A.  Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard  L.  Cowher Press  Operator 

Elizabeth  G.  Cowles Career  Development  Secretary 

June  V.  Creveling Secretary.  Buildings  &  Grounds 

Patricia  Cundiff Systems  Analyst 


Mary  Dahlgren Admissions  Data  Entry  Assistant 

June  L.  Evans Secretary.  Nursing 

Robert  W.  Faus Assistant  Press  Operator 

Mary  M.  Fleming Research  Assistant.  CHIP 

S.  Jean  Gair Secretary.  Music  and  Art  Department 

Imre  Gajari,  Jr Computer  Programmer/Operator 

Irene  V.  Gohrig  Secretary  to  Dean  of  Student  Services 

Judith  Hart.  Secretary,  Biology  and  Chemistry  Departments 

Diane  Hassinger Secretary  to  Executive 

Director  of  Institutional  Advancement 

Mary  C.  Hendricks  Supervisor  of  Housekeeping 

Esther  L.  Henninger Administrative  Assistant 

for  Admissions 

Bemadine  G.  Hileman  Office  Services  Coordinator 

Phyllis  M.  Holmes Secretary  to  President 

Barbara  E.  Horn Secretary  to  Athletics  Director 

Judy  Knittle Faculty  Secretary 

Denise  M.  Koch Secretary.  Athletics  Office 

Gale  D.  Laubacher Financial  Aid  Assistant 

Judy  F.  McConnell  Library  Assistant/Day 

Circulation  Supervisor 

D.  Maxine  McCormick  Records  Clerk  and 

Secretary  to  Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

Doris  F.  McCoy Data  Entry.  Alumni 

Glenn  E,  McCreary Slide  Clerk.  Art 

Nancy  L.  Morrett  CHIP  Administrative  Assistant 

Marilyn  Mullings Faculty  Secretary 

Phyllis  B.  Myers Secretary  to 

Director  of  Alumni  Relations 

Marion  R.  Nyman Secretary  to  Treasurer 

Kimberly  A.  Owen  Library  Assistant 

Rosalie  Pfaff Switchboard  Operator 

David  W.  Poeth Assistant  to  Director  of 

Buildings  and  Grounds 

Pearl  Ringler Bookstore  Assistant 

Sheran  L.  Swank Faculty  Secretary 

Patricia  J.  Triaca Library  Assistant 

Sharon  A.  Vedder Computer  Programmer/Operator 

Deborah  E.  Weaver Damage  Assessment  Clerk 

Vickie  L.  Weaver  ....Secretary  to  Director  of  Financial  Aid 

Geraldine  H.  Wescott  Periodicals  Assistant  in  Library 

Loretta  M .  Whipkey Secretary  to  Director  of 

Public  Relations 

Donald  R.  Whitford.  Jr Athletic  Trainer 

Cathleen  R.  Wild Interim  Instructional 

Services  Librarian 

Patricia  S.  Wittig Secretary.  Campus  Ministry  Center 

Madlyn  Wonderlich Secretary  to  Dean  of  the  College 

Cheryl  A.  Yearick  Library  Assistant/Night 

Circulation  Supervisor 
Gail  M.  Zimmerman AV/ILL  Library  Assistant 


78 


The  Alumni  Association 


The  Alumni  Association  of  Lycoming  College  has  a  mem- 
bership of  nearly  1 1 ,000  men  and  women .  It  is  governed  by  an 
executive  board  consisting  of  24  members-at-large,  elected 
through  mail  ballot  by  the  membership  of  the  association.  The 
board  also  has  members  representing  specific  geographic 
areas,  the  senior  class  president,  the  student  body  president, 
and  past  presidents  of  the  last  graduating  class  and  the  Student 
Association  of  Lycoming  College.  The  association  annually 
designates  one  alumni  representative  as  a  nominee  for  a 
three-year  term  on  the  College  board  of  trustees.  The  Director 
of  Alumni  and  Parent  Relations  directs  the  activities  of  the 
alumni  office.  The  Alumni  Association  has  the  following 
purpose  as  stated  in  its  constitution:  "As  an  off-campus 
constituency,  the  association's  purpose  is  to  seek  ways  of 
maintaining  an  active  and  mutually  beneficial  relationship 
between  the  College  and  its  alumni,  utilizing  their  talents, 
resources  and  counsel  to  further  the  objective  and  program  of 
Lycoming  College." 

All  former  students  of  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary 
and  all  former  students  who  have  successfully  completed  one 
year  of  study  at  Williamsport  Dickinson  Junior  College  or 
Lycoming  College  are  considered  members  of  the  association. 

Acting  as  the  representative  of  alumni  on  the  campus  and 
working  also  with  undergraduates,  the  alumni  office  is  respon- 
sible for  keeping  alumni  informed  and  interested  in  the  prog- 
rams, growth,  and  activities  of  the  College  through  regular 
publications  mailed  to  all  alumni  on  record.  Arrangements  for 
Homecoming,  class  reunions,  club  meetings,  and  similar 
activities  are  coordinated  through  this  office.  Through  the 
Lycoming  College  Fund,  the  alumni  office  is  closely  asso- 
ciated with  the  development  program  of  the  College.  Commu- 
nications to  the  alumni  association  should  be  addressed  to  the 
Office  of  Alumni  and  Parent  Relations. 


1985-86  ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE  BOARD 

Term  Expires  June  1986 

David  G.  Argall  "80  —  Deer  Trail  Lane,  Lake  Hauto. 

R.D.  #1,  Nesquehoning,  PA  18240 
David  E.  Detwiler  (Dr.)  "75  —  503  East  Church  St., 

Martinsville,  VA  24112 
Robert  J.  Glunk  "59  —  R.D.  #3.  Jersey  Shore,  PA  17740 
Donna  Michael  Heiney  (Mrs.)  "62  —  R.D.  #2,  Hughes- 

ville.  PA  17737 
Patricia  MacBride  Krauser  (Mrs.)  "68  —  R.D.  #1,  Box 

10-L,  Mt.  Wolf,  PA  17347 
Mary  Landon  Russell  (Mrs.)  "33  —  812  Lincoln  Avenue, 

Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Susan  J.  Stamm  (Miss)  "83  —  776  Providence  Rd.,  Aldan, 

PA  19018 
Doris  Heller  Teufel  (Mrs.)  '54  —  R.D.  #1,  P.O.  Box 

852,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 


Term  Expires  June  1987 

Steven  B.  Barth  "78  —  R.D.  #2.  Box  378,  Danville. 

PA  17821 
Romain  F.  Bastian  "61  —  500  N.  Front  Street.  Milton,  PA 

17847 
Cindy  L.  Bell  (Miss)  '82  —  77  Yarmouth  Rd.,  Rochester, 

NY  14610 
H.  Ridge  Canaday,  Jr.  "66  —  2816  Orchard  Ave..  R.D. 

#3.^Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Richard  H.  Felix  "56  —  1230  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  Wil- 
liamsport, PA  17701 
Yvonne  Smith  Kaiser  (Mrs.)  '64  —  2430  Sheridan  Street, 

Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Wayne  M.  Moffatt  '63  —  R.D.  #2,  Box  307B,  Montours- 

ville,  PA  17754 
Dorothy  Ferrell  Sandmeyer  (Mrs.)  '43  &  '63  —  47  E. 

Houston  Ave..  Montgomery,  PA  17752 

Term  Expires  June  1988 

Carolyn  Moday  Edwards  (Mrs.)  '61  —  1521  Elmira  St., 
Williamsport,  PA  17701 

Robert  V.  Haas  '58  —  2805  Four  Mile  Dr..  R.D.  #3, 
Montoursville,  PA  17754 

Kay  Stenger  Huffman  (Mrs.)  '60  —  1315  Lose  Avenue, 
Williamsport,  PA  17701 

David  L.  Phillips  (The  Rev.)  '63  —  590  Lincoln  Avenue. 
Williamsport.  PA  17701 

Mary  Johnson  Smith  (Mrs.)  '59  —  1439  Grampian  Boule- 
vard. Williamsport.  PA  17701 

Otto  L.  Sonder.  Jr.  (Dr.)  '46  —  52  West  Street,  Oneonta, 
NY  13820 

Nancy  Flory  Spannuth  (Mrs.)  '64  —  333  Oakley  Dr., 
State  College,  PA  16803 

Richard  E.  Wienecke  '66  —  1636  Almond  St.,  Williams- 
port, PA  17701 

Members  of  the  Board 

Serving  a  One-Year  Term 

Student  Association  of  Lycoming  College  (SALC). 

President  —  Kenneth  R.  Schmidt  "86  —  Coral  Springs, 

FL 
Senior  Class  President  —  Elizabeth  J.  Barrick  '86  — 

Belvidere,  NJ 

1985  Class  President  —  Patricia  L.  Loomis  '85  —  R.D. 
#1,  Box  439,  Troy,  PA  16947 

Immediate  Past  President  of  SALC  —  Patricia  A.  Ryan 
'85  —  828  Mt.  Ave.,  Bound  Brook,  NJ  08805 

Alumni  Representatives  to 
Lycoming  College  Board  of  Trustees 

1986  —  Mary  R.  Schweikle  (Dr.)  '63  —  2905  Orchard 
Avenue,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 

1987  —  Robert  W.  Edgar  (Congressman)  '65  —  POB 
128,  Glen  Riddle,  PA  19037 


79 


1988  —  Seth  D.  Keller  "65  —  137  Lincoln  Avenue, 
Williamsport.  PA  17701 

Area  Alumni  Representalives 

Charles  J.  Kocian  "50  —  Washington,  DC 

Ann  E.  Weitzel  "79  —  Southcentral  Pennsylvania 

Kent  T.  Baldwin  "64  —  Greater  Williamsport 

James  G.  Scott  "70  —  New  England 

Patrick  J.  Cerillo  "77  —  Northern  New  Jersey 

Kimberly  Martin  Koehl  '78  —  Southern  New  Jersey 

Barry  C.  Hamilton  '70  —  Greater  Philadelphia 

1984-85  ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION  OFFICERS* 

President  —  Robert  V.  Haas  '58  —  2805  Four  Mile 

Dr.,  R.D.  #3,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Vice  President  for  Campus  Affairs  —  Nancy  Flory  Span- 

nuth  (Mrs.)  '64  —  333  Oakley  Dr.,  State  College,  PA 

16803 
Vice-President  for  Regional  Affairs  —  Donald  E.  Failor 

'68  —  12  Country  Club  Place,  Camp  Hill.  PA  1701 1 
Secretary  —  Carolyn  Moday  Edwards  (Mrs.)  '61  —  1521 

Elmira  St.,  Williamsport^  PA  17701 
Last  Retiring  President  —  Kent  T.  Baldwin  '64  —  929 

Grampian  Blvd.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 

*OtTicers  are  elected  from  among  the 
Alumni  Association  Executive  Board  members. 


80 


Index 


Academic  Advisement 8 

Academic  Calendar 70 

Academic  Honesty 11 

Academic  Honors 11 

Academic  Program 5 

Academic  Standing 11 

Accounting  Curriculum 20 

Accounting-Mathematics  (EIM) 21 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative  Assistants 78 

Administrative  Staff 72 

Admission 62 

Admissions  Deposit 64 

Admissions  Office 63 

Admission  Policy  62 

Admission  Standards 62 

Advanced  Placement  11 

Advanced  Standing  by  Transfer 62 

Advisory  Committees  8 

Health  Professions 8 

Legal  Professions  9 

Medical  Technoloy  8 

Theological  Professions 9 

Allopathic  Medicine.  Advisement  for  9 

American  Studies  (EIM) 22 

Anthropology  Curricululm 56 

Application  Fee  and  Deposits 64 

Application  Process 62 

Applied  Music  Requirements 48 

Art  Curriculum 23 

Astronomy  and  Physics  Curriculum  .25 

Athletics  Training 52 

Attendance,  Class 11 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA  Degree 5 

Biology  Curriculum 27 

Board  of  Trustees 71 

Books  and  Supplies 64 

BSN  Degree 5 

Business  Administration  Curriculum  29 

Calendar,  Academic 70 

Campus  Facilities 68 

Capitol  Semester 17 

Career  Development  Services 60 

Chemistry  Curriculum 30 

Christian  Ministry.  Advisement  for..  9 

Class  Attendance 11 

College  and  the  Church 4 

College  Directory 71 

College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP) 11 

Community  Scholarships 67 

Computer  Science  Curriculum 44 

Conduct.  Standards  of 61 


Contents 2 

Contingency  Deposits 64 

Cooperative  Programs 15 

Engineering  15 

Environmental  Studies 16 

Forestry 16 

Medical  Technology 16 

Military  Science 17 

Optometry 16 

Podiatric  Medicine 17 

Sculpture 17 

Counseling.  Academic 8 

Counseling.  Personal 60 

Course  Credit  by  Examination 11 

Course  Descriptions 21 

Criminal  Justice  (EIM) 32 

Curriculum 21 

Damage  Charges 60 

Degree  Programs 5 

Degree  Requirements 5 

Dental  School.  Advisement  for 8 

Departmental  Honors 13 

Departmental  Majors 7 

Deposits 64 

Deposit  Refunds 64 

Distribution  Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine  Arts 6 

Foreign  Language 6 

History  and  Social  Science 6 

Mathematics 6 

Natural  Science 6 

Philosophy 6 

Religion 6 

Early  Admission  Procedure  62 

Economics  Curriculum 35 

Education  Curriculum 34 

Education  Financing  Plans  67 

Educational  Opportunity  Grants 66 

Engineering.  Cooperative  Program  ..15 

English  Curriculum 32 

English  Requirement  6 

Entrance  Examinations  (CEEB) 11 

Entry  Fees  and  Deposits 64 

Environmental  Studies  16 

Established  Interdisciplinary  Major 

(EIM) 7 

Expenses 64 

Faculty 73 

Federal  Grants  and  Loans 66 

Fees 64 

Financial  Aid 65 

Financial  Assistance 65 

Financial  Information 65 

Fine  Arts  Requirements 6 


Foreign  Language  Requirement 6 

foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures  Curriculum 36 

Forestry.  Cooperative  Program 16 

French  Curriculum 37 

General  Expenses 64 

German  Curriculum 38 

Grading  System  10 

Graduation  Requirements 5 

Grants-in- Aid 66 

Greek  Curriculum 38 

Health  Professions  Careers 8 

Health  Services 61 

Hebrew  Curriculum 38 

History  Curriculum 39 

History  of  the  College 4 

History  Requirements 6 

Honor  Societies 12 

Honors.  Academic 12 

Honors,  Departmental 13 

Independent  Study 14 

Interdisciplinary  Majors 7 

Established  Majors  (EIM) ,.  7 

Individual  Majors  (IIM) 7 

International  Studies 42 

Internship  Programs  14 

Interviews  62 

Johnson  Atelier 23 

Legal  Professions,  Advisement  for  ..  9 

Literature  (EIM ) 43 

Loans 66 

Location  4 

London  Semester 17 

Major 7 

Admission  to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary  (EIM.  IIM) 7 

Mass  Communication  (EIM) 43 

Mathematical  Sciences 44 

Mathematics  Requirements 6 

May  Term 15 

Medical  School.  Advisement  for 8 

Medical  History 62 

Medical  Staff 61 

Medical  Technology 16 

Military  Science 17 

Ministerial  Grants-in-Aid 65 

Minor 8 

Music  Curriculum 47 

National  Direct  Student  Loans 

(NDSL) 66 

Natural  Science  Requirement 6 

Near  East  Culture  and  Archaeology 

(EIM) 48 

Non-Payment  of  Fees  Penalty  65 


81 


Nursing  48 

Optometry 16 

Optomerty  School,  Advisement  for..  8 
Osteopathy  School.  Advisement  for.   8 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 15 

Part-time  Student  Opportunities 15 

Payment  of  Fees 64 

Payments,  Partial 64 

Penalty  for  Non-Payment  of  Fees  ....65 

Personal  Counseling 60 

Philadelphia  Semester 18 

Philosophy  Curriculum 50 

Philosophy  Requirement 6 

Physical  Education  Curriculum 52 

Physics  Curriculum 26 

Placement  Services 60 

Podiatric  Medicine,  Cooperative 

Program 17 

Political  Science  Curriculum 52 

Psychology  Curriculum 53 

Purpose  and  Objectives 3 

Reading  Improvement  Course  61 

Refunds 64 

Registration 9 


Regulations  (Standards  of  Conduct)  .61 

Religion  Curriculum 54 

Religion  Requirement 6 

Repeated  Courses 10 

Requirements,  Distribution 6 

Requirements  for  Admission 62 

Requirements  for  Graduation  5 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps 

Program  (ROTC) 17 

Residence 60 

Residence  Halls  60 

Scholarships 65 

Scholarships  (ROTC) 67 

Scholar  Program 18 

Sculpture 23 

Selection  Process 62 

Social  Science  Requirement 6 

Sociology-Anthropology  Curriculum  56 

Spanish  Curriculum 38 

Special  Features 14 

Independent  Study 14 

Internship  Program 14 

May  Term 15 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 15 


Standards  of  Admission 62 

Standards  of  Conduct 61 

State  Grants  and  Loans  66 

Student  Enrichment  Semester  (SES).17 

Student  Records 1  1 

Student  Services 60 

Study  Abroad 15 

Summer  Session  Calendar 70 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 

Grant  (SEOG)  66 

Theatre  Curriculum 58 

Theological  Professions, 

Advisement 9 

Transfer 62 

Trustees 71 

Unit  Course  System  9 

United  Nations  Semester 17 

Veterans,  Approval 62 

Veterinary  School,  Advisement  for..  8 

Washington  Semester 17 

Withdrawal  from  College 64 

Work-Study  Grants 66 


82 


'MS;-